Chess Strategy by Edward Lasker

Ncv, 1924
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in
2010
http://www.archive.org/details/chessstrategyOOIask
CHESS STRATEGY
CHESS STRATEGY
BY
EDWARD LASKER
TRANSLATED BY
J.
DU MONT
FIFTH EDITION
PHILADELPHIA
DAVID McKAY COMPANY
1921
5
First Published
Second Edition, Revised
....
January, 191
February, 1917
1918,1920,1921
Reprinted
Printed in England at The Ballantyne Press
Spottiswoode, Ballantyne S Co. Ltd.
Colchester, London & Eton
CONTENTS
IX
Translator's Preface
Author's Preface
xi
PART I
PAGE
-
C9AI*.
I.
Introductory
I.
II.
II.
Rules of the Game
Notation
'
5
Hints for Beginners
7
9
Elementary Combinations
Simple Calculation
^°
Complications
^^
III. General
Principles of Chess Strategy
.
.
•
[V.
^°
20
The Opening
Development of the Pieces
On Losing Moves
Examples of Practical Play
21
21
.26
Pawn Play
Pawn Skeleton
26
27
29
52
62
The Centre
A. King's Pawn Games
B. Queen's Pawn Games
C. Irregular Openings
V.
.
^3
64
7°
The End-game
End-games with Pieces
Pawn Endings
Mixed Endings
End-games from Master-play
i?
^7
i8
^^
Introductory
Balance of Attack and Defence
Mobility
-87
....
... -97
Teichmann-Blackburne (Berlin, 1897)
Ed. Lasker-Rotlewi (Hamburg, 1910)
Blackburne-Schlechter (Vienna, 1898)
98
.
.
-
.
.
.
.100
.102
——
CHESS STRATEGY
VI
PAGB
Bird-Janowski (Hastings, 1895)
VI. The
Steiner-Forgacz (Sz^kesfehervdr, 1907)
Charousek-Heinrichsen (Cologne, i
106
108
Middle Game
109
109
General Remarks
Evolution of the Pawn Skeleton
Objects of Attack
.
III
III
112
.
" Backward " Pawns
On Fixing a Weakness
Weaknesses in a Pawn Position
"3
,
Breaking up the King's Side
114
115
115
.
Doubled Pawns
Illustrations
V. Scheve-Teichmann (Berlin, 1907)
Marshall-Bum (Ostend, 1907)
Manoeuvres of the Pieces
Open Files and Diagonals
116
117
119
121
Example
Fred. Lazard-Ed. Lasker (Paris, 1914)
123
PART II
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES FROM MASTER TOURNAMENTS
1.
Tartakower-Burn (Carlsbad, 1911)
126
.
Leonhardt-Marshall (San Sebastian, 191 1)
3. Spielmann-Prokes (Prag, 1908)
4. Tarrasch-Capablanca (San Sebastian, 1911)
4a. Howell-Michell (Cable Match, 1907)
46. X. w. Y
2.
5.
Grifi&th-Gunston (London, 1902)
Salwe-Marshall (Vienna, 1908)
10.
Teichmann-Amateurs (Glasgow, 1902)
11.
Schlechter-Janowski (Paris, 1900)
.
.
Teichmann-Rubinstein (Carlsbad, 1911)
Teichmann-Schlechter (Carlsbad, 191 1)
14. Spielmann-Tarrasch (San Sebastian, 19 12)
15. Aljechin-Niemzowitsch (Petrograd, 1914)
16. Yates-Gunsberg (Chester, 19x4)
12.
13.
17. Berlin-Riga (1908-1909)
17a. Maroczy-Berger (Vienna, 1908)
132
134
135
135
138
Mason-Gunsberg (New York, 1889)
7. Marshall-Tarrasch (Hamburg, 1910)
8. Blackburne-Em. Lasker (Petrograd, 191
4)
6.
9.
129
141
144
147
150
154
159
163
167
170
174
177
180
180
CONTENTS
Vll
NO.
1 8.
Em. Lasker-Capablanca (Petrograd, 191 4)
Ed. Lasker-Janowski (Scheveningen. 1913)
20. Ed. Lasker-Englund (Scheveningen, 1913)
21. Ed. Lasker-Aljechin (Scheveningen, 1913)
22. Forgacz-Tartakower (Petrograd, 1909)
23. Yates-Esser (Anglo-Dutch Match, 191 4)
24. Atkins-Barry (Cable Match, 1910)
25. Em. Lasker-Tarrasch (Munich, 1908)
26. Capablanca-Blanco (Havanna, 191 3)
27. Niemzowitsch-Tarrasch (San Sebastian, 1912)
28. Alapin-Rubinstein (Wilna, 1912)
19.
,
.
.
Teichmann-Spielmann (Leipzig, 1914)
Tarrasch-Spielmann (Mannheim, 1914)
31. John-Janowski (Mannheim, 191 4)
32. Ed. Lasker-Mieses (Scheveningen, 1913)
29.
184
188
193
196
198
200
204
206
209
211
215
218
37. Marshall-Capablanca
220
223
225
227
229
232
234
236
38.
241
30.
•
33. Barasz-Mieses (Breslau, 1912)
34.
Em. Lasker-Niemzowitsch (Petrograd, 1914)
35.
Reti-Tartakower (Vienna, 1910)
36. Forgacz-E. Cohn (Petrograd, 1909)
(New York, 1909)
Rotlewi-Teichmann (Carlsbad, 1911)
380. Rubinstein-Teichmann (Vienna, 1908)
242
Rotlewi-Rubinstein (Lodz, 1907)
40. Rubinstein-Capablanca (San Sebastian, 191 1)
41. Niemzowitsch-Tarrasch (Petrograd, 191 4)
41a. Em. Lasker-Bauer (Amsterdam, 1889)
42. Capablanca-Aljechin (Petrograd, 1913)
43. Capablanca-Bernstein (Petrograd, 1914)
44. Dus Chotimirski-Vidmar (Carlsbad, 1 911)
45. Rubinstein-Spielmann (Pistyan, 191 2)
46. Thomas-Ed. Lasker (London, 1912)
47. Tartakower-Asztalos (Budapest, 191 3)
39.
.
.
.
.
.
47a. Tartakower-Spielmann (Vienna, 1913)
476.
X v. Y
48.
Blackbume-Niemzowitsch (Petrograd, 1914)
Table of Openings
A. King's Pawn Games
B. Queen's Pawn Games
C. Irregular Openings
Index
....
246
249
252
254
255
258
261
263
267
270
270
270
274
278
278
279
279
a8i
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE
As the first edition
of Edward Lasker's Chess Strategy
was
appearance,
exhausted within a comparatively short time of its
improving
and
altering
of
task
the
the author set himself
to all intents and
the work to such an extent that it became
co-operating with
of
privilege
the
had
I
book.
purposes a new
and was in conedition,
second
that
on
degree
him to a sHght
of work
amount
tremendous
the
appreciate
to
able
sequence
I say voluntarily,
to
do
himself
upon
took
voluntarily
he
;
because his publishers, anxious to supply the strong
for the book, wished to reprint it as it stood.
demand
A little later I undertook to translate this second edition
&
Only a few months
Sons.
into English for Messrs. Bell
had elapsed, the tournaments at Petrograd, Chester, and Mann-
heim had taken place, several new discoveries had been made,
and it is the greatest testimony to Edward Lasker's inde-
am
able to say
fatigable devotion to the Art of Chess that I
but of
edition,
second
the
that this is not a translation of
preface,
contains
new
a
It
book.
is practically a new
what
a chapter for beginners, a new introduction, new variations.
Furthermore, a large number of nev/ games have taken the
place of old ones.
I have
no doubt that any chess player who will take the
trouble to study Chess Strategy will spend many a pleasurable
Incidentally new vistas will be opened to him, and his
hour.
playing strength increased to a surprising degree.
The author says in his preface that he appeals to the inteland not the memory of his readers. In my opinion,
too, the student should above all try to improve his judgment
ligence
of position.
Than the playing over of games contested by experts I
can hardly imagine a greater or purer form of enjoyment.
Yet I must at the outset sound a note of warning against its
X
CHESS STR.\TEGY
being done superficiaUy. and with a feverish
expectation of
something happening. Every move or combination
of moves
should be carefuUy weighed, and the student
should draw his
own conclusions and compare them with what actually
happens
in the game under examination.
This applies particularly to some of the
critical positions
diagrams in the course of the exposition of
the
several games.
set out
m
The reader would derive the greatest possible
benefit from
a prolonged study of such positions before
seeking to know
how the games proceed. After having formed his
own opinion
about the ments of a particular position,
he should compare
the result with the sequel in the game
in question, and thus
find out where his judgment has been
at fault.
The deeper study of the theory of the openings
is of course
a necessity to the student who wishes
to become an expert
but the development of his judgment
must precede it
To
him Griffith & WTiite's admirable book.
Modern Chess Openings, wiU be a perfect mine of
information.
There are thousands of variations, and in most of
them the actual game in
which they were first tried by masters is
named, thus adding
to the interest and value of the work.
I must not omit to mention
the invaluable help afforded
me by my friend Mr. John Hart, to whom my
warmest thanks
are due.
JULIUS
DU MONT.
AUTHOR'S PREFACE
The large majority of chess players who would like to improve
their
game, have not the necessary opportunity
of
pitting
themselves against players of master-strength, or at least of
obtaining the desired instruction from personal intercourse
It is for such players that the present work is
The books on which the learner has to rely hardly
ever serve his purpose, being mostly Uttle more than a dis-
with them.
intended.
of numberless opening variations, which
cannot be understood without prehminary studies, and consequently only make for confusion. In the end the connection
between the various hues of play may become clear, after the
student has made an exhaustive study of the subject, but
jointed tabulation
very few would have either the time or the inclination for
such prolonged labour.
Therefore another shorter and less empirical way must
be found in which to acquire the understanding of sound
play.
My system of teaching differs from the usual ones, in
that it sets down at the outset definite elementary principles
of chess strategy by which any move can be gauged at its
true value, thus enabUng the learner to form his own judgment
In my opinion it
as to the manoeuvres under consideration.
principles, and
strategical
follow
such
essential
to
is absolutely
in themselves
principles
are
such
that
as
to
assert
so
far
I go
conduct
of
correct game
a
development
and
for
the
sufficient
of chess.
Even though instruction in chess is possible on very general
hues alone, yet I think it advisable and indeed necessary to
explain the application of such principles to the various
phases of each game of chess. Otherwise the learner might
unduly delay his progress, and lose valuable time in finding
out for himself certain essentials that could more profitably be
pointed out to him.
CHESS STRATEGY
xii
With regard to the way
in
which
I
have arranged
my
subject and the form of its exposition in detail, I have thought
out the following plan.
After
discussing at length the leading principles under-
lying sound play, I have first treated of the openings, in which
such principles are of even more deciding influence than in
any other stage of the game, as far as could be done on
broad hnes without having to pay attention to middle and
end-game considerations.
proceeded as follows, by taking as my starting-point the
is formed in the opening, and round
which the pieces should group themselves in logical fashion.
As a consequence of the pawns having so little mobihty, this
" pawn skeleton " often preserves its shape right into the
end-game. Applying the general strategical principles to the
formation of the pawn skeleton, the learner acquires the understanding of the leading idea underlying each opening without
having to burden his memory. Not only that, he will also
be able to find a correct plan of development when confronted
vsith unusual forms of opening.
The most important result of this system of teaching is
that the learner does not lose his way in a maze of detail, but
has in view at the very outset, the goal which the many
possible variations of the openings are intended to reach.
Before I could proceed to the discussion of the middle
game, I found it necessary to treat of the principles governing
the end-game. For in most cases play in the middle game is
influenced by end-game considerations.
Here also it has been
my endeavour as far as possible to reduce my subject to such
I
" pawn skeleton " which
principles as are generally applicable.
Finally, as regards the middle game, to
of Part
n
is
devoted, I have again
which the whole
made the handling of
pawns, the hardest of all problems of strategy, the startingpoint for my deliberations.
I have shown at length how the
various plans initiated by the various openings should be
developed further. To ensure a thorough imderstanding of
the middle game, I have given a large number of games taken
from master play, with numerous and extensive notes. Thus
the student has not to rely only on examples taken haphazard
fiom their context, but he will at the same time see how
AUTHOR'S PREFACE
xiii
middle-game positions, which give opportunities for special
forms of attack, are evolved from the opening.
easily underIt has been my desire to make the subject
to appeal
and
entertaining,
time
same
standable and at the
sense
common
their
to
than
readers
my
of
less to the memory
too
strayed
have
to
not
that
way
in
hope
I
and intelligence.
from the ideal I had in mind when wTiting this book,
namely, to apply to chess the only method of teaching which
art,
has proved productive in all branches of science and
far
that is, the education ol individual thought.
satisfaction
If I have succeeded in this, I shall have the
the wide
of having contributed a httle to the furthering, in
circles in which it is played, of
the game which undoubtedly
makes the strongest appeal to the intellect.
EDWARD LASKER.
CHESS STRATEGY
PART I
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTORY
I.
Rules of the Game
A GAME of chess is played by two opponents on a square board
White and Black squares arranged
The forces on each side comprise sixteen units,
alternately.
namely a King, a Queen, two Rooks, two Bishops, two
consisting of sixty-four
All units move according to
Pawns.
in their mobility is the
difference
the
different laws, and
the fighting power they
of
and
value
relative
their
of
criterion
contribute towards achieving the ultimate aim, namely, the
Knights, and eight
capture of the opposing King. Before I can explain what is
meant by the capture of the King, I must set out the rules of
the game in full.
Diagram i shows the position the forces take up for the
The board is so placed that there is a white square
contest.
The Rooks take up their posiat the top left-hand corner.
tions at the comer squares, and next to them the Knights.
Next to those again are the Bishops, and in the centre the King
and Queen, the White Queen on a White square, and the Black
Queen on a Black square. The eight pawns occupy the ranks
immediately in front of the pieces. From this initial position,
White begins the game in which the players must move alternately.
The Rook can move
happens to be on, to any other square
A
The pieces move in the following way
from any square
it
:
—
CHESS STRATEGY
2
which it can reach in a straight hne, either perpendicularly or
horizontally, unless there is another piece of the same colour
in the way, in which case it can only move as far as the square
immediately in front of that piece. If it is an opposing piece
which blocks the way, he can move on to the square that piece
The piece thus captured is
occupies, thereby capturing it.
removed from the board. The Bishop can operate along
either of the diagonals of which the square on which he is
standing forms part. A Bishop on a White square can therefore never get on to a Black one.
^ WB
B H B H
WM ^« ^"
WM
9.
^^.
•" ^^g^;^
Diag. I.
The Queen commands both the straight and the oblique
lines which start from the square she stands on, and therefore
unites the power of both Rook and Bishop in her movements.
The King has similar powers to the Queen, but curtailed,
inasmuch as he can only move one step at a time. He
therefore only controls one neighbouring square in any
direction.
The Knight plays and captures alternately on White and
Black squares, and only reaches such squares as are nearest
to him without being immediately adjacent his move is as it
were composed of two steps, one square in a straight line, and
one in an oblique direction. Diagram 2 will illustrate this.^
;
^
I
should like to quote
my friend
Knight's move, though it may not be
on a corner square of a rectangle
into the comer diagonally opposite.
Mr. John Hart's clever definition of the
If one conceives a Knight as standing
three squares by two, he is able to move
new
:
INTRODUCTORY
3
The pawns only move straight forward, one square at a
time, except at their first move, when they have the option
In contrast to the pieces, the pawns
of moving two squares.
do not capture in the way they move. They move straight
forward, but they capture diagonally to the right and left,
again only one square, and only forward. Therefore a pawn
can only capture such pieces or pawns as occupy squares
same colour as the square on which it stands. If, in
moving two squares, a pawn traverses a square on which it
could have been captured by a hostile pawn, that pawn has
the right to capture it, as if it had moved only one square. This
However, this capture can only
is called capturing en passant.
of the
Diag. 2.
be effected on the very next move, otherwise the privilege
of capturing en passant is lost.
If a player succeeds in reaching the eighth rank with one
his
pawns he is entitled to call for any piece of higher grade,
of
with the exception of the King, in place of such pawn.
Each move in a game of chess consists of the displacement
of one piece only, with the exception of what is termed " castling," in which the King and either Rook can be moved simultaneously by either player once in a game. In castling, the King
moves sideways to the next square but one, and the Rook to
which the King is moved is placed on the square which the
King has skipped over. Castling is only allowed if neither the
King nor the Rook concerned have moved before, and if there
is no piece between the Rook and King.
«
CHESS STRATEGY
4
Diagram 3 shows a position in which White has castled on
Castling is
the Queen's side, and Black on the King's side.
a square
pass
over
must
castling
in
King
not permitted if the
to be
said
is
(or
piece)
square
a
piece.
hostile
A
attacked by a
" attacked "
when the square (or the piece) is in the line of
action of a hostile unit.
or protected
A square (or a piece) is said to be
an opposing piece occupying that
covered
square (or capturing the piece) could itself be captured.
When attacking the King it is customary to call " check,"
if
to notify the opponent of the fact ; for the attack on the King
~m~mrm^m
ill 4
* ili
**"""""
*
^
„„„„
™ wm^P ^^%^
i mm, X
X
*
1
§M,
'^m
p mi^W.^^
H m.
2
Diag. 3.
must be met in some way or other. This can be done by capturing the attacker or by interposing a piece (this is not possible
in case of attack by a Knight or a pawn), or lastly by moving
the King to a square which is not attacked. The lattei
must not be done by castling. If it is impossible by any of the
three methods above mentioned to avoid the attack upon the
King, the King is said to be checkmated, and the game is
ended.
If a King is unable to move, though not attacked, and none
of his remaining pieces can move, the King is said to be stale-
mated, and the game is drawn. A game is also drawn when
neither side has sufficient material left to enforce a mate.
(Compare page 63.)
If a player resigns his game before he is actually mated.
INTRODUCTORY
5
he acknowledges that in the end mate is unavoidable, and
the game is counted as a loss to him.
A game is null and void if it is shown that a mistake
The same appHes
was made in setting the board or men.
and number
position
the
game
the
of
course
the
when in
accordance
in
not
manner
in
a
altered
been
have
pieces
of
with the proper course of play, and the latter cannot be reconstructed from the point where the error was made.
pieces he is
If a player having the move touches one of his
under compulsion to move it if he touches a hostile piece he
;
must capture it, provided that the piece can be properly moved
This rule is of no effect if the piece
or captured in either case.
so touched cannot be moved or captured, as the case may
So long as the hand has not left the piece to be moved, the
If a player
latter can be placed on any accessible square.
be.
touches a piece with the sole object of adjusting its position,
he must apprise his opponent of his intention by saying
" J'adoube
'
'
beforehand.
It is best to move the King first when
the Rook is moved first, and unless the King is
played almost simultaneously, a doubt might arise whether
castHng or a Rook's move only was intended.
must be
If a player has castled illegally. Rook and King
If
castling.
moved back, and the King must make another move, if there
A
If not, any other move can be played.
is a legal one.
retract
must
piece
a
\yith
move
illegal
an
makes
player who
same
that move, and make another one if possible with the
should
game
the
on,
later
noticed
only
is
mistake
If
the
piece.
be restarted from the position in which the error occurred.
II.
Notation
A special notation has been adopted to make the study of
games and positions possible, and it is necessary for students
with it. The
of the game to become thoroughly conversant
French,
English,
in
use
in
still
is
notation
earUest
original and
the
from
derived
is
It
countries.
speaking
Spanish
and
m
the game, in that the squares take the
the pieces which occupy them. Thus the comer
squares are called R i (Rook's square or Rook's first), and to
original
names
position
of
;
CHESS STRATEGY
distinguish them from one another Q R i or K R i (Queen's
6
or
The squares immediately in
A distinction is made
are called QR2orKR2.
King's Rook's square).
front
R i is Black's R 8,
Black's R 2 is White's R 7, White's K B 3 is Black's K B 6,
and so on. K stands for King Q for Queen B for Bishop
Kt for Knight R for Rook and P for Pawn. In describmg
between White and Black, and White's
;
;
;
;
;
men-
a capture, only the capturing and the captured pieces are
tioned, and not the squares.
When confusion is possible, it is customary to add whether
Kt.
King's side or Queen's side pieces are concerned, e.g. K R X Q
is
Kt
which
mind
in
bear
to
necessary
In this notation it is
increasingly
becomes
This
R.
the
the Q Kt, which R is
their places.
difficult as the game goes on and pieces change
stamped
Knight
one
and
Rook
one
have
chessmen
of
sets
Many
This
pieces.
side
King's
are
they
show
to
sign,
special
with a
B is always
a white
is not necessary in the case of Bishops
K
K
:
on white squares, a white Q B on black squares.
A more modem notation is the algebraic notation, which
has been adopted in most countries. It has the advantage
Here
of being unmistakably clear, and also more concise.
the perpendicular lines of squares (called files) are named with
the letters a-h, from left to right, always from the point of
view of White, and the horizontal hnes of squares (called ranks)
with numbers 1-8 as before, only with the distinction that the
rank on which the White pieces stand is always called the first
thus the square we named White's Q B 2 or Black's Q B 7 is
now called c 2 in both cases. Black's Q B 2 (White's Q B 7)
In capturing, the square on which the capture
is always c 7.
not the piece captured is noted, for the sake
and
place
takes
In the case of pawn moves, the squares
of uniformity.
only are noted.
stands for
0—0
0—0—0
on the King's side
:.or x stands for capstands for castles on the Queen's side
castles
;
;
tures
;
+ for check.
In the following opening moves, both notations are used
for the purpose of comparison
:
1.
2.
P-Q4
P—Q B 4
P-Q4
P— K 3
I'd 4
d5
c 4
e 6
2-
d
HINTS FOR BEGINNERS
3.
Kt-QB3 P— OB4
KPxP
PxQP
QPxP
5. P-K 4
Kt— K B 3
6. P— Q 5
B— K Kt 5 B— K2
4.
7.
8.
K Kt— K 2 Castles
3-
Ktc3
c5
4-
cd:
5-
64
ed:
de:
Ktf 6
6.
78.
Bg5
_
-
Ktg e 2
Bey
0—0
In most books in which the algebraic notation is used, both
squares of a move are written out for the benefit of the student.
The moves above would then look hke this
:
I.
d 2
—
CHESS STRATEGY
8
beginners do not trouble very much about any particular plan
study of chess, but as soon as they have learnt the
in their
moves, rush into the turmoil of practical play. It is selfevident that their prospects under such conditions cannot be
very bright. The play of a beginner is planless, because he
has too many plans, and the capacity for subordinating all
Yet it
his combinations to one leading idea is non-existent.
cannot be denied upon investigation that a certain kind of
method is to be found in the play of all beginners, and seems to
come to them quite naturally. At first the pawns are pushed
forward frantically, because there is no appreciation of the power
and value of the pieces. Conscious of the inferiority of the
pawns, the beginner does not conclude that it must be advantageous to employ the greater power of the pieces, but is
chiefly concerned with attacking the opposing pieces with his
pawns in the hope of capturing them. His aim is not to
develop his own forces, but to weaken those of his opponent.
His combinations are made in the hope that his adversary
may not see through them, nor does he trouble much about
his opponent's intentions.
When most of his pawns are gone,
then only do his pieces get their chance.
He has a great
liking for the Queen and the Knight, the former because of
her tremendous mobility, the latter on account of his peculiar
step, which seems particularly adapted to take the enemy by
surprise.
When watching beginners you will frequently
observe numberless moves by a peripatetic Queen, reckless
incursions by a Knight into the enemy's camp, and when the
other pieces join in the fray, combination follows combination
in bewildering sequence and fantastic chaos.
Captures of
pieces are planned, mating nets are woven, perhaps with two
pieces, against a King's position, where five pieces are available
for defence.
This unsteadiness in the first childish stages of
development makes it very difficult for the beginner to get a
general view of the board. Yet the surprises which each move
brings afford him great enjoyment.
A few dozen such games are by no means wasted. After
certain particular dispositions of pieces have proved his undoing,
the beginner will develop the perception of threats.
He sees dangers one or two moves ahead, and thereby reaches
the second stage in his development.
HINTS FOR BEGINNERS
9
His combinations will become more and more sound, he
will learn to value his forces more correctly, and therefore to
husband his pieces and even his pawns with greater care. In
second stage his strength will increase steadily, but, and
power of combination
Unless a player be exceptionally gifted, he will
is concerned.
only learn after years of practice, if at all, what may be termed
" positional play."
For that, it is necessary to know how to
open a game so as to lay the foundation for a favourable middle
game, and how to treat a middle game, without losing sight
this
this is the drawback, only as far as his
of the possibilities of the end-game.
It is
hopeless to try to
memorise the various openings which analysis have proved
correct, for this empirical method fails as soon as the opponOne must learn
ent swerves from the recognised lines of play.
They apply to
play.
sound
of
to recognise the characteristics
must be
principles
underlying
the
all and any position, and
this
And
apphcable.
generally
manner
in
a
propounded
will
I
which
round
subject,
of
my
substance
the
brings me to
common
with
compatible
system
a
build
up
to
endeavour
sense and logic.
Before I proceed to develop my theme, I shall set down
a number of elementary rules which will facihtate the understanding of such simple combinations as occur at every step
in chess.
If
we ignore the comparatively small proportion of games
of the opponent's King is accomplished
describe a normal, average game of
can
board,
we
full
a
on
Both sides will employ their
chess in the following way.
available forces more or less advantageously to execute attacking and defensive manoeuvres which should gradually lead to
in
which the mating
exchanges.
If
one side or the other emerges from the conflict
with some material gain, it will generally be possible to force
a mate in the end-game, whilst if both sides have succeeded
by careful play to preserve equality of material, a draw will
generally ensue.
It will be found a little later that a single pawn
may suffice,
with some few exceptions, to achieve a victory, and we shall
adopt the following leading principle for all combinations.
CHESS STRATEGY
10
viz. loss
of material
must be avoided, even if only a pawn.
a good habit to look upon every pawn as a prospective
Queen. This has a sobering influence on premature and im-
It is
petuous plans of attack.
On the other hand, victory is often brought about by a
timely sacrifice of material.
But in such cases the sacrificing of material has its compensation
in
some
particular
advantage
of
position.
As
principles of position are difficult for beginners to grasp, I pro-
pose to defer their consideration for the present and to devote
my attention first to such combinations as involve questions
Let us master a simple device that makes most
of material.
combinations easy both for attack and defence. It amounts
merely to a matter of elementary arithmetic, and if the beginner neglects it, he will soon be at a material disadvantage.
Diagram 4 may serve as an example
'mm.
'
^'^^J
i
:
m
^ M^ * 'wm
^^P
^''WM
ii
^'''W%
Diag. 4.
Black's move, and we will suppose he wishes to play
P
A beginner will probably calculate thus I push on
4.
my pawn, he takes with his pawn, my Knight takes, so does
It is
—K
:
my Bishop takes, and so on.
means waste of time and energy.
his, then
This is quite wrong, and
When the beginner considers a third or fourth move in such
a combination, he will already have forgotten which pieces
he intended to play in the first moves. The calculation is
perfectly simple
upon the following
lines
:
I
play
P
—K
4,
HINTS FOR BEGINNERS
II
two Knights, a Bishop
then my pawn is attacked by a pawn and
by a Bishop,
supported
and two Rooks, six times in aU. It is
ThereaU.
times
six
two Knights, two Rooks and a Queen,
at
captured
units
six
the
4, provided
fore I can play
which
units
white
six
the
than
4 are not of greater value
lose a
In the present instance both sides
are recaptured.
is
there
and
Bishop,
a
and
Rooks,
pawn, two Knights, two
the
This estabhshed, he can embark on
m
P-K
K
no material loss.
advance of the K P without any fear.
includes a number
Therefore in any combination which
have to do is to count the
of exchanges on one square, all you
to compare
number of attacking and defending units, and
If
forgotten.
the latter must never be
their relative values
:
;
Black were to play
the pawn at
twice,
it
KtxP in the following position, because
K 5 is attacked three times, and only supported
would be an obvious miscalculation, for the value
of
the defending pieces is smaller.^
mm
mm a ^c^'i
IP
B,
Diag. 5.
could be
Chess would be an easy game if all combinations
process
mathematical
the
by
exhaustively
tested and probed
complications met
the
that
find
shall
we
But
just shown.
1
It is difficult
to
compare the
as so
relative value of the different pieces,
much
but. generally speaking, minor pieces
depends on the peculiarities of each position,
the Rook as equal to a minor piece and
Bishop and Knight, arc reckoned as equal
a minor piece, is to be the " exchange
one or two pawns (to have a Rook against
three minor pieces.
or
Rooks
two
to
equal
is
Queen
ahead). The
;
CHESS STRATEGY
12
To give the beginner an idea of
mention a few of the more frequent examples. It
will be seen that the calculation may be, and very frequently
with are extremely varied.
this, I will
^
Ml
._.^..
'^^
iSirar^p
mm.
'^m X Ml X
«
M H B
:
Diag. 6.
is,
upset by one of the pieces involved being exchanged or
An example of this is found in Diagram 6 Kt xP
sacrificed.
;
^ « fc
m
^
«
II
Al
^ »^^
ill..
......»
E#J
'^ "^M '^w ^M
'^ ^..„
^
M
Diag. 7.
on account of R x B this leaves the Knight unprotected,
and White wins two pieces for his Rook. Neither can the
Bishop capture on K 5 because of R x Kt, leaving the Bishop
fails
;
"
HINTS FOR BEGINNERS
unprotected, after which
BxKt
13
does not retrieve the situa-
tion because the Rook recaptures from B 6.
A second important case, in which our simple calculation is of
no avail, occurs in a position where one of the defending pieces
which is more imporis forced away by a threat, the evasion of
tant than the capture of the unit it defends.
In Diagram 7,
by
for instance. Black may not play KtxP, because White,
playing
P—Q 6, wouid force the Bishop to Kt 4 or B i,
would
to prevent the pawn from Queening and the Knight
given
in
is
type
same
the
of
example
be lost. A further
occurs
not
which
threat,
mating
peculiar
Diagram 8. Here a
^
wm:^ 'mmW.
fM
WB t
~ S^ mm
Diag. 8.
infrequently in practical play, keeps the Black Queen tied to
B 2 and unavailable for the protection of the B at B i.
her
K
White wins as follows
I
:
2 RxKt, QxR; 3 Kt— B 7, ch
ch, K— R i
double
R
6
5 Q— Kt 8 ch, R x Q
4 Kt—
KtxB, KtxKt;
K— Kt
-X
;
;
;
6 Kt—B 7 mate.
We will now go a step further and turn from " acute
combinations to such combinations as are, as it were, impendHere, too, I urgently recommend beginners (advanced
ing.
players do it as a matter of course) to proceed by way of
simple arithmetical calculations, but, instead of enumerating
the attacking and defending pieces, to count the number of
possibilities of attack and defence.
—
CHESS STRATEGY
14
Let us consider a few typical examples. In Diagram 9,
if Black plays P
Q 5, he must first have probed the position
The pa^vn at Q 5 is attacked once and
in the following way.
with, and can be attacked by three
start
to
supported once
three
more moves (i R Q i, 2 R (B 2) Q 2,
in
units
WTiite
more
mobihse three more units for the
also
can
Black
B
B
2).
3
—
—
—
Kt —B 4 or K 2 B
—
defence in the same number of moves (i
3,
Kt 2, 3 R Q i). There is, consequently, no immediate danger,
—
nor is there anything to fear for some time to come, as \^^lite has
no other piece which could attack the pawn for the fifth time.
<.<u#^^|i
I
m
.^P^
^^m^
^ g ^
""^s^
.
'M^
,
.„
W^-
^
"*^F^
'""
^^;^
Diag, 9.
It would be obviously wTong to move the pawn to
Q 6 after
pieces
another
two
White's R Q i, because White could bring
Black
whilst
Knight,
the
to bear on the P, the other Rook and
his
namely,
defence,
the
for
has only one more piece available
—
Rook.
The followdng examples show typical positions, in which
simple calculation is complicated by side issues.
In Diagram 10, the point of attack, namely, the Black
Knight at K B 3, can be supported by as many Black units
as White can bring up for the attack, but the defensive efficiency of one of Black's pieces is illusory, because it can be
taken by a White piece. The plan would be as follows White
threatens Black's Knight for the third time with Kt K 4,
and Black must reply Q Kt—Q 2, because covering with
:
—
HINTS FOR BEGINNERS
15
R— K
" exchange," as will appear from a
3 would cost the
comparison of the value of the pieces concerned. The " exchange " is, however, lost for Black on the next move, because
'** ^f-^^/ii
//y/y/Z/A
mxm
ft
^^iJ
Wi
iH
,.
'
ii
I
£
V////////
f^_
^::
^x^eag
Diag. 10.
Q—
B 3 forces the
White's further attack on the Knight by
of the
diagonal
the
into
gets
it
where
Rook to defend on
3,
Bishop, which at present is masked by White's Knight. The
K
wm>.
mm
mm.
^p
v/m.
Diag. II.
x Kt (not B x Kt on account
sequel would be 3 Q Kt x Kt ch,
winning a whole Rook), 4 B xR, and so on.
of B
R
xR
A similar case is shown in Diagram 11.
CHESS STRATEGY
i6
Here, too, there is a flaw in the simple calculation, because
Beginners should devote
the defending units are not secure.
special attention to this position,
which is in practice of fre-
quent occurrence.
It can be easily perceived that the Bishop cannot capture
Q R 3. But to take with
the pawn at B 7 on account of
the Knight would also be an error, because Black would then
P—
keep chasing away the covering Bishop.
K—
B—
K
B—
B 3 3 Kt— 8,
B 2 and
O 6,
Kt 4 2
I
wins one of the pieces.
Finally, one more example, in which one of the defending
pieces being pinned makes simple calculation impracticable.
In Diagram 12 it seems at first sight as if Black could play
P—
Kt X P
:
;
;
although White can pin the Knight with
;
R— K i
m
Wm,
a ^ ^
i i
i 1^
i
Diag. 12.
and then attack it once more with his Knight, Black would
appear to have sufficient protection available, with his Kt and
B.
White has no time to double Rooks, because if he does so,
after his R
K 2 Black would play the King away from his
file and aUow the Knight to escape.
But White can, by a simple sacrifice, bring the slumbering
R at R I into sudden action
K I, B— B 4; 3 Kt—B 3, Kt—Q 3;
i...KtxP; 2
4 RxKt, KtxR; 5 R K i, and White wins two pieces for
his Rook.
—
:
R—
—
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CHESS STRATEGY
17
beginner
These illustrations will be sufficient to give the
all kinds of
in
calculation
of
economy
of
an understanding
speedily
combinations. His power of combining will grow
experience.
on this basis, and thrive in the fire of practical
by referWliere an opponent is missing, the gap must be filled
of combination
science
the
of
treat
as
books
such
to
ence
and give examples taken from actual play.
CHAPTER
III
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CHESS STRATEGY
the collective
In bringing the teachings of this book under
way my mheading " Chess Strategy," it was not in any
parallel between the
tention to draw anything like an exact
operations in
manoeuvres on the chess-board and mihtary
In trying to seek such analogies there is great
of gainmg
danger of being led astray, and httle hkelihood
Plain
play.
practical
that might be of use in
actual warfare.
knowledge
incommon-sense wiU give us aU we need, without our being
fluenced by those tactical and strategical
have been found useful in war.
considerations that
The following definition may not be out of place Strategy
must be solved in
sets down the whole of the problems which
:
war, in order to attain the ultimate result aimed
such problems in various ways, and according
;
tactics
case.
Sound
at
solve
conditions
the
strategy,
tactical
when
prevailing
setting
practicabiUty,
in
the
particular
the task, must never lose sight
and only a thorough knowledge
tactical resources makes correct strategy
to
of
of
possible.
any circumstances, as unforin outward
tunately even great chess masters have done, seek
Now we shall not under
chess the teachings
similarities justification for transferring to
It sounds pretty enough to
of the strategy and tactics of war.
the
Chess is a game of war—the various pieces represent
infantry,
the
represent
pawns
the
various kinds of forces
Rooks do the
the Knights take the place of cavahy, the
the different
hues
broad
sweeping
work of heavy artillery,
say
:
:
;
CHESS STRATEGY
i8
ways in which the pieces move find a parallel in the topography
are more
the theatre of war, in that the various battle-fields
of
or less easy of access.
But it is quite unjustifiable to assign to
that Rooks should
the Knights the functions of scouts, and to say
Such
so on.
and
artillery,
heavy
as
background,
stay in the
value.
practical
slightest
the
have
not
would
pronouncements
What we take from the science of warfare is merely the
In each game the strategy of chess should set us
definition.
mate the
the tasks which must be accomplished (in order to
it is
which
opponent's King), and tactics point the way in
will
strategy
chess
Correct
possible to solve such problems.
wish
if
we
and,
possible,
only set such tasks as are tactically
expound the principles of chess strategy, we cannot exclude
to
If here and
chess tactics from the field of our observations.
to actual
analogy
some
bear
there the results of our deliberations
warfare, we may certainly give way to a kind of
parallel in real
faction in that our own occupation has some
in accordance
principles
our
fashion
life, but we must never
aesthetic satis-
with such fortuitous circumstances.
Having surveyed the problems we have to solve, we can
now plunge into our subject.
in ele-
In the first chapter, when considering special cases
mentary combinations, we have already noticed the important
the attackpart played in each skirmish by the balance between
Speaking quite generally, commonchess-board,
sense will tell us that, in all operations on the
to mainbe
will
defence
the main consideration for the
for an
justification
only
is
tain that balance, and that there
the
on
forces
more
concentrate
attack when it is possible to
ing
and defending units.
However,
though I
one
combinaelementary
discussing
when
it
not touch upon
strategic point than can be mustered by the defence.
very important point must not be neglected,
did
tions for fear of
compHcating matters
for
beginners
:
the
estabbalance between the contending forces is by no means
factor is
paramount
A
equahty.
numerical
their
lished by
longer one
the mobility of such forces, and as soon as it is no
described
recapture
and
capture
of
cases
elementary
the
of
order to
in
this factor must be taken into account
previously,
on a general survey, whether there is a sufficient
intended
defence to an impending attack, or whether one's own
decide,
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CHESS STI^TEGY
19
attack is likely to prevail. That mobility is the first and
foremost consideration should be self-evident, since the relative
value of the pieces can only make itself felt by their greater
or lesser mobility.
Except in certain positions, which are brought about by
some particular array of the pieces, the intrinsic value of a
Rook is greater than that of a Bishop, because it can command
on the board, whilst a Bishop is tied to its own
all the squares
colour Knight and Bishop are considered equivalent, because
the Knight's advantage in being able to act on all the squares
;
of either colour is balanced by the fact that the Bishop can
sweep long diagonals. Two Bishops are, generally speaking,
of greater value than two Knights, because together they also
act on all the squares, and their command of long diagonals
is a clear advantage.
The whole of this valuation, however,
comes to nought when the pieces are hindered in their mobility
by the peculiarity of any particular position.
We will consider one instance from end-game play, and one
from the openings.
In Diagram 13, White derives no advantage from being
^ ^ P
^8
^P
Wy,
^^
^P
^ ^ll
Diag. 13.
the exchange to the good, for the Rook has no file which could
be used to break into the Black camp.
In Diagram 14, the numerical equahty of forces will not
save Black, because bad development reduces the mobility
CHESS STRATEGY
20
an extent that he has no resources with
which he can parry the impending attack.
of his pieces to such
m
m m pm.^:m
m
.
...i
.^^
Hsfiiwii
^
wm.
a .^
Diag. 14.
White will assail the Black King's position on the Queen side,
and Black is unable to concentrate his forces quickly enough
for the defence of
the jeopardised entrenchments.
Let us
mind that the mobility of the pieces is the
deciding factor of their efficiency, and that mobihty is the
highest criterion by which to judge the merits (or demerits)
therefore bear in
of their operations.
We will now consider this principle in its application to
the three stages of play, namely, the opening, the middlegame, and the ending.
CHAPTER IV
THE OPENING
The only pieces available on the first move are the Knights.
In order to develop other pieces as well, it is necessary to move
pawns first, and such pawn moves will be best as give an outlet
to as
many pieces as possible.
For quick development is of
the utmost importance, and he who succeeds
fijst
in placing
awkward positions, to such
places as give them command of the greatest possible number of
all
his pieces,
from their
initial
:
THE OPENING
squares, has the better chance of
21
concentrating a superior
force on some important point.
It follows that White, having the first move, is, so to speak,
always morally justified in attacking, whilst Black should
assume the defensive. It is a step in the right direction, to
appreciate the truth of this proposition. Unfortunately most
beginners fail to reahse it, and so pave the way, from the first,
to the loss of the game.
There are not many developing pawn moves to choose from.
Apparently from the point of view of quick development only
P K 4 and P Q 4 need be considered, since they free both
Bishop and Queen, whilst other pawn moves liberate one
—
—
Generally speaking it is only required to move
two or three pawns to allow all pieces to be developed, and
it is good, on principle, to make only such pawn moves in the
piece only.
opening, which are necessary for the development of pieces.
To play other pawns really means the loss of a move. To
" lose a move " means to make a move which is not essential
" loss of a
to the attainment of a desired position. Thus the
move " results also from playing a piece to a given square
in more moves than necessary.
I shall now give a few games showing the far-reaching
The first one is a typical
consequences of losing moves.
though glaring example, which is very instructive and came
to my notice some time ago
I.
P—K4
2.
34-
5.
I will not discuss the system of development adopted by
White in his first four moves. The last move, however, can
It is the loss of a move such
at once be recognised as faulty.
as occurs in the vast majority of games played by beginners.
Kt Kt 5, since the Knight
It was unnecessary to prevent
2
In any case B
permanently.
could not hold that square
K
would have had the same
same time.
5
6.
P—QR 3
—
—K
effect, and developed a piece at the
B— K2
? ?
CHESS STRATEGY
22
This, of course,
is
The consequences ot this loss
very bad.
of a second move are swift and deadly.
Castles
B— B4
At last a developing move.
R—Ki
8.
Q-Q Kt 3
Another Queen's move. The attack on the Bishop's Pawn
may be very tempting, but must necessarily be incorrect and
why ? Because White is much behind with his development.
—
It is useless to analyse any kind of attack in face of this fact.
The beginner finds it hard to get used to this way of thinking.
He prefers to try to unravel a long string of variations and
combinations, in which he will mostly lose his bearings. Even
stronger players obstruct their own powers by refusing to see
the value of judging a position on general merits. They lose
valuable time in thinking out endless variations, to maintain
positions which could be proved valueless by general and
logical deductions.
M.M.»a^WM
!^ » til *
«^«
^
Diag.
* tlf
WB.
m
15.
Then, as in the present position, retribution comes swiftly,
8
P-Q4
White should have considered this move.
It
was obvious.
23
THE OPENING
for the Rook is most dangerous
since the opening of the K file
for the White King.
KtxB
BxP
9.
Black could have played Q xB at once.
10.
ji
12.
QxKt
pXO
K—Q I
QxQ
B—Kt 5 double ch
K.
—K 8 mate
A further example in which the loss of moves
occurs, though
famous game, which Morphy
not so glaringly, is the following
and Count Isouard
Brunswick
of
played against the Duke Karl
in the Royal box at the
1.
2.
Paris opera-house.
P_K 4
Kt—K B 3
P— K 4
P—Q 3
above, Kt— Q B 3 would
According to the principles set out
shuts out the Kmg s
move
text
have been better, since the
Bishop.
3-
P-Q 4
would be bad to
Now the King's Pawn is attacked twice. It
White would exchange pawns
support it with Kt-Q B 3, as
thus forfeit his chance of
and then Queens. Black would
the King into safety
bringing
in
castling and lose much time
course, is impossible
of
B
3.
and the Rooks into play. P-K
blocks the natural
moreover
and
as it is not a developing move,
Protecting
the
pawn
development of the King's Knight.
other pieces, and Q Kt— Q 2
with the Queen would also block
Bishop.
Queen's
the
blocks
cannot be good, as it
the Kmg's Pawn,
protect
to
impossible
Since it seems
indeed it is on
it
exchange
to
be
would
the only alternative
although it allows a White piece
the whole the best course,
to
dominating position in the centre. Wishing
;
to take up a
avoid this, Black plays
3
B—Kt5
indirectly
Knight,
and by pinning the opponent's
is. however,
manoeuvre
This
Pawn.
the King's
protects
ill-advised.
exchange the Bishop for the Knight
as Black is forced to
CHESS STRATEGY
24
The Bishop will have moved twice, the Knight only once,
therefore White will have gained a move for his development.
4.
PxP
BxKt
Should Black play P x P at once, White would exchange
Queens, release the pin, and win the pawn.
5.
6.
QxB
B-Q B 4
PxP
White has now two pieces more in play than Black, instead
and the mobility of the White Queen, which
Black himself has brought out, begins to have a threatening
effect on Black's game.
of only one,
6
7.
Q-Q Kt 3
Kt— KB3
Q-K 2
—
Black cannot cover his King's Bishop's Pawn with Q Q 2
because 8 Q x P wins the Rook, whilst now Black could play
8...Q Kt 5 ch in reply, forcing the exchange of Queens.
The text move, which is forced, blocks the Bishop, and at the
same time prevents the development of the King's Rook, all
of which is the direct consequence of the loss of one move.
—
8.
Kt—B 3
White rightly disdains the gain of the Knight's Pawn, but
prevents the exchange of Queens in developing a piece. He
proves the superiority of his position much more convincingly
in that way.
Black must now lose yet another move to protect
his Knight's Pawn.
8
9.
B— K Kt 5
P—B3
P— Kt 4
Black must try to develop his Queen's Knight at last. He
cannot play Q Kt Q 2 at once, since his Knight's Pawn would
again be unprotected therefore he plays the move in the text,
probably thinking that now White also must lose a move to
withdraw his Bishop. But in view of the fact that Black's
game is wholly undeveloped, and that he plays practically
several pieces
down, White sacrifices his Knight for two
—
;
THE OPENING
2S
he foresees the position which occurs a few moves
later, when Black is hemmed in on all sides.
pawns
:
KtxP
PxKt
BxKtPch
12. Castles Q R
R— Q i
ID.
QKt—Q2
11.
This is the only piece available to cover Q 2, for the King's
White has another piece in reserve, his
Knight is pinned.
King's Rook, and against this Black is defenceless.
I.
m.
^ M 4M
iB, il „
M
Diag.
13.
16.
RxKt
compare Diag. 12.
13
14.
R—Q I
RxR
Q—K 3
This releases the King's Knight. Now White could win
by playing B x Kt and B x R ch, but he prefers to end up with
a magnificent sacrifice.
15.
16.
BxRch
Q— Kt 8ch!!
17. R— Q 8 mate
KtxB
KtxQ
The final position shows in a striking manner how a few
well-developed pieces can be worth more than many undeveloped ones, and the whole game is an example of the fatal
consequences which can follow the loss of a move, since it
often leads to the compulsory loss of further moves in the
course of the game.
" This is the curse of every evil deed
That propagating still it brings forth evil."
CHESS STRATEGY
26
The logical sequence of the moves in this game, as pointed
out in the commentaries to it, is borne out by the curious
coincidence that I once had the opportunity of playing a game
in exactly the same sequence of moves, against a player to
whom Morphy's "brilliancy" was unknown.
The leading principle of
all
opening moves is made clear
by the foregoing pages, namely, rapid development of pieces,
and consequently the avoidance of the loss of a move in any
shape or form.
Before treating of the various systems of openings, I will
say a few words on the principles of pawn play.
Each opening is characterised by a well-defined pawn
formation, and concurrently a certain method in the developNaturally the formation of a pawn
ment of the pieces.
skeleton is not an independent factor, but must be evolved
with a view to facihtating the favourable development of
But when considering the form of a pawn position
pieces.
and that of the pieces, we cannot shut our eyes to the fact
that pawn formation must necessarily be the dominant consideration in our mind. Pawn formation is of a more permanent
character than that of the pieces, in consequence of the latter's
When we have made a rash move with a
greater mobility.
which our attacking disposition may have tempted
us, we may still have a chance of retrieving the position
by timely retreat. Once a pawn has moved it cannot turn
back, and only after the greatest deliberation should we embark
on changes in our pawn formation in order not to disturb the
balance of this " static element " of the game. But we shall
see that the pawn skeleton which was formed in the opening
often weathers the storm and stress of the middle game, and
piece, to
frequently preserves its character right up to the end-game.
I will therefore make pawn formation my starting-point in
an attempt to show the way through the maze of the openings
on the basis of general strategical principles.
If our pawn skeleton is to promote the freedom of all the
pieces, we must not build it up with the narrow view of developing minor pieces only, but must consider from the very first
THE OPENING
27
We
Rooks to get into action.
in which way it wnll enable the
the centre of the hoard
making
in
can unite these tendencies
This means for both
for all our forces.
the main field of action
sides
4 and K B 4.
K 4 and Q 4, and also in a lesser degree Q B advantage
of
We shall get a clear insight into the positional
when discussmg the
having command of the centre later on,
touch the subject
middle game. At present I will only
form, which will
elementary
an
in
it
explaining
general way,
for pawn strategy
be sufficient to develop an understanding
after
In the course of further deductions,
in the opening.
stronger-,
game has become
the grasp of this difficult stage of the
the subject to be stated
aUow
will
which
details
into
go
I will
in a more precise form.
there
pieces in the centre is of value, because
ma
Placing the
edge, which, of course,
they have more mobility than near the
from the centre
because
also
hmits their range of action, and
generally be
can
point
given
a
a concentration of forces on
effected in the quickest way.
In most cases two centre squares
once,
^
become inaccessible at
of his pawns m the
one
placing
opponent
through the
centre
•
therefore it would seem a good plan to
lure that pawn
P—K
playing
4 or
away, and this is rendered feasible by
and
Q B 4 when the opponent has a pawn on his Q 4,
the
In
4.
B 4 when he has a pawn on
4 or
apply
could
as
manoeuvres
following we will consider such
White, to
or Black, from the point of view of
P—
p_Q
K
P—K
either to W^ite
of birthwhom the initiative is, as pointed out above, a sort
instance
for
as,
Naturally, should White lose a move,
right
I
P-K 4, P-K 4
:
2
Kt-K B 3, Kt-Q B 3
the position is reversed, and Black
the attack.
of
;
is justified
P-Q R 3
m taking up
?
3
the tendency
The pawn moves mentioned above also have
for action.
giving the Rooks an opportunity
A Rook
may support its further
standing behind an advanced pawn
advance,
or, if
the pawn should be exchanged, might
get an
open file.
opponent we must,
The damage we wish to inflict on our
will not easily give
we
Thus
ourselves.
of course, try to avoid
other advantage
some
obtain
can
we
up a centre pawn unless
in doing so.
This advantage may be. that in exchanging
the
CHESS STRATEGY
28
centre pawn we open up lines of attack for our pieces, or that
we are able to place one of our pieces in a commanding position in the centre of the board.
The following example
posing White plays after
may serve as an illustration.
P-Q 4
P-Q B 4
1.
2.
Sup-
P-Q 4
His aim is to tempt Black's centre pawn away and to make
Q B 4 and K 4 accessible for his own forces. Black
might be justified in taking the pawn, if he really could hold
the pawn thus gained. We shall show later on that this is
not so, and that White can win it back easily and advantageously.
Therefore Black is more likely to play 2 P K 3.
his
—
Kt x P 4 P— K 4 would
open White's game and drive the Knight away at once, gainSupposing, however. Black plays 2. .B B4
ing a move.
should White now think mechanically, " I will take his centre
pawn and consequently have the better game," his deduction
Not 2. .Kt— K B 3
.
;
for after 3 P x P,
;
.
—
;
would be wrong. For after exchanging his Bishop for the
Knight, which otherwise would drive his Queen away. Black
brings the latter into a dominating square in the centre.
^IS^
Diag. 17.
3.
4.
PxP
RxB
BxKt
QxP
Queen cannot easily be driven away from her
commanding position, particularly as White must lose a move
Black's
—
THE OPENING
29
R P.
Meanwhile Black gains time for concentrating his forces for a deadly attack on Wliite's Queen's Pawn.
to save his Q
5.
6.
7.
Kt— Q B 3
Castles Q R
P— K 4
P—Q Kt 3
p_K 3
Kt—B 3
and wins the Q P, or
5.
6.
—K 4
Kt-Q B 3
R
P-Q R 3
P— K 3
Castles Q
again threatened and cannot be prevented.
This position shows, that to bring one's opponent's centre
pawn away and to keep one's own, does not under all circumstances mean the command of the centre, but that the opening
and P
is
up of files and diagonals for one's pieces towards the centre is
an important moment in the fight for positional advantage.
Considerations of this kind will help to improve our judg-
ment in many of the various openings treated in the following
pages.
We will class the openings in this way
A. White I.
(a)
(6)
B. White I.
(a)
(b)
P—K4.
:
P—
Black i.
K4
Black I. Any other move
P—Q 4Black i.
Black I.
P—Q 4
Any other move
C. White I. Any other move
We shall find that openings classed under C generally lead
to positions treated under A and B.
A. We have already come to the conclusion that after i P
K 4,
4 White does well to try to force the exchange
pawn on Q 4 or K B 4, and that Black will try
centre
of Black's
unless by allowing the exchange he gets a
this,
counteract
P—K
to
chance of exerting pressure in the centre by means of his pieces.
We will first see what happens when White undertakes the
advance in question on his second move. Superficially the
K B 4 is that in the first
difference between 2 P Q 4 and 2
case the pawn thus advanced is covered, while in the second
P—
—
CHESS STRATEGY
30
it
is
not.
An opening in which a pawn sacrifice is offered, is
2 P K B 4 is therefore a gambit.
Q 4 is only a gambit if after 2. .P x P White does not
called a " gambit "
2 P
—
;
—
.
Nevertheless this opening has been
recapture the pawn.
"
centre gambit," and though the denomination is not
called the
correct we will adhere to it, as it is in general use.
very considerable difference between the centre gambit
A
in the fact that in the former
compulsory, whilst in the second it may be
and the King's gambit hes
acceptance
is
declined.
—
For
2 P Q 4 threatens to take the King's Pawn. To
defend it by means of 2. .P Q 3 is unwise, since White exchanges pawns and then Queens, by which Black loses his
chance of casthng and impedes the development of his Rooks.
2...Kt— Q B 3 is also bad, since after 3 PxP, Kt xP 4 P
K B 4, White drives the Knight away, gaining a strong hold
on the centre, and Black has no compensation for giving
up his centre pawn. It may be mentioned here that after
2...Kt Q B 3, 3 P Q 5 would be a useless move, as to begin
with it would be inconsequent, since P Q 4 was played in
order to clear the centre, and moreover it would block up a
diagonal which could be most useful to the King's Bishop.
We conclude now that Black cannot hold his pawn at K 4.
He must relinquish the centre by 2... PxP. He will now
either attempt to bring away White's King's Pawn by
advancing his own Q P to Q 4, or try to utilise the King's file,
which was opened by his second move, and operate against
We
P. The Rooks are indicated for this task.
White's
shall refer to the execution of these plans later on.
In the King's gambit. White's attempt to bring away Black's
King's Pawn may be safely ignored.
The move 2 P K B 4 does not threaten to take the King's
P by Q R 5 ch. Black
Pawn, as Black would win White's
can therefore develop in security with 2...B B 4, and if
B 3, there is no
then White prevents the Q check by Kt
objection to Black protecting his King's Pawn with P Q 3,
After 4 B B 4,
as the King's Bishop is already developed.
Black has still no need to protect his K P with Kt Q B 3,
but can play Kt K B 3 first, because after 5 PxP, P X P
6 Kt X P would be answered by 6. .Q Q 5 winning a piece.
:
.
—
;
—
—
—
K
—
—
K
—K
—
—
—
—
—
;
.
—
THE OPENING
31
because
Black keeps the upper hand in these early encounters
White
whilst
piece,
a
with
move
he has made a developing
of
purpose
the
for
useless
is
which
move
has played a pawn
development.
W.^^^ ^i
T Hi
mm
*
^11
,
2.
m
2.
THE OPENING
difficult
33
This principle must also guide us
and intricate play.
in other openings.
A good example is to be found in the so-called " Danish
gambit," ^ which will lead us back to those openings in which
WTiite plays
Q 4,
Q 4 on his second move. After 2
P X P, \\Tiite has the option of sacrificing two pawns to obtain
P—
P—
a very rapid development 3
P—Q B 3, PxP
;
4
B—Q B 4,
PxP;5QBxP.
It may now be just possible for Black to
avoid the many threats which White can bring to bear with
his beautifully placed forces, perhaps by giving back one or
both of the pawns gained. But this question can only be of
interest to us if there is no opportunity of adopting a simple
As it is, this opportunity
line of development at the outset.
All that Black needs to do is to push on his
is not wanting.
Queen's Pawn as soon as possible, thus freeing his own Queen's
Bishop.
P—O4
P-Q B 3
2.
3.
i
;
mi
¥9
PxP
P-Q 4
Wm¥9m
k fW^
Diag. 19.
After 4
K P X P, Q X P, Black's position is at least as easy of
development as White's. In the position set out in Diagram
K 5, because Black wins a pawn by
19, White cannot play P
PxP without hindering his own development in the least.
—
^
The names of the various openings, which I mention for the sake of com-
pleteness, are generally derived
extensively played and analysed.
from towns or countries
in
which they were first
CHESS STRATEGY
34
The equalising power of Black's P— Q 4 in all K P openings
variawhere White has played P— Q 4 can be noticed in many
tions.
I shall
now give a few typical examples, which will
can be adopted in many similar
of play that
show the
the other by
cases, and which can often be evolved one from
line
altering the order of the moves.
Centre Gambit
I.
2.
3.
PxP
Kt— QB3
P—O4
QxP
Q-K 3
Kt—Q B 3
6. B—Q 2
Kt-B 3
B— K 2
4.
5.
II.
P—Q 4
!
King's Bishop's Opening
PxP
Kt— K B 3
P-Q 4
P— Q4
B— Q B 4
4- P-K 5
2.
3.
!
III. Scotch Gambit
2.
3.
Kt— K B 3
P— Q4
B-B 4
5. P— K 5
4.
Kt— Q B 3
PxP
Kt-B 3
P-Q 4
4.
P-Q 4
P-B 3
t
'•
IV. Scotch Game
2. Kt— K B 3
3. P— Q4
4. KtxP
5. Kt— Q B 3
KtxKt
7. B— O 3
6.
Kt—Q B 3
PxP
Kt-B 3
B— Kt 5
Kt PxKt
P-Q 4
!
In no case should Black forfeit his chance of playing
It is tempting after 2
Q 4, P xP 3 Kt— B 3
Q B 4, but in that case
to cover the pawn at Q 5 by
Q B 3, by this means
White would sacrifice a pawn by
so preventing Black
and
himself,
opening the Queen's file for
loss of a pa\vn,
for
the
Thus,
from ever playing
Q 4.
position.
in
advantage
White has a paramount
P—
P—
P—
P_Q 4.
P—
;
K
THE OPENING
35
For after 4. .P x P, 5 Kt x P (Diagram 20) White has developed both Knights, and his Bishops are free, whilst Black has
none of his pieces out. P Q 3 must also be played in order to
.
—
mobilise the Queen's Bishop, leaving
for the King's
Bishop
finally the
;
K
2 as the only square
" backward " pawn ^ at
Q 3 is open to constant attacks and is difficult to defend.
HT^i^bKAK
^
^ ^
^p
»
Pi
1
^^
^^ ^ ^^
WM
I^S
^sp
^:
'«
^^
Diag. 20.
The best plan for Black is to decline the doubtful gift of the
pawn and to bring about one of the positions, as sketched
above, in which, by playing P Q 4 early in the game, Black
—
is sure
of the free development of all his forces.
—
Black is able to play P Q 4 early in all such openings,
where WTiite does not force the defensive move P Q 3 by
attacking Black's King's Pawn. For instance, in the King's
—
—K
gambit, since the move 2 P
B 4 does not threaten PxP,
Black can reply at once by 2...P Q 4 (Falkbeer Counter
Gambit). After 3 P X Q P,
K 5 (to permit of Kt—K B 3,
which at present is not feasible on account of 4 P x P) 4 P Q 3,
PxP; 5 Q X P, White is a pawn ahead, but his Queen obstructs
his
B therefore Black has better developing chances and
should be able to win the pawn back at the very least.
A second example is the Vienna game, which proceeds as
—
P—
;
K
follows
;
:
2.
3.
*
Kt— Q B 3
P—B4
A pawn is said to be " backward," when
pawn.
—
Kt— K B 3
P— Q 4 (Diagram 21)
it
cannot move into cover by another
CHESS STRATEGY
36
P—
K 5, as in the
P xQ P, Black can play
to 4 P X K P,
answer
In
just
now.
mentioned
Falkbeer gambit
having the
without
Kt
play
xP
can
Black
hand,
on the other
For instance,
slightest difficulty with his development.
If Waiite plays 4
5.
Kt—K B 3
P— Q 4
7. B— Q 3
B—K 2
P— K B 3
6.
8.
PxKt
9.
Castles
Kt X Kt
Castles
Kt—B 3 or B—K Kt 5
and Black also will soon have an open file for his Rook, with
no disadvantage in position.
m » Bi
Bl
ms.
HSH
W
fm
B*
Diag. 21.
There is, however, one opening in which Black has the
utmost difficulty in preventing White from getting a positional
advantage in the centre. It is called the Ruy Lopez, and is
held by many to be the strongest opening for White. The
initial
moves are
:
—
i
P—K 4, P— K 4
;
2
Kt— K B 3, Kt—
Q B 3 3 B Kt 5. With this move White at once attacks
the Black K P, though indirectly, by threatening to exchange
;
the
B for the Kt. To make the capture effective, however.
White must first protect his own King's Pawn, which would
Q—
5 Kt x P,
Q 5 !•
otherwise be lost after 4 B x Kt, Q P X B
threatthe
against
provide
not
need
Black
therefore,
first,
At
;
ened exchange.
I
shall treat at
some length the various defences from
which Black can choose, and in studying this most important
THE OPENING
37
note many
King's side opening, we shall have occasion to
centre.
the
in
operations
for
interest
points of general
speaking, two entirely different systems of defence
Broadly
either Black will try to maintain his
can be distinguished
up the centre, try to gain some other
giving
else,
or
centre pawn,
compensation.
as
advantage
Black can only maintain his centre pawn if he can prevent
As is readily seen, White
his Q Kt from being exchanged.
Q 4. whilst
can attack Black's K P a second time with
hinder
would
after Black's
Q 3 any other defensive move
main
first
the
development. These considerations lead to
:
P—
P—
line of defence in
which Black plays 3-..?— Q
^ 3-
After
R 4 Black has the option of releasing the pin by playing
Q Kt 4 at some opportune moment. If WTiite elects to
the
his Bishop for the Kt forthwith, he can remove
B—
4
p
exchange
Q 4.
Black centre pawn after 4...Q PxB by playing 5
a
free
developBlack
gives
Kt
the
but the exchange of the B for
ment and in consequence a good game. (Compare note to
move 4 in Game No. 12.)
Diagram 22 reproduces a typical position in this defence.
R 4, Kt—B 3 ;
The more usual continuation for White is 4
P—
B—
m
wm
mm
'/////////
4.
1M, * ill *
y//w'^/A
'/'///'m
mm
Pil
¥%
m
V////A
w W^ f m
wn
Diag. 22.
he does not trouble to protect his K P as
allow his Rook an open file on which to
would
its capture
King (compare Games Nos. 14
opposing
the
against
act
Now Black can capture the K P
and 17) 5...B— K 2.
5
Castles
;
—
:
CHESS STRATEGY
38
without much risk, as the Bishop is on the King's jfile. 6 R
I, White covers his pawn, and thereby threatens to win a
pawn by BxKt. Therefore Black must not delay playing
K
6...P— Q Kt 4.
—
—
—
After 7 B Kt 3, P Q 3 (Diagram 22) White cannot yet
execute the manoeuvre which underlies the whole tendency of the
Ruy Lopez, namely P Q 4, maintaining the pressure in the
centre, because after Kt x Q P, 9 Kt x Kt, P x Kt
10 Q x P ?
White loses a piece through 10. ..P B 4, etc. It is therefore
necessary to play P Q B 3 first.
White could also obtain
a rapid development by Kt B 3, P Q 3, B K 3 or
;
;
—
—
—
—
—
Kt 5, but this arrangement is not popular, because Black
can play Kt Q R 4 and exchange the valuable K B. The
pawn at Q B 3 supports an advance in the centre, and also
provides a retreat for the K B. The Q Kt can be developed
Kt Q 2 B i Kt 3 or K 3. Black, however,
in this way
must try to round off his pawn position on the Queen's side,
by moving his Q B P into line. Black's pawns at K 4 and
Q B 4 then exert a pressure on White's Q 4. And this pressure
threatens to be reinforced by B Kt 5. From these con-
—
— — —
:
—
siderations the
8
following development seems to be natural
B—B
P—B 3, Kt—Q R 4
;
9
support the K P)
;
it leads to
(to
2,
P— B 4
P—
Q—
10
B2
Q 4,
the position in Diagram 23.
;
Diag. 23.
II.
P— KR 3
One of the few instances in which this pawn move is justified.
It deprives Black's
Q B of its only good square, and saves the
K Kt, the co-operation of which is urgently needed in the
centre.
;
THE OPENING
39
This system of opening will receive more exhaustive treat-
ment under the heading
of
"Middle
Game."
(Compare
Game No. 12.)
In the second main line of defence, of which I shall treat now,
P, and makes
Black renounces the maintenance of his
White's
attacking
by
compensation
an attempt to find
disappearance
the
by
opened
file,
King's
The
King's Pawn.
After
of the Black pawn, offers opportunities for that purpose.
position,
which
following
the
at
arrive
we
moves
the first few
K
M ig i^
m^Wi
wm.
S
^Wi
*wm'Diag. 24.
may be reached thus
Kt—
Kt—
:
3
B— Kt P— O 3
B— K
5,
;
4
P— Q 4, B— Q 2
R—K
PxP
i,
2
B 3 6 Castles,
B 3,
7
5
is commove
8 Kt xP, Castles. The exchange on the seventh
effect
is
in
Kt
after
BX
pulsory, because the loss of a pawn
;
;
K
P is supported by the Rook.
threatened, now that the White
P is now
on the
pressure
exerting
of
Black's intention
cramped
very
are
pieces
his
because
difficult of execution,
in parB
The
area.
restricted
in
a
another
and hinder one
K
K
ticular cannot be brought into action without great difficulty,
for instance by
:
R— K B— K B
i,
i,
P—K Kt 3, and B— Kt 2.
It is therefore advisable for White to develop his
Q B at Kt 2
instead of at Kt 5, in order not to give Black a chance of ex(In a game Bemsteinchanging his troublesome Bishop.
Emanuel Lasker, Moscow, 1914, there happened 9 BxKt,
PxB; loB—Kt5, P—KR3; 11 B—R4,Kt—R2; i2BxB,
Q xB with a good game for Black.)
The defence has a totally different trend, if Black gives
CHESS STRATEGY
40
up his own K P, but captures the White K P at once. I have
already pointed out that White would not mind his K P being
Let us
taken, in view of the attack on the open King's file.
now consider in which way this attack can be planned. There
are two essentially different lines, according to whether Black
interpolates P Q
3 or not.
— R
After 3 B— Kt
R—
K i,
4 Castles, Kt xP 5
5, Kt— B 3
Black gets out of it comfortably by playing Kt Q 3, B K 2
and Castles, and White cannot permanently prevent Black's
game from being freed by the advance of the Q P. P Q 4
Black
for White on the fifth move is therefore stronger.
cannot very well exchange the pawns, leaving the King's file
quite exposed, and must submit to White playing PxP,
;
;
—
—
—
maintaining the pawn at
K 5 and preventing Black's P—Q 4
for some time to come.
The opening might continue
B—K 2
Q—K
6
room for the Kt)
;
;
in this
way
:
5
—
P Q 4,
Kt— Q 3 7 B x Kt, Kt P x B (to make
8 PxP, Kt— Kt 2 (Diagram 25).
2,
;
Diag. 25.
The whole of the manoeuvres now centre round Black's
endeavours to force his P Q 4, and White's attempt to prevent it. Black ultimately gains his point, as will be seen, but
at the expense of such disadvantages in the pawn position
that it is questionable whether the whole variation (called the
Rio de- Janeiro Defence) is playable.
10
K i, Kt—B 4 (the Knight is
9 Kt—B 3, Castles
Kt away from his
to be posted at
3 to bring the White
—
;
K
R—
K
;
4i
THE OPENING
of Black's Q P by attack
4 whence he prevents the advance
12
3, KtxKt;
3
Sg Q B 6); II Kt-Q A,
..^, BxP.
15
i3BxKt,P-B4;
defence.
Janeiro
de
Rio
the
in
position
critical
This is the
centre pawn, and
Black has succeeded in eliminating the White
the advantage
sweeps long diagonals with his Bishops, but
at Q 6,
Bishop
cannot be maintained. White exchanges the
hardly
will
Black
and there remains a backward pawn, which
B-K
Kt-K
PxP
I4B-K3,P-Q4;
;
it has been shown
be able to hold permanently. In practice
spite of Bishops
in
that the end-game should be won by White
his
at
Q B 4 is difficult
of opposite colours, as Black's pawn
to defend.
16
Kt—K 4, B— Kt 2
BxB; 18 KtxB, BxP
18 Q
R—Q I and P— Q B
BxP^
,
because oj
17 KtxB (not
PxKt;
ch),
Kt
by
followed
4
;
Q—
4.
,
+
first
he ^
-x
t,
The game is much more favourable for Black
P— Q R 3, and retains the option of driving the White
plays 3
K B away by P—Q Kt 4, after which P—Q 4 can be enforced
if
very soon.
3
B-Kt 5, P-Q R 3)
5 Castles, Kt X P
;
6 P-Q 4, P-Q Kt 4
4
;
B-R 4. Kt-B 3
7
B-Kt 3, P-Q 4
;
SPxP, B— K3, 9P— B3.
Now Black's pieces are more mobile, and that is the reason
why this system of defence is becoming more
any other.
popular than
-o,
1
,
On the other hand, it cannot be denied that Black s
pawn
his centre is less
formation on the Q side is weak, and that
the centre,
White has a pawn firmly posted
secure.
m
Whilst
driven away.
Black has a Knight there which wiU soon be
in his hands,
entirely
the basis of his centre, is
White's Q 4,
pressure by the White
whilst Black's Q 4 is exposed to a steady
Kt is unfavourably placed, obstructFinally Black's
pieces.
P and preventing its falling into line with
ing as it does the Q
Q
B
its fellows.
Diagram 26 shows the position after 9 P—B 3.
The latter
Kt—
R 4,
move prevents the exchange of the B after Black's
pawn
his
up
round
to
Black
allow
an exchange which would
Q B 4. The experts are not yet agreed as
formation with
for Black in this critical position.
continuation
to the best
P—
To be considered are the moves B— Q B 4, B— K 2 and
B—K
2 is preferred nowadays to
Kt—B 4.
B—Q B 4, as Q B 4 should be
CHESS STRATEGY
42
K
Kt in case the latter is driven from
kept free for the
i and ii Q Kt
Q 2.
dominating position, e.g. lo R
For if in that case Black exchanges the Knights, he only
farthers White's development without doing anything towards
strengthening his Q 4.
B 4, White plays
If Black covers the Knight with P
—K
his
—
—
PxP e.p. and Kt—Kt 5, rids himself of Black's Q B, and
thereby weakens Black's Q P still more.
Kt B 4 would therefore seem to be the best choice, as the
Q B becomes mobile again after White's B B 2, nor can White
—
—
^ WM ^4m »
i.W4
«
*^
^
WA
w « fm Mi
t
k
Diag. 26.
play
P— Q 4 as yet.
The position in the diagram therefore
leads to the following variations
:
11 Q Kt— Q 2,
I, Castles;
A. 9...B— K 2; 10
manoeuvre was
This
Kt
B 2,
5.
Kt—B 4 12
For further
(Petrograd,
Lasker
1909.
Em.
introduced by
No.
Game
particulars see
15).
B. 9...Kt— B 4 10 Q Kt— Q 2,
Q 5 (Capablanca-Em.
R—K
B— K
B—
;
P—
;
or 9...B—
K2
R—K
i, Castles
10
B 2,
B 4 12
Q 2,
Q 5 (Em. LaskerII Q
Tarrasch, Petrograd, 1914).
Capablanca believes that the early advance of
Q 5 can
9...B—
10
2
Q 2,
Q
4, e.g.
be refuted by
Lasker, Petrograd, 1914)
Kt—
Kt—
;
B—
;
;
;
P—
P—
Kt—
K
Kt— K 4, P x P 13 Kt x
Kt— K
;
B— B P— Q 5
Kt, B X Kt 14 B— K 4, Q— Q 2
Kt—B 4
;
II
2,
;
I
12
;
;
15
Q— B 2 or P x P.
The openings as sketched out up to this point give a sufficiently
clear
idea of the possibilities of combining sound
THE OPENING
43
after the
development with an attempt to capture the centre
centre
Black's
cases,
In most
4-
P—K P—K
4,
opening moves i
Q 4, we find an early
paw-n being open to attack by White's
openmg of the
break-up of the centre, and concurrently the
Ks or Qs file for the Rooks.
P—
That is why games opened in
as "open"
fashion have been classed very generally
"
Lately
games."
close
called
whilst all the other openings are
this
rightly, smce
m
very
the distinction has been abandoned, and
cleared occasionally.
be
can
centre
the latter openings, too, the
Black does not play
when
positions
close
We attain typical
all claim
to i
4, but rehnquishes
P—K
I ..p_K 4 in answer
instead, leaving
on his
4 and takes possession of his Q 4
the centre with
in
pawns
the
interlocking
of
option
White the
K
P—K 5.
On principle it does not seem advisable for Black to play
p_Q 4 on the first move in reply to i P—K 4.
Although
QxP, Black
White's centre pawn disappears after 2 PxP,
has no
Queen
his
and
loses a move through 3 Kt-Q B 3.
very soon, unless
place from which it cannot be driven away
to an admission
amount
would
This, however,
it be at Q i.
plan.
Black's
of
of the inferiority of the whole
consideration as a
There are two moves which deserve
I...P-K
namely,
3 (French Defence)
4.
prehminary to
P-Q
Diag. 27.
and P— Q B 3 (Caro-Kann defence).
After 2
P—Q 4. P— Q 4.
we attain the positions set out in the Diagrams 27 and 28, to
which we must devote a good deal of attention.
CHESS STRATEGY
44
These openings are worthy of study as being especially
interesting examples of the struggle for the centre.
As early as the third move, White has to take an important
Is he to play P
K 5 and prevent the opening of
—
decision.
11 ii
..........
It i BR
iEi
^
^^
i ^wm
m
m.
—
'^
jj
-»^
^^
Diag. 28.
K
or Q file for a long time to come, or should he proceed
the
to develop his pieces, and leave Black the option of anticipating the blocking of the centre by playing P x P himself ?
I shall first turn my attention to those games in which
—
White plays P K 5, starting with the French Defence, after
which the Caro-Kann Defence will be easily understood.
The position which ensues in the centre after i P K 4,
2 P— Q 4,
K 5, divides the board
3
Q 4 3
diagonally, and it is easy to recognise roughly the main lines
White has more scope
of play which will govern the game.
on the King's side, where his pieces will have greater mobility,
and prospects of attacjc. Black's chances are on the Queen's
Both sides will have to advance more pawns in order to
side.
obtain openings for their Rooks, and use them for the attack,
since they have no future on the K and Q files, as was the
case in the openings mentioned hitherto.
The obvious moves to this end are for White the advance
of the K B P, for Black that of the Q B P and sometimes even
of the Q Kt P, that is when the Q B P has not been exchanged
for the opposing Q P, but has pushed on to B 5.
p_K
;
P—
;
P—
:
—
THE OPENING
45
chains of pawns formed
In Diagrams 29 and 30 we see the
by these manoeuvres.
than
White's pa^vn attack is more dangerous
lilacks,
B mkm.,.M
m.
^p^^.
».
-^J
L./.
i
Diag. 29.
on the King. And we shall
because it involves a direct assault
compelled to suspend operations
see that Black will usually be
ward off the storm by the
on the Queen's side temporarily, to
I .^3m
^!«^
WO^
X.
^^
^5?¥-
^1
^w^w^^m
Bi M_MA"
1
i
„„
r'^
p
^^.
Diag. 30.
this either
White Pawns on the King's side. He will attempt
by P— K B 4
by P—K B 3 attacking White's centre or
the latter case
preventing White from playing P-B 5. In
CHESS STRATEGY
46
White can only make a breach in the Black barrier by playing
P K Kt 4 as well. These manoeuvres result in the pawn
formations given in Diagrams 31 and 32.
—
1 W%
Hi
X
i ^
m
^
&
mi
Diag. 31.
We must now turn to the development of the pieces corre
sponding to these pawn skeletons. If White plays P
5
—K
ilis
m
iiy
mm w^ I mi
ililJSI.4..w^_
mm Wm Wm, ^ m%
wm
Diag. 32.
on his third move, he prevents the Black K Kt from reachK B 3, whence he might have moved to Q 2. This is a
desirable position, from which he could support the advance of
ing
THE OPENING
47
B 4. But the Knight has other chances of developR 3 and B 4, whence he can take his share in the
ment to
consequence White
attack on the White Pawn at Q 4. In
the action
intercept
to
not
B 4 in order
postpone
p_Q
K
must
of the
P—K
at his
Q B on R 6. Now, in that case White's Pawn
K 5 has not sufficient support against the attack by Black's
P—K B 3 (Diagram 31), and the latter move gives Black the
advantage.
The two main
considerations are
3-
variations
illustrative
:
P—OB4
Kt— Q B 3
PxP
Q-Kt 3
Kt— R 3
of
these
;:
48
CHESS STRATEGY
If Black were to play B x P at once, White could play
Q— Kt 4 \\nth an attack on the Knight's Pawn.
object
Black's waiting move.
of
—B
Wliite
—
—
must
That is the
either
play
B—
which prevents his Q Kt 4, or 7.
Q 3,
after which Black would take the pawn on B 4 with his Knight,
getting rid of the White Bishop. 7. Q Kt 4 at once would
be answered by P B 4.
7.
Kt
3,
—
BxP
P—B4
Kt—B 3
7.
B-Q3
8-
Black cannot castle yet, on account of the following threat,
which I give in full because it occurs frequently in practice
8. ...
Castles
;
9.
B x P ch, K x B
;
Kt— Kt 5 ch. K— Kt i
10.
R— K I 12. Q xP ch 13. Q-R 5 ch
R7ch; 15. Q— R8ch; 16. QxPmate.
II.
Q— R
5,
;
;
1^1
m^^M
^i
'm^.
m
14.
Q-
m
m'f^i.
III i
;
ill.
i
'mm
WM
i
W/M
i
mm.
Diag. 33.
The position in the diagram seems favourable to Black
as WTiite cannot castle for some time.
For that reason another line of play has come to the fore,
in which White exchanges his inactive
some K B.
3.
4.
Kt-Q B 3
B— Kt 5
Q B for Black's trouble-
Kt—K B 3
B— K2
:
THE OPENING
K Kt- -Q2
5. P-K 5
6.
49
QxB
BxB
mAfMWm
K
li i «
i
Diag. 34.
White has now the choice of two hnes of development. He
can either prepare for P Q B 3 to support his Q P, or he can
develop his King's side, holding the P at
5 only.
—
7.
8.
Kt— Kt 5
K
Kt—Kt 3
P—Q B 3
9. Kt-Q R 3
10. P— K B 4
P-QR3
P-QB4
11.
Castles
Kt—B 2
12. Kt— B 3
13.
B-Q 3
Kt-B3
B— O2
P—B4
The sacrifice B x P ch, as mentioned above, was threatened.
14. Castles
15.
If
R— Kt I
Kt— R5
P-Q Kt 4
White does not wish to lose so many moves with his Kt,
he can effect the intended protection of his Q P as follows
7.
not P
Q-Q 2
P-Q R 3
— Q B 4 at once, because of Kt — Kt
8.
Kt-Q I
9-
P-Q B 3
5.
P-Q B 4
CHESS STRiVTEGY
50
II
7.
8.
9.
P—B4
Kt—B 3
Castles
p_Q B 4
p_B 4
B—Q 3
Kt
10. Castles
—Q B 3
and so on.
In both cases White has an easy development, whilst
Black has no convenient square for his Queen's Bishop.
To avoid this drawback Rubinstein has evolved the following variation, in which provision is made from the first
for the freedom of action of the Queen's Bishop
:
3.
4.
Kt— Q B 3
Kt— K B 3
PxP
B— Kt5
to open the diagonal for the Bishop at Q Kt 2, e.g. :
5.
6.
followed by
KtxP
Kt— K B 3
QKt— O2
B— K 2'^
P—Q Kt 3 and B— Kt 2.
We will now leave the French defence and tarn our attention to the Caro-Kann, of which the initial position was shown
in
Diagram 28.
Here also we find two essentially different
systems of development, according to whether White plays
K 5 or gives Black the option of exchanging pawns by
In the first case a very noticeable difference
3. Kt—Q B 3.
from the French defence is, that Black can bring out his
Queen's Bishop. Here the process of development may be
P—
:
3.
4.
P— K 5
B— Q3
B—B 4
BxB
Not B—Kt 3, because White could play P— K 6 and paralyse
the whole of Black's game by preventing his playing the King's
Pawn.
!
56.
QxB
Kt— K 2 or K R 3
P— K3
THE OPENING
51
Through this the move P — K B 4, which fits into this pawn
formation, is kept in reserve.
While White's development
is
easy and natural,
Black
has difficulty in finding good places for his King's side pieces.
The game can proceed generally speaking on the hues of the
French defence. Only Black can hardly attack White's
—
K
centre with P B 3, since the Pawn at
3 would be weak in
the absence of the Queen's Bishop. On the other hand, Black
would be a move behind with an attack on the Queen's
Q B 4 his pawn would have made two moves
instead of one as in the French defence. A certain compensation lies in the fact that White's attacking King's Bishop has
side, since to reach
been exchanged.
In practical play it has nevertheless been shown that White's
attack is more likely to succeed, and for this reason a variation introduced by Niemzowitsch has been tried several times
;
aims at the exchange of Queens in order to weaken and
retard White's threatened attack, and to gain time for Queen's
it
side operations.
Q~Kt3
6
7.
Q — R 3 or Kt 4
Castles
But after 8 Kt— B 4, Q X Q
9 Kt x Q, White is so much
ahead with his development that Black's chance of equahsing
the game would seem questionable.
K R 3 on his sixth move, he foils at
If White plays Kt
once Black's attempt of forcing an exchange of Queens, as he
;
—
Q— K
Kt 3.
could play 8
On the whole we can conclude that in the Caro-Kann deK 5.
fence White obtains a good game by 3 P
A hne of play which used to be in vogue, namely, 3 Kt—
—
Q B3, PxP; 4 Ktx P. Kt— B 3; 5 KtxKt ch, K PxKt
X Kt, gives Black an even chance, for although he
pawn he obtains a good development, and
later in the game he has opportimities of exercising pressure
or Kt P
loses his centre
on White's Q P through his open Q file.
;
CHESS STRATEGY
52
Except the French defence and the Caro-Kann, there is
no game in which an irregular reply to White's i P K 4
necessitates any special considerations either in development
—
of pieces or pawn formation.
In all such cases it is sufhcient
to occupy such squares
with the pieces, whence they cannot be driven away with
If Black plays
the loss of a move.
Just one example
I...P Q B 4 (Sicihan defence), White will not play his King's
Bishop to B 4, because Black can reply P
3, and gain
to maintain the
pawn centre and
:
—
a move by P
—K
—Q
4.
B. Let us now consider the openings in which the first move
Q 4 on either side. Here the centre cannot be cleared
as early as in the openings beginning with i P
4.
4, P
The advance of a second centre pawn, which there led
to a clearance, is not feasible in this case. White does not
command his
4, and for some time to come he will be
In consequence
pawn beyond
unable to advance the
3.
file does not seem a likely opening for the Rooks, and
the
another file must be found for them. The conclusions arrived
at for Black in the French defence hold good for both sides in
the opening now under consideration, and accordingly the
Q B file is that most advantageous for the Rooks. The
advance of the Q B P strikes at the opposing centre, and, that
being of paramount importance, the Queen's Knight must not
be developed at B 3 before the Q B P has been pushed on.
Another development might be conceivable for the Rooks
is
I P
—
—K
—K
K
K
K
K
here, as
viz. on the K B file, and also the K Kt or K R file
we shall see, an occasion may arise for storming the opposing
King's side by a pawn attack. But in this case, too, although
;
it seems unnecessary to play the Q B P, it is advisable to
develop the Knight via Q 2, as there is a constant threat of
the Q B file being forced open subsequently by the opposing
forces.
We will start with the games in which the Q B Pawns are
played in the earhest stages of the opening, so that the pawn
skeleton in Diagram 35 forms the basis of development. The
sequence of moves is of moment, because the advance of the
K P, whether forced or not, determines the possibility of
bringing out the Q Bishops. The simplest process of develop-
THE OPENING
53
ment based on Diagram 35 is the following, in which both
sides block up the
Q B.
M
W^A *< ^n^
*.
^ ^o "
m mmmWM.% m
i
^^^'
J™
\ ^
Diag. 35.
2.
?•'**»-'
*
K
CHESS STRATEGY
54
P—
P—
B—
Q R 3 ir Castles,
Q Kt 4 12
Q 3,
the result is the symmetrical position in Diagram 36.
;
;
B— Kt 2,
1» 'm^.JmWA
^^^
^ ^ ^
X
^P
i^
^
W ^ W ^^
i
Diag. 36.
When treating of the middle game, we shall find that even
in this apparently fully equalised position the influence of the
move is still at work.
In order to obtain a more thorough understanding of the
Queen's Pawn game, we must now turn our attention very
closely to the opening moves.
Already on the second move
White can play 2. P Q B 4 and turn the game into a Queen's
gambit, which Black can either accept or decline. Black would
be justified in playing 2...PxP, and so furthering Wliite's
first
—
object of getting his (Black's) Queen's Pawn away, if he could
permanently hold the gambit pawn, or if the giving up of the
Q 4 fits into a reasoned system of development.
square at
The latter was, for instance, the case in the play leading to
the position shown in the Diagram 36. But Black is well
advised to wait until WTiite has moved the King's Bishop
before taking the pawn on his Q B 5. This forces the Bishop
to move twice, and Black regains the move he lost in his
development, when he played P x P.
It would be quite incorrect to try to hold the pawn by
P—Q Kt 4 as follows
:
2.
3-
P—Q B 4
Kt—
PxP
Kt— K B 3
:
THE OPENING
55
P-Q Kt 4
P—K3
P-QR4
'M^JM^klMl
Diag. 37.
If
now Black answers P xP, WTiite simply plays B xP and the
P at R 5 is lost very soon.
If Black plays instead :
5. .
.P—B 3,
P;
White wins back his pa\Mi with 6 P Q Kt 3, PxKt
is much
moreover
and
QxP,
ch
by
8
7 PxP, PxP
ahead with his development.
These considerations point to the conclusion that after
take the pa\vn.
2 p Q B 4 there is no inducement for Black to
which White
pawn,
centre
his
cover
will
he
On the contrary,
or
with
K
Q B 3. The
either
3
away,
wishes to tempt
playing
before
Bishop
3
Queen's
the
develop
attempt to
remains
pawn
Kt's
the
because
recommended,
Q
be
to
is not
unprotected and open to an immediate attack by 3 Q Kt 3.
;
—
BxP
P—
P—
P—K
—
Of the two remaining replies, 2...P— K 3 and 2...P— Q B 3,
I
natural of the
will first discuss the former, as being the more
opening the
for
Q B 3 does not fit into the scheme
two, since
can bring
hand,
other
Q B file for the Rooks. White, on the
P—
out his Q B before playing
P—K 3, in this way
2P—QB4,P— K3; 3Kt—QB3.Kt—KB3; 4B—Kt5,
and the game might proceed as follows: 4...Q Kt— Q 2.
(Diagram 38.)
No fault can be found with this move, although it blocks
the Bishop, since the latter can only be developed effectively
Moreover, the Knight at Q 2 supports the projected
at Kt 2.
CHESS STRATEGY
56
—B
P
4.
WTiite cannot win a pawn now with 5 PxP,
PxP
;
Kt x Kt 7 B x Q, B— Kt 5 ch. Theremust
be played first, and after B K 2
K 3
fore 5 P
Castles;
6Kt—B 3,
7 R— B i, P— Q Kt 3; 8 PxP, PxP;
all the pieces have found rational deveKt
B
2,
B
9
Q 3,
6 Kt X P, because of
;
—
—
—
;
—
lopment.
M
mm A MeiaW
» a
i
i
B.._...M„„„m,.^
M
M ^
2
^
Diag. 38.
Quite a different system of opening ensues, when Black
does not delay pushing the P to Q B 4 until after his pieces
are developed, but makes the advance on his third move.
Here Black has the advantage of being able to avoid the
pinning of his Knight by the opposing Q B.
2.
P—Q B 4
Kt-Q B 3
4. Kt—B 3
3.
P—K3
P-QB4
Kt-Q B 3
!
Now Black threatens Q P x P with an attack on White's
Queen's Pawn. If White plays
3 we get the position
mentioned in connection with Diagram 35. If he wishes to
bring out his Q B first, he must anticipate Black's threat by
P— K
BPxP.
After
5.
BPxP
KPxP
the third of the typical main positions in the Queen's gambit
ensues, and is given in Diagram 39.
THE OPENING
57
White can either
Two continuations must now be considered.
K B at Kt 2, and concentrate on the Black Q P,
B on one of
which is somewhat weak, or he can place the K
In the first
R
6.
and
the available squares between B i
the Q B
and
all,
at
played
instance, the K P need not be
develop his
Diag. 39.
Kt 5. B 4. '«ind even K 3.
for the K B.
In the second, where the K P must make room
Kt
or
5, and only
White must decide at once between B— B 4
retains the option of developing at
B 4 can be seriously considered on account of
6.
B—K2
B— Kt 5
KtxB
7. BxB
White would only
which only furthers Black's development.
win a pawn with
be justified in this course if he could now
the superior
have
and
8 PxP, but Black would win it back
«^'"'^"''
P-Q5
8
9.
Kt— K 4
Castles
B—B 4 and Q-R 4 ch.
followed by
this variation
is
The correct move in
consequently 6 B-B 4, and a possible
continuation would be
:
Kt— K B 3
;
7
P-K 3. B— K 3
;
8
R_Q B I or B— Q Kt 5 or B— Q 3vanations
With this we will close the discussion of the
2...P—
reply
the
study
and
initiated by 2 P— Q B 4, P— K 3,
.
.
CHESS STRATEGY
58
Q B 3.
file
The first question which arises in our mind is Which
Black be able to utilise for his Rooks ? An attempt
:
will
file through P— K
4 is conceivable. But
White can prevent this by simply playing Kt K B
3.
There remains only the following variation, commonly called
to free the King's
the " Stonewall Defence," which leaves a chance for
Black's
Rook to act on the
B file and eventually on the Kt file.
K
3. Kt— K B 3
4.
5.
K
P- K3
P- KB4
Kt- -B3
P-K 3
Kt-K 5
BiH
^ ^ ^mHI
mm
^M,
mm.
i
*
w%m
P7^#
Wm>
"mk 4.
^M ^P
^
^#
^PK„m.,M, mi
^ ^1
^M
&
Diag. 40.
The development
metrical
of pieces
can
now become quite sym-
:
6.
78.
P—B 4
B-Q 3
B— Q 3
Q Kt-Q 2
Kt-Q2
Kt-K 5
Only White has the advantage in that his Q B can take up a
Kt 2, where it protects the Kt at K 5 past
position at
whilst Black's
Q B is completely hemmed in.
Q 4,
At
the outset, also, White can prevent Black's
Knight
from settling on his K 5 by maintaining the option of playing
P-B
P-Q
B-Q
B-Q
Kt 3,
3 ; e.g. 6
3 J 7
3, Castles;
8 Castles, Q Kt— Q 2
Kt 2, and White has in con9
sequence by far the greater mobility.
Of course the " Stonewall " can also be played by White,
;
B—
THE OPENING
who is then
59
just shown.
a move to the good in the variation
from modern
But this opening has practically disappeared
easily be
cannot
B
the
Q
tournament games, simply because
_
brought into play.
.
..
^ .t.
c.
.u "
btonewaii
The following variation is remmiscent of the
centre pawns. White develops his
in the formation of the
shown m conQueen's side just as Black did in the opening
nection with Diagram 38.
2.
P-QB4
Kt—K B 3
Kt-Q B 3
Kt—B3
P-K 3
4- B-Q 3
5. P-Q Kt 3
6. B— Kt 2
3-
7.
8.
P-K3
B—Q3
PxP
O Kt— Q 2
PxP
Castles
MMP ^A IB Ifti^Mmm
^m. ± Mi. X
± ^m.
I'* Hi *
^
^
W^,
WM
ii„«
'^P
'mm.
iMtfM fa, 181
Diag. 41-
White can now settle his Knight at K 5, and
B 4, Q-B 3, which
King's side attack after castling, by P-K
initiate a violent
K-R
P-K
R-K Kt
i.
Kt 4,
could be continued with
been reached.
has
and so on. Once the position in Diagram 41
of the
onslaught
Black's resources against the dangerous
making
not
by
retahate,
are scanty. Yet he can
i,
White forces
moves, as menthe simplest and most obvious developing
way
tioned before, but in the following
Q Kt 3 before castling, Black
If White plays 5.
with the Queen. Now White
checks
exchanges pawns and
:
P—
has the disagreeable choice between
B—Q 2 and P—B 3.
CHESS STRATEGY
6o
The former must be bad, being contrary to the plan of
development as intended by P— Q Kt 3. The latter blocks
the very diagonal on which the Bishop was meant to
operate.
White can open up the diagonal by playing P— Q B
4 after
castling, nor would it really imply the loss of a
move to have
played the B P twice, since Black must move his Queen
again
from R 4, where she has no future. But in any case there
remains the disadvantage that White was forced to play
the
B P, whilst before he had the option of withholding its advance
until a more opportune moment.
Another possible subtlety in Black's sequence of developing moves would be to withhold the advance of his
K P until
White has played P— Q Kt 3, and then to play the
Q 3 to
Kt 5. For, as I have already remarked, the objection to
developing Black's Queen's Bishop lies in White's threat to
attack Black's Q Kt P with
Kt 3. That possibility
disappears after P
Q—
—Q Kt 3.
Before bringing the discussion of the Queen's Pawn
to a close, I
opening
may remark that in tournaments it has become
P—
usual for White not to play
Q B 4 at once, but to play
Kt
B 3 as a prehminary, in order to avoid the comphcations of the Queen's counter gambit: 2
O B a
—K
P— ^
P— K 4.
If
White plays 3 PxK P, Black's reply is P—
^'
Q 5, and the
P— K 3 fails on account of the following pretty
combination: B — Kt 5 ch
5 B — Q 2, PxP; 6 BxB
PxP ch 7 K—K 2, PxKt ch
8 RxKt, B— Kt 5 ch, etc!
Instead of 4 P— K 3, White should play P— K Kt
3 and
obvious move 4
;
;
!
!
;
develop his K B at Kt 2. Black could now try to regain
his
pawn with Kt— K 2— Kt 3, but he can also sacrifice a pawn
by P
—K B
It
3,
with a view to rapid development.
now only remains for us to discover whether Black has
any other answer to P—Q 4 which would necessitate close
analysis on WTiite's part.
—
Here must be mentioned
i...Kt
K B 3, i...p Q B 4
and I...P K B 4. The former move prepares P
Q 3, followed by P— K 4. In this opening there is no reason why
White should play P— Q B 4, as there is no prospect of opening
—
:
—
Q B file for the Rooks. Furthermore, Black has relinquished the square Q 4 and made K 4 the basis of operations.
the
: ;
6i
THE OPENING
from playing
be more advisable to prevent Black
with a
conformity
in
4 as far as this can be achieved
will
It
p_K
63:2 Kt-K B 3.
A, Kt-K
development, e.g. i
then lead into the
Not 2 Kt— Q B 3, because Black could
B 4, after which
and
4
Queen's gambit by playing
to open the
able
being
not
of
White has the disadvantage
3Kt-Q
2
4
4. Q
Q B file. 2.. .P-Q 3 3
B
and
after
Q
3
4
2^
Now Black can only enforce
P-Q
logical
P-Q
P-Q
B-B
P-K
;
P-K
;
P-B
whilst Blacks Q B
Meanwhile White mobilises all his pieces,
remain at Q 2 to cover the
remains blocked and the Kt must
pawns m order
K P. If. on the other hand, Black exchanges
left.
centre
Black
no
is
there
to free the Knight,
to i
With regard to the second irregular reply
open to White.
namely, I...P-Q B 4, two ways are
P—Q 4'
One is
playby
ordinary Queen's gambit
to turn the opening into an
is
second
The
on which Black can play P—Q 4-
p_K 3
side
P—Q 5. Black will then develop his King'sposted
well
The Bishop
with P— K Kt 3 and B— Kt 2.
position at K
ing
to play 2
is
4
an attacking
here and can frequently take up
Rubinstein v. Spielmann.)
No.
Game
45.
(See
or O 5
have after 2. .P-K 3 a Queen s
If White plays 2 P X P, we
before, this hne
accepted by White, and, as pointed out
.
gambit
of play is not commendable.
mentioned above
The last of the three irregular answers
p_K B 4 leads to two entirely different plans, according
I
by White.
to the second move chosen
such as
White can confine himself to a simple development
:
Kt-K B 3. B-Kt 5. P-K3. Q Kt-Q 2 (Kt-B 3 would
P—
B 4. because Black would
only be good if preceded by
with
gambit
Q B 4)
4 and
Queen's
again lead into a
fact that
the
of
view
in
following
the
is
The other possibility
development,
P__K B 4 does absolutely nothing to aid
I
a violent attack by giving up his King's
P-Q
P—
•
:
mite can initiate
development. The
Pawn (P— K 4) and thus accelerate his own
P 3 Kt-Q B 3. Kt-K B 3
play might be as follows 2. .P X
B X Kt followed by Q— R 5 ch)
?
4 B— K Kt 5, P— B 3 (P— Q 4 5
:
.
;
;
Black takes the pawn he lays himself open to an
6, which
It seems best to play 5...
irresistible assault.
hindrance
a
as
P
B
White's
B and leaves
White
c
p_B 3
If
calls back the
P-K
Q
to the development of the
K Kt.
CHESS STRATEGY
62
Irregular Openings
Many openings in which neither P— K 4 nor P—
first
move
lead to well-known positions
Q 4 is the
by a simple trans-
position of moves.
For instance, a Queen's gambit may well
have the following opening moves
i P
Q B 4 Kt K B 3
—
:
•
Kt-K B 3. P-K 3 3 Kt-B 3, P-B 4'; 4 P-K
P—Q 4 5 P— Q 4. or a French defence these i Kt—Q B 3
P-Q 4 2 P-Q 4, Kt-K B 3 3 B-Kt 5, P-K 3
2
3,'
;
;
:
;
';
;
4 P-K 4.
There are, of course, systems of opening which deviate
absolutely from those which have been proved sound and are
in general use. and it is those openings that puzzle
the beginner most of all. He says
What is the good of learning
correct openings, if my opponent plays incorrectly and
wins
:
all
the same ?
tion.
This line of thought is wrong from its incepThe student is not supposed to " learn " openings by
how the general principles of Chess
Strategy are applied to any opening.
Such knowledge can
never be obtained from a tabulated analysis, but can only be
arrived at by the application of common sense.
If a player
succeeds in wanning in spite of an inferior opening, it
only
proves that subsequently he has played a stronger game
than
his opponent, who, after playing the opening
according to
the book, did not know how to proceed further. And
herein
hes the weakness, and not in the absence of knowledge
of
the analysis of openings. The latter is rated far too highly.
Any player will hold his own in the opening, as soon as he has
grasped the real meaning of those principles which I cannot
repeat often enough, viz.
ist, quick development of pieces
and avoidance of lost moves 2nd, the maintenance of a pawn
heart, but to understand
:
;
centre,
hampering the development
of the opposing forces,
and the avoidance of pawn moves that do not contribute to
the development of pieces.
How to conduct the middle game and end-game is not entirely a matter of deduction from such general
rules.
In order
to play the end-game correctly, one must know certain
things
and positions which arise from and may be said to be peculiar
to the purely arbitrary rules of chess.
The same aoplies to
THE END-GAME
63
the middle game, as in most cases it must be played with a view
to the end-game which ensues, unless there be a chance oi
The student should have,
mating the opponent before.
therefore, a knowledge of the end-game before he can hope to
be able to conduct the middle game efficiently. For this reason
of the end-game first.
I have decided to treat
CHAPTER V
THEEND-GAME
Just as
it
is
difficult
to state the exact
point
at
which
an opening ends, so is it equally difficult to say where the
end-game may be said to commence. One of the main characteristics of end-games is the active part taken by the King.
Clearly the King cannot venture out into the field of operations
until there has been an exchange of the majority of the pieces,
As
so that there can be no danger of his being mated.
material
in
soon as a player has attained some advantage
which ensures the victory in the end-game, he will try to bring
about the end-game by exchanging pieces, for there the lines
on which to push home his advantage are clearly set out.
It is first necessary to know what surplus of forces is the minimum required in order to force a mate. The positions in which
the mate can be forced may be shown by a few typical examples.
But I shall lay stress mainly on one point. That is the ability
to judge whether an end-game which could be brought about
by exchanges is won or not in other words, whether it can
be reduced to one of the typical positions referred to above.
It is obvious that the end-game is the particular demesne
Nearly always one or more pawns survive
of pawn strategy.
the exchange of pieces, and the knowledge of the end-game
will be invaluable for gauging the consequences of pawn moves
The latter represents proin the course of the middle game.
bably the most difficult aspect of the strategy of chess.
In order to enable beginners to grasp the following chap;
must again point out a few elementary considerations.
Simple end-games, that is, end-games without pawns, arecom-
ters, I
paratively easy to understand.
Let us first consider the case
;
CHESS STRATEGY
64
of a King denuded of all his troops.
In order to force the mate
necessary to obtain command of four squares, namely,
those four squares which he controls after he has been driven
it is
Supposing the Black King has been driven to
into a corner.
Q R I, the White King can prevent him from reaching two
squares of different colour, namely, Q R 2 and Q Kt 2. Therefore it
necessary for White still to have such forces as can
is
command two more squares of different colour, namely, Q R i
and Q Kt I.
As can readily be seen, it will be essential to have
at least the Queen or a Rook or two Bishops, or a Knight and
Bishop, or two Knights.^
We shall see that in the latter case it is impossible to drive
the King into a comer without bringing about a stalemata
The mates by a Queen or Rook are so simple that I only give
an example of each for the sake of completeness.
Position
I—White K at Q R i, Q— K R i
Black K at K 4
:
:
K— Kt
I
2,
K—Q 5
K— Kt
2
;
K— K4
3,
3
;
K—B
4.
K-Q 3 4 Q-K 4. K-Q 2 5 K-B 5, K-B i 6 K-B 6.
K— Kt I 7 Q—Q R 4, or Kt 4 ch, or K 7, or R 7 and mate
;
;
;
;
next move.
2—White K at Q Kt 3, R K R 2
Black K at K 4
I K—B 4, K— Q 3
2 R— K 2, K— B 3
3 R— K 6 ch,
Position
:
:
;
B 6,
;
K-Q 5, K-B 2 5 K-B K-Q 2 6 R-K
R— K 7 ch, K—Q i 8 K— Q 6, K-B i 9 K—
K—Kt I 10 R—K K—R 7 11 R— K 8, K— R 3
K-Q 2
K-B 2
4
7
;
;
5,
;
;
i,
;
i,
;
;
;
— R 8 mate.
;
12 R
3—White K at Q R sq, B at K Kt sq, B at K Kt 2
Black K at K R sq
Position
:
:
K—Kt 2 2 K-B K-B 3 3 K-Q
I K— Kt
K— K 3 4 B—R K-B 3 5 K-Q K-B 4 6 B—K
K— Kt 4 7 K—K K— Kt 5 8 B—Q R K— Kt 4
K— Kt 3 10 B— K B K—R 3 11 K—B
9 B—B
K—R 2 12 B—Kt K—R i 13 B— Q K—R 2 14
B—B 2 ch, K— R I B—B 6 mate.
2,
3,
;
2,
;
6,
;
3,
8,
6,
5,
;
7,
;
i,
;
^
5,
;
;
;
;
4,
;
5,
;
How the King can be driven into a corner will be shown subsequently.
;
;
THE END-GAME
6s
Knight and Bishop. It is
square
of the same colour
corner
a
on
mate
only possible to
shows clearly. A
argument
following
the
as
as the Bishop,
does not comBishop
the
which
corner
the
in
position
mating
Diagram 42.
in
out
set
type
of
the
be
to
have
mand would
Knight in
the
and
squares,
White
on
plays
Bishop
Here the
in
square
White
a
to
on
move
must
checkmate
to
order
Therefore,
other words, he must come from a Black one.
when the Bishop checked on the previous move and drove
squares,
the King away, the King had the option of two black
It is more difficult to mate with
;
He is only
and had no need to go into the corner one.
mated in consequence of a wrong move.
^
WA
1
^^
WM.
WM^y.
^P
Diag. 42.
As stated above, however, it is possible in all cases to
mate in the corner square which is of the same colour as
the Bishop. Tlie King is driven into the corner in this way
not
the Knight cuts him off such squares as the Bishop does
illustration.
as
an
serve
command. Diagram 43 will
B 3.
B 3 3
Kt 2 2
Q 4>
Kt 2,
I
Kt
6
B—
K5,
B
B
4
3.
5
3
3 4 Kt— Kt 3,
i
Kt
8
B
R
5,
2
K_Kt 3 7 Kt—K 4,
ch,
Kt—
i
Kt
R
B
Kt—
7
10
I
Kt
5,
B 6,
9
K i 14 Kt—
B i 13 B— R 7.
Kt I 12 B— K 4,
:
K—
K—
K—
K—
K—
K—
K—
K—
n
K—
K— K—
K—
K—
K—
K K—Q I 15 Kt—B K—B 2 16 B— K K— Q 2
K— B 2 18 K— K K—B i 19 K—Q
17 K—B
K—Q I 20 B— Kt K— B i 21 Kt— R K— Q i
K—
K—
K_K
K—
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
5.
7,
;
;
4,
;
7,
;
6,
4,
;
;
;
6,
;
5,
E
;
CHESS STRATEGY
22 Kt— Kt 7 ch, K— B I
23 K— B 6, K— Kt i
24 K— Kt 6,
Kt
i
26
Kt—
ch,
K—
B—
B
B
K—B I 25
5
5, K— R i
i
Kt—
ch,
K—
I
28
6
Kt
R
R
29 B— Q 5
27 B— K 6, K—
66
;
;
;
;
;
;
mate.
^
^^^
WM^.
^ ?^
*'^*24
P
i
^'^^
^^ ^
^'w^
'^'ww"^
»
1^ ^^
^P ^^^
^P ^W^ S\
S???2%?%
Diag. 43.
It
is
Knights.
impossible to force a mate with the King and two
On the same grounds as given with respect to Diagram
42, the mate can only be attained through the opponent making
a bad move.
But a mate can be forced if the weaker side has a
spare move which prevents the stalemate, e.g. Diagram 44.
^^
W
'^^
^'w^!^
^P.
'MM
W3^^WB
'^1
'^M
Diag. 44.
I Kt (K 3)-Q
K-Kt 2 2 K-B K-R 3 3 K-Kt
K—Kt 2; 4 K— Kt K—R 2; 5 Kt—B K-Kt 2;
6 Kt (B 7)— K
K—R 2 7 Kt—Q K— Kt i 8 K— Kt ^
5,
5,
;
5,
8,
;
7,
;
6,
;
4,
;
K-R I
II
67
THE END-GAME
10 K^-Kt 5. P-B 5
9 Kt—Q 7. P-B 4
J
1
;
Kt—B 7 mate.
Having decided as to the smallest amount
of
material
mate, we will
without
now turn our attention to simple game endings (still
be
only
To judge such endings correctly, it will
pawns).
the
obtain
out whether it is possible to
advantage with which it is possible to force a
necessary to find
minimum advantage mentioned.
It
is
sufficient
to discuss
plays against a stronger
cases in which a piece on the one side
several pieces are
one on the other, because in endings where
circumstances are generally the
left on either side, fortuitous
to charactense
deciding factors, and it would be impossible
illustratypical
giving
and classify positions of that kind, by
exchanges
by
later
or
Besides, they are reduced sooner
tions.
already, or are gomj
to such end-games as have been treated
to be shown now.
Rook
The Queen wins against any other piece; the
a
illustrate
we
Diagram
In
45
alone may give trouble.
^^^5?^'
sr^
m
M
"mA
WM.
WA
i
m m M m
Diag. 45.
position which
is
one of the most favourable to the weaker
side.
2
I Q— R 6 leads to nothing, as R—B 2 ch follows, and after
K— Kt 6 Black forces a stalemate with R— B 3 ch.
It is
necessary for White to gain a move in this position
in other words. White must try to transfer to the other side the
onus of having to move.
If
then the Rook moves away from
CHESS STRATEGY
68
King plays
a few checks or if Black's
the King, it gets lost after
6
equally lost through
to B I, the Rook is
i
i
ch.
2
I
5
therefore
White plays
2
3^.R-B
example
5, and wins,
I
3
ch.
Ri 6
3 ch.
ch,
3
2
5
5 ch,
4
K-Kt
;
Q-K
Q-R
K-R
;
Q-R
K-R
Q-K
:
fr
K-
Q-K
.
Q-R
.
Q-K
piece in exceptional cases
^""Vhe Rook can win against a minor
Bishop the weaker Kmg
In endings of Rook against
only
of different colour from
mult take refuge in a comer square
For instance, Diagram 46
of his Bishop.
:
that
— —
mm
'
m^wP^^^
M__MI
Diag. 46.
I
R_Q 5 B-B 5 (or R 2)
;
R-Q 8 ch, B-Kt i, and
2
the eighth Rank.'
Black is stalemate unless the Rook leaves
colour as that
Any outside square which is not of the same
the pieces
Imagme
King.
of the Bishop is dangerous for the
of the
centre
the
towards
in Diagram 46 shifted two squares
board, as in Diagram 47, and White wins with
1.
2.
3.
The Bishop
B—R5
B—Ki
R—Q Kt 5
R—Kt 8 ch
R—R 8
is lost,
as it is Black's move.
In endings of Rook against Knight, the weaker
where the Knight is cut off from his King.
In this " oblique
Q5
For instance, in Diagram 48, i
squares:
Knight's
opposition" the Rook takes four of the
side loses,
R—
t...Kt— K 8
;
2
K—B Kt—B 7
5,
;
3
1
K— K
4.
Kt—R 6 (Kt—
THE END-GAME
Kt 5 ?
is
•
4
always
69
In this ending there
the
position
a fatal check at some point, and the
R— Kt 5 ch wins the Knight).
!
m
4/.
\ ^
%yy.
my&
m^.
^^
^/M
^1
^
^^
m§>
f^/
'^/yyA
%y,y
1^
•WMwM
r4fcj WM
m
^^^'1
5//////^
w3
^5552^^^
^'-^^
m
Diag. 47.
K—Q K—B 2
diagram is not in any way a chance win. 4
R i, and wins.
Q R Kt— Kt 8 6
5
R—
5,
3,
;
R—
;
S
»
Diag. 48.
support the
As soon as the Knight can obtain the King's
forced on to
game is dravMi even when the King is already
the edge of the board.
Position— White
Black:
:
I
R_Q B 5, K-Q I
;
2
K at K 6, R at K5
K at K i, Kt at Q R 2
K-Q 6. Kt-B i ch
;
3
K-B 6.
CHESS STRATEGY
70
Kt—K 2 ch, draw.
In this case the King must avoid the
comers, as the Knight would be bereft of his efficiency.
Position—White
Black
I
R_K 4, Kt—Kt I ch
;
:
:
2
K at K R 6, R at K R 4
K at K R i, Kt at K 2
K—Kt 6 and wins.
We come now to the more interesting part of end-game
play, namely, pawn endings.
The best course will be first to
study how to turn a material superiority in pawns to decisive
advantage, after which we shall note particular positions, in
which a win is possible with an equality or even an inferiority
in pawns.
The ending of Kmg and pawn against King is one of the
simplest albeit one of the most important of elementary cases.
The stronger side will evidently try to queen the pawn. But
generally this is not possible if the adverse King has command
of
the queening square.
One important
condition, though,
the weaker King must move into
must be comphed with
" opposition," and " opposition " is one of the characteristic
and deciding factors in most pawn endings. It is absolutely
necessary for the learner to understand fully the meaning of
the term " opposition," and its value in elementary cases.
This knowledge is of far reaching influence in end-games.
:
^ fM
^ fM
^
¥M
THE END-GAME
71
With this move White assumes the opposition. That is, he
moves into the same rank or file, separated by one square
only, so that both Kings stand on squares of the same colour.
White has moved last, it is Black's turn to move it is said
" White has the opposition."
We shall soon
in this case that
if
he succeeds
see that Black is only able to draw the game,
having
that,
means
in assuming the opposition himself (which
;
the move, he should step into opposition).
2. .
.K— Q 2
;
3
P—
Q 6 (Diagram 50).
/'''''''^'W'^'^^''^^W%
'WM
ii
Diag. 50.
I propose now to recapitulate.
is the critical
sixth rank.
the
reaches
playing
White
for
lost,
This
moment, namely, when the pawn
If
now Black plays K
—K
K—K 6 has the opposition.
—
i
he is
After
4^,,K— Q I, 5 P Q 7, Black is forced to allow the White King
to move to K 7, covering the queening square; 5,..K B 2,
But Black has a draw in the
5 Y^ K 7, any
7 P queens.
(not K i).
position of Diagram 50, by playing 3...K— Q i
—
—
;
!
!
Now after 4 K — K 6 he keeps the opposition himself with
K—K I and after 5 P—Q 7 ch, K—Q i 6 K—Q 6, he is
;
;
stalemated, or else wins the pawn if White plays differently
on his sixth move. The King draws against King and pawn
retain the
if he commands the queening square, and if he can
into
moves
the
pawn
opposition on the first rank as soon as
his sixth.
It is of
the utmost importance that the
pawn should be
:
CHESS STRATEGY
72
at his sixth ;
the pawn is still further back, the opposition
if
on the first rank is of no avail.
Diagram 51 will serve as an example.
mm.
' '''^^^""^'''
'^wi ^'^^P
mm I ^p
Having the move,
^p
p
'mm
%m
f£
vm
Wm.
Diag. 51.
White would only draw with P—B 5, because Black's
wins the pawn.
Kt 6,
B i
But White wins as follows i
K—
:
B 6, K— K I
;
3
K— K
6,
K—Q
i
;
K—B 2
K—
2 K—
K—
K—
Q
B sq
4
;
6,
-«
M^
M
^8 m
«
m
WM»WM M
«WM
^
m
^
™WM» « M
'wm.
^
'T€
wm.
'mm
WM,
m
m.
'W^y
wm
Diag. 52.
—
K—
Q sq. We see Black has just assumed the
5 P B 5,
opposition, but the pawn has not yet crossed to his sixth
square,
:
and White, by playing P
to give up the opposition.
—B
6,
again forces Black
THE END-GAME
73
with P-B 6
this way
might be more clear to put it in
a position
about
brings
White wins the opposition, in that he
White.
for
won
is
game
the
with Black to move. Therefore
when
avail,
no
of
is
rank
outside
Since the opposition on the
weaker
the
square,
sixth
his
to
the pawn has not yet played
xth
the opposing Kmg from the s
away
keep
to
try
must
side
is possible
This
rank.
that
reached
rank until the pa.vn has
the stronger
such as that in Diagram 53, where
:
It
in positions
Diag. S3.
pawn, and the
King is not more than one rank ahead of his
position m
the
In
opposition.
the
weaker King can assume
opposition
the
maintains
and
Q4
Diagram 53 Black plays
similar
position,
typical
a
which
after
until the pawn moves,
is brought
Diagram
with
50
connection
to the one treated in
K—
about.
If
K—B
White has the move, however, he wins
4, thus
easily
by i
:
I.
2.
3-
4.
5-
K-Q3
K—Kt 5
K—B5
K-Q6
K—B6
K—B2
K— Kt 2
K—Bi
and there is opposition on the eighth rank
not reached the sixth.
whilst the pawn has
CHESS STRATEGY
74
If
the King is more than one rank ahead of his pawn, as
in Diagram 54, the end-game
can always be won, for if Black
'W^ aXm. WWJ^
'^^^
"
^P^
»^^ BwmBi
M. m. m im
'^^
^
'wm
.
Diag. 54.
takes the opposition with
again, winning a move by
K—Q
3,
White deprives him of it
P—B 3, and the position
is
similar
to that in Diagram 53, with White to move.
K-Q3
K-B 3
I
P— Kt 3
3- K-B 4
2.
and wins.
This settles all typical end-games of King and pawn against
King. There is, however, one exception to the rules set out,
namely, when a Rook's pawn is concerned. Here the isolated
King always succeeds in drawing if he can reach the comer
where the pawn has to queen, for he cannot be driven out
weaker
The Rook's pawn affords another opportunity for the
side to draw.
Diagram 55 will illustrate this, and
similar
positions
again.
are
of
frequent
—
occurrence
in
practice.
Here Black draws with I...K B 5. As he threatens to capture the pawn, White must play 2 P— R 4. Then after the
reply
B 4, White is still unable to cut the opponent off
from the corner with
Kt 2, as the loss of the pawn is
still threatened
through
Kt 5. And after 3 P— R 5
Black attains the position which is typical for this end-game,
namely the opposition against the King on the Rook's file.
K—
K—
K—
THE END-GAME
75
the contested
cannot escape without giving up
3.-.K—
3;
4
^7.
B
comer, and the game is draw-n.
The
latter
K-B 2
K—B I
K-R
8,
K-B i
;
6
P-R 6. K-B 2
;
5
;
and WTiite is stalemated.
;
^P-^
7.
7
Diag. 55-
End-games with a majority of one pawn, when
more simple to manipulate.
still have pawns, are much
which Diagram 56 is a
Such games result in positions of
both sides
^
m
m ^wM,
i
I
m
^WMS
^B^
^^^''^^
'mm.
^P ^^
WM IM^y W3/,
WM
^
'mm.
Diag. 56.
Here White does not even need to Queen
The mere threat forces the win. For the
his passed pawn.
typical instance.
pawn at Kt 4 reduces the mobility of the Black King,
in so
CHESS STRATEGY
76
far as the latter must at all times be ready to reach the queening square in as few moves as the pawn, or else the pawn
The White King can
would queen unmolested.
therefore
capture the opposing Bishop's pawn in peace and then queen
his own.
K—K 3 2 P— Kt K— K 2 3 K— K
I K— K
K—B 2 4 K—Q and so on or I...K—Kt 4 2 K—K
KxP 3 K—Q K—B 4; 4 KxP, K— K 3 5 K—Kt
4,
5,
;
6,
;
;
;
;
6,
;
;
5.
5,
2,
and so on.
Such positions as Diagram 56 are also reached when there are
The stronger side exchanges
several pawns on each wing.
there
is a majority until the extra
where
pawns on the wing
pawn is passed.
The winning process
is
not quite so simple
when all the
pawns are on the same wing, because exchanges are of no use
unless the King can assume the opposition in front of the
last remaining pawn (compare notes to Diagram 53).
In Diagram 57, for instance, White must not play P B 4.
Therefore he can only win by gaining the Knight's Pawn,
—
^ ^
m m r
M
^
W^M
Wf3
m,
ES^
i »j
m
w^A
^^mm.wm
El
s m
"
"
'wm' »fwm""''
''
•/////////,
B g gj B
Diag. 57.
that
is,
by bringing his King to B 5. This he achieves by
King to relinquish the opposition with
forcing the Black
I
P-B 3.
2 K— K
K— Kt 2 3 K— Q K— Kt 3
K—Kt 2 5 K—B K— R 3 6 K—B and
I...K—B 3
4 K—Q
5,
5,
;
;
6,
;
5,
wins, as Black must abandon the pawn.
;
;
6,
THE END-GAME
77
occnrrence
This position, being o{ frequent
study
valuable
a
as
it
I recommend
most impor-
is
tant,
and
*' Before Tdiscuss positions of greater
the onlv way to win is by
m the use of
complexity, in which
sacrificing the extra
pawn, I shall
ensure
li-games in which positional advantages
shall
we
Here
equal.
pawns are
the victory although the
he
about
brmg
manoeuvres
cases in which pawn
tjl
find simple
^n,tnd more intricate ones in which King
moves are the
important type is the end-game
^''of^fhe' trmer the most
the
pawn." A typical example is
with the "distant passed
wms.
Black
Diagram 58, in which
position in
Diag. 58.
The King's moves are outlined by the necessity
of captur-
after which the Black King is
ing the opposing passed pa^^•n,
(the Queen's side), so that the
files nearer the battle-field
two
\\Tiite pa^vns must fall.
xr+
K-Kt
4,
K-Kt 3, K-B 3 3 xr
KP-R
6
K-Kt
3,
4
K-B
5
3
K-K 4 4 P-B 4 ch,
R4^K—B5; yKxP.KxP; 8 K— Kt 6, K—K 4, and so on.
I
K-Kt 2, K-Kt 2
.
;
2
:
;
;
;
lost for
For similar reasons the position in Diagram 59
wing
White obtains a passed pawn on the opposite
Black
to abandon
King
Black
the
forces
He
that of the King.
is
to
pawns, and these are lost. I give the moves
characterbecause this is another important example
his King's side
in full
—
CHESS STRATEGY
78
istic of the ever recurring necessity of applying
our arithmetical
By simply enumerating the moves necessary for either
player to queen his pawn separately for White and Black—
rule.
we can see the result of our intended manoeuvres, however far
ahead we have to extend our calculations.
I
P— R 4, K— K 3
;
2
P— R 5, PxP
;
3 PxP,
K— Q 3
Now the following calculations show that Black is lost.
White needs ten moves in order to queen on the King's side,
namely, five to capture the Black King's side pawns (K K 4,
B 5, Kt 6, R 6, Kt 5), one to free the way for his pawn,
and four moves with the pawn. After ten moves, Black only
—
1^
i
WM,^
§M
....
wM,^
m.
^»
mi
Diag. 59.
pawn to B 6. He requires six moves to capture
the White Queen's side pawns, one to make room for his pawn
gets his
B 3, and after three moves the pa^^^l only gets to B 6. White
then wins by means of many checks, forcing the Black King
to block the way of his own pawn, thus gaining time for his
King to approach.
As we shall see later on (p. 97), if the
pa\vn had already reached B 7, whilst under protection by his
K, the game would be drawn.
at
'
It is necessary to make it a rule to examine positions in
which each side has a passed pawn, by counting the moves
in the way first shown.
It is just because end-games can be
calculated +0 a nicety, there being no moves of which the
THE END-GAME
79
note in contemporary
consequences cannot be foreseen, that we
middle-game by
the
simplify
to
master play a tendency
advaninfinitesimal
is
an
there
as
soon
as
exchanging pieces,
Charousekgame
the
(compare
position
tage in the pawn
Heinrichsen, p. io8).
.-.
We will now turn our attention to positions m which the
,
pawns opposed on each wing are
of
passed pawn can be forced through.
the relative position of the Kings.
^-l.
number and no
equal
Everything depends on
The deciding factor m
moves are possible,
Vraluing the King's position is whether pawn
nearly exhausted, so
or whether they are already entirely or
The followpossible.
that only manoeuvres by the King are
see that
shall
ing illustrations make the position clear.
paramount.
is
opposition
the importance of getting the
simple instance in which there are no
We
Diagram 60 shows a
mi
Pi
tiJ
M.
^^
»^ ^'^^
^
Wm
^^,^
WM
fm
,
m
fri
Diag. 60.
Whoever has the move wins by assuming
The opposing King must then give the way
more pawn moves.
the opposition.
free to one of the pawns.
,
that in
The state of affairs in Diagram 61 is similar to
opposition
Diagram 60. Having the move, White plays into
Black's Bishop's pawn is
his way to
5. after which
Q
and forces
"'iK-K4,K-Q3; 2K-B5. K-Q2; 3K-K5.K-B3;
6 K-Q 6, and so
5 K-Q 5. K-Kt 3
4 K-K 6, K-B 2
;
;
on (compare Diagram 57).
If Black has the
move he can only
";
CHESS STRATEGY
8o
draw, because the White Bishop's pawn is covered even though
Black gains the square at Q 5.
K
K—
K—
K—
B5 3
Q 2 and whatI...K— 4 2
Q 3,
ever Black plays White wins the opposition, so that the Black
2 loses the game because
King's ingress is stopped 2
;
K— K
;
of
6
9
K-Q
3...K-K 5;
K— B K—
I,
4
Q6 7
;
2,
K— Kt
K-Q 5
2,
K— R 2, K—B 7, and wins.
w^,
;
5
;
K-B
!
1
2,
K— Q 7 8 K— Kt
;
i,
K-K 6;
K—B 6
^^
»M^M
™ m.
m Wm^mm
rf'^1
„.
i
mi.
WM.
'W
Mm
^Wi^mW.»J
P^
!
Diag. 61.
take this opportunity of explaining what is called
In Diagram 62, White with the move
wins by i K
2, thus assuming " distant opposition
(squares of the same colour 11).
If Black now enters his
second rank. White immediately plays into opposition on
I shall
" distant opposition."
—K
his third rank,
I...K— Q 2; 2
K—
Q 3, and still mainBlack plays a waiting move such as
2...K K 2.
Now Black has no further waiting moves, as
White threatens to capture one of the pawns.
But playing
into the third rank is of no use, as White then assumes the direct
opposition, and wins as in Diagram 60.
Black must allow
White access to one side or the other. He could not have
remained on the first rank at the outset either, for after
I...K— Q I, WTiite advances through a square, to which
Black cannot assume the opposition, namely, 2 K B 3. If
now Black wishes to answer the threat of K B 4 Kt 5 and
plays
K 2, White answers 3.
K 3 as before.
tains it
—
by 3. K
K—
e.g.
—K 3
if
K—
—
— —
8i
THE END-GAME
2
then
K—K 3 or K Q 3 would be wTong, as Black would
and would
K
2
Q
succeed in assuming the opposition at
to circumvent
unable
be
would
White
be able to maintain it.
pawns.
this or to attack the
or
2.
Diag. 62.
In this position, too, there
ample scope for the study of
is
King" who has
''^Tfhe'pa^ are still standing behind, the advantage
beposition has always the
the most advanced
th
y
the opposing pawns ^ouW
cause he threatens to' attack
disposal,
more pawn moves at his
leave their base. White has
opposition
in assuming the
succeed
anT™5l nearly always
wins
move,
White, having the
For instance, in Diagram 63,
the centre of the board
because his King gets first into
Black has
^-^.^•/lfr^'5KJ|ti,'8KxP,VBa.
maintain it, having no pawn
now the opposition but camiot
King threatens to capture any
mo^es avaUable,
The White
„
„
,,
" dP-B
K-K 2 10 K-Q K-Q 2 and
wins as
K-K 2 13 P-B
P B^ ch 12 K-K
which a
after
K-Q
Bkck wiU soon be compelled to play
oawn that ventures forward.
q
K-K
5,
•
Tt
5.
;
5,
;
^
4.
5.
!
2,
Queen's Bishop s
manL^e shown previously gives White the
P'Ts P-K R 4; M P-K R 4. P-R 4;
K-Q 2
:
16
K-B 6, K-0 I
;
17
K-K
15
P-R 4I
6, and so on^
CHESS STRATEGY
82
Diagram 63 the King stood at Q 2 instead of B i, he
manage to draw. WTiite takes eleven moves to
capture the Black King's side pawns, and to queen one of
If in
could just
rn^A
M
S
^i#B
mm '^. P
fm m>. mm i
^P W3 W^
f/M
i
WM'
i-
fmmm
f^m^m^
wm.
'^m
Wm WM m.
WA
WMA
m
Diag. 63.
In eleven moves Black
can be easily seen.
captures the opposing Q B P and queens his own. We see
here how the King's position can be counterbalanced by the
weakness of a pawn, and lead to a draw. If the White
Q B P was not isolated but standing, for instance, at Q Kt 2,
Black would be lost, as calculation easily shows.
The strength or weakness of a pawn position, which, as we
saw, had so deciding an influence in the end-game position
just treated, is one of the most important factors in a game
of chess, and should have full consideration in the middle
game. A pawn, when isolated, is naturally weaker than when
it is or can be protected by another.
It may easily lead to
the loss of a game, as the mobility of the King or a piece is
reduced by having to protect the pawn (compare End-game,
his
own, as
p. 102).
It
pawns
is
frequently and
erroneously thought
that
doubled
Doubled pawns are weak
when isolated, for they cannot support each other. But if
doubled pawns can be supported by a pawn on the next file
they need not by any means be at a disadvantage against three
united single pawns on the opposite side. For instance, in
Diagram 64, if Black had a pawn at Q Kt 3 instead of R 2,
as such are a weakness.
THE END-GAME
83
not attack
White would have no winning chances. He could
force a passed
the pawns, nor would any kind of manoeuvres
through
pawn through. In the diagram, however, White wins
wmWM
W^:.
WM
¥M
^P
^'y^'^
Diag. 64.
I
K—B 5
R3
;
2
;
Black cannot then hold the pawn at B 3.
i. .
.P—
P—Kt 4.
fact
In this particular case the win is made easy by the
at
pawn
that the White King is able to attack the Black
of
weakness
But even without this advantage, the
once.
%^M
»
'm.
t
mm.
W^M
m.
p
II'
mm
9a kwM
WA
'W/Z/Z/A
m
wa
WW
mm
wm^,
W/^A
mi
'a"''''''^^W/'.
fm
Wf/
W^^'C/
m.
m WM
Diag. 65.
doubled pawns usually entails the loss of the game. Diagram
65 may serve as an example.
B 4 ch 2
B 4,
B 3 3
B 3
I
Q 4.
wins.
and
ch
B
B
Kt 3 4
5
3
4,
5,
Q
K—
K—
;
P—
K—
;
P—
K—
;
K—
K—
;
P—
CHESS STRATEGY
84
Doubled pawns are a drawback, even when not isolated,
should there be no way of obtaining a passed pawn by exchanging them against a smaller number of single pawns.
This is illustrated in Diagram 66, in which Black wins because
the three pawns on the King's side hold up the four White pawns
and the Black King can assail the White pawns from the rear,
m
n
mm.
W/
W4-
m
W
« ™
fi
^mm.
Wi.
f£g
M WM ^^
w/Jm
m.
M S wm
mm
Diag. 66.
the White King being fettered by the necessity of capturing
the Q B P. The proper formation for the Black pawns would
be at B 3, Kt 2,
3, after which White cannot force a pawn
R
—
—
through by playing P B 4 and P Kt 5, as Black can refrain
from making any exchange. Black could not afford to leave
the pawns where they are, because even if there were no White
pawn at B 2, White would, by playing P Kt 5, threaten to
win in the following way
—
:
I
P—Kt 6, B PxP
R PXP
—B
2
;
P—R 6, and P—B 6, etc.
—R
;
or i...
In a game Ed. LaskerMoll (Berlin championship, 1904), from which the position is
taken. Black played P R 3 in order to obtain the formation
mentioned above, and White resigned after 2 P B 4 ? P B 3,
P Kt 5,
Q 5. There was, however, a pretty win after
;
2 P
6, with
P
6, etc.
—
—
—
—
K—
Black's P— R 3, namely 2 P— B 6, P x P 3 P—B 4, K— Q 5
4 P—Kt 5, B PxP; 5 PxP, K— K 4; 6 PxP, K—B 6;
lost, because his own pawn obstructs
7 K—B 2 and Black
:
;
;
is
the square B 2, and the King must release the square Kt 2,
after which the White pawn queens.
THE END-GAME
85
is only an interesting
This winning combination, however,
kind are generally
this
of
exception to the rule that positions
pawn. In this
passed
won by the side which possesses the
secure by
position
the
case Black could have made
particular
R
Kt 2
3 for his pawns
obtaining the ideal position of B 3
in
so far.
advance
could
pawns
eariier before the White
by
won
have
still
could
Black
the position of Diagram 66
4.
4
6, P xP
3
2
After
3.
Dlaving
to overtake the passed pawn which
time
has
King
Black
the
results on the Bishop's file.
endings wth an equal
To conclude the study of pawTi
P-R
P-B
number of pawns on either side, we
M WM m.
K-Q
P-B
;
will discuss
;
Diagram 67,
i
'M.
'm^-'tm^WM.
'
HI
Diag. 67.
occurring from time to
which illustrates a curious position
the move ^"^ ^-V "'°™S
time in practice. Whoever has
5.
should play
therefore,
White,
into distant opposition.
protectmg
K-Kt
5,
would play
5 would lose, as Black
the protection of
pawn,
White
the
attacking
his pawn and
mov^ In the same way
which White has to give up next
K-Kt 5 because Wute
with the move cannot play
After I
5 Black caimot
5wins the pawn with
R3; 2
Q 5. K-Kt 3
avoid the loss of the game, e.g.
wins similarly
move
Q 6, and so on. Black with the
K-K
K_Q
SLk
K-Q
K—
K-K
K—
,
K—
3
with
K R 5-
V-
We have stUl to consider end-games m whicha win can
•
a majority of pawns, or where
of an extra pawn.
only be achieved by the sacrifice
results in spite of
-U
« ^r.o,.r
draw
a
—
CHESS STRATEGY
86
Diagram 68 shows the latter case. Here White can only
2 K
win in the following manner i P Kt 4 ch, P xP ch
other
would
allow
wins.
Any
way
and
K
xP,
Kt 3, K any 3
—
:
;
;
m.
^^
^^
fm
m
«WM«WMW
mWBmWMm
m
H
mm
mA
^m:^
'W'^
'W^
i
'M%
f
isj
W^)
'i?-i
ill
^mi
l^j
'm.
m
»
m WM WMm
Diag. 68.
Black to assume the opposition and to force the draw,
I
K—B K—B 3 2 K— Q K— Q etc.
Not I K—B
K— Kt 5 2 K—Kt K—B
2,
3,
!
2,
?
e.g
4,
2,
4,
3
K— B
3,
etc., as in Diagram 57.
^1
B « ^
r« ^ ^1
«
a " S
Diag. 69.
A counterpart to this position is found in Diagram 69,
which shows one of the few cases in which the possession of
an extra pawn does not force a win. It seems at first sight
as if White could win by simply assuming the opposition with
^7
THE END-GAME
.K-K 2 2 K-Q 5, K-Q 2 3 P-B 5,
I K-K 4 continued
Black would reply i...^—
K—K 2- 4 K—B 6, etc. ButK-B
3 followed by KxP
B 5 ch! 'and after 2 PxP ch.
:
. .
;
;
ensure the draw.
We come now to those end-games in which pieces
as well
as pawns are left on the board.
n
,
r , ,1
examples, I shall confine
As it is my aim to give typical
only one piece besides the
myself to positions where there is
several pieces can be reduced
King. Most end-games with
to that.
^,.
,
pieces the King s manceuvres
In nearly all end-games with
is
endings are of no avail, as far as opposition
,
used in pawn
opposition means that the
concerned, as the advantage of
and as long as there
opponent is forced to move his King,
"forced move" positions are
are pieces on the board, such
is of
However, the strength of the pawn position
infrequent.
command
the
pawn endings, just as
the same importance as in
A
is essential for the King.
possible
as
squares
of as many
pieces.
of
mobility
factor is again the
third and very important
position from a
is found in Diagram 70. a
A good example
game Post-Leonhardt (Berlin Jubilee
Tournament, 1907).
Diag. 70.
because the White pawns,
Black's pawn position is weaker,
be attacked by the Bishop,
being on Black squares, cannot
pawns on White squares.
whilst Black has two isolated
less mobihty than the
has
Furthermore the Black Bishop
CHESS STRATEGY
88
White one, and finally the Black King is tied to his Q 3, to
K
These drawbacks
5.
prevent White's entry at B 5 or
Kt 3 3
2
R 4,
B 2,
I. .B— R 2
decide the issue.
p R ^. (After B R 2 White would command the square at
R 5) 4
R2 5
B i. and
Kt 6 through
Q 3.
Black resigns, for White threatens to establish his Bishop at
B 3, where the pawns at Q 5 and R 5 are both attacked,
whilst the Black Bishop is at once forced to occupy the only
.
—
;
—
P—
;
B—
P—
B—
B—
B—
;
B—
;
square from which both pawns are covered, namely B 2.
As
this square must be abandoned in the next move. Black loses a
pawn and the game.
5...B— Kt I 6 B—K 2, B— B 2; 7 B—B 3, and wins, or
5...B— Kt 3 6 B— Kt 2, B— B 2 7 B— B 3, and wins.
;
;
;
A corresponding instance of Knight v. Bishop is the endgame Blackbume-Schlechter (p. 102).
It is difficult to gauge the relative value of Bishop and
Knight in the end-game. The Knight has the advantage of
access to all squares against that the Bishop is able to fight
at long range, and offers opportunities of gaining moves
in certain positions where there is a " forced move " (com;
pare p. 90).
As already stated, two Bishops are superior to two Knights
because the limitation of the colour of squares ceases. A Rook
generally wins against a Bishop or a Knight, sometimes even
against a majority of one or two pawns, provided, of course,
that there are still pawns on the Rook's side, and that their exchange cannot be forced. The following position (Diagram 71),
from a game Moll-Post, shows how to proceed in such cases.
Here White can force a win in the following way
Kt 6; 2
I RxP,
R 6, PxPj 3 RxP,
B 2;
:
P—
4 R—B 2, B— Kt 5
;
R—
R—
B
5
4,
B— R 5
K—
;
P—B 4
6
!
The
Black pawn position must first be torn up, if it is to be attacked
successfully.
Now Black's defeat is inevitable, whether the pawn is
taken or not. The sequel would be 6...PxP
7 RxP, after
which the Rook goes to K R 5 and the Rook's pawn must
;
or: 6...K— Kt3; 7PxP,PxP- 8 R— B 6 ch, K— Kt 2
R—B 5, and the Bishop's pawn is lost, unless Black gives
up his passed pawn. In this case Black loses also 9 R— B 5,
B— Qi; ioKxP,K—Kt3; 11 K—Q 3, B—B 3 12R—B6,
fall,
;
9
:
;
89
THE END-GAME
It only remains
necessary to give an example.
Diag. 71.
..n.e. of Oueen v. Queen, Rook
v. Rook, and minor
number of pawns, one of which
is passed.
piece v. minor
As a rule the extra
Diag. 72.
exceptions frequently
pawn leads to a win. There are, however, specially.
refer
reaming in practice to which I must
pawn and a
Sa^am 72 shows an end-game with a Rook's
Bishop " of the wrong colour."
CHESS STRATEGY
90
White draws with i Kt— Q 2, P— B 7
2 Kt— K 4 ch,
K Kt 7 3 Kt X P, and draws, as Black, in order to capture
the White pawn, after K x Kt must give the White King access
to the Rook's square, from which he could not be dislodged
except by a Bishop on White squares.
In Diagram 73 White cannot win although his Bishop is of
the " right colour " by i P—B 7, Kt x P 2 B x Kt, and White
cannot win the Rook's pawn. He can only attack the pawn
from Kt 7 or Kt 8, both of which are inaccessible as the Black
King gets to Kt i. It is a stalemate position. If the White
;
—
;
;
^P
W^0
^^
W^ f
¥Mm ^ %
»
^
tim'^"
^
™ H S^ H^ i
Diag. Ti.
pawn were still at R 5, White's King could attack the pawn
from R 6 and secure the win.
In the position given. White could only win by keeping
pawn, and indeed it is possible to win by gaining
a move with the Bishop.
In the diagram it is Wliite's move.
Black with the move could not play
B 2 because
Q6
his passed
K—
K—
would follow.
The Knight would have to move, allowing the
pawn to queen. Therefore Wliite must try to bring about the
same position with Black to move. He can do this, for instance,
in the following way
:
B— Kt 3, K—B 2 (now 2 K— Q 6 would be bad on account
of Kt— Q 5, 3 P— B
Kt— Kt 5 ch, and Kt xP) 2 B— R
K— K 2 3 B—K 5. Now Wliite's plan has succeeded the2,
I
7,
;
;
;
THE END-GAME
9^
As menis Black's move
same position has occurred, and it
s moves
Knight
but
not move,
tioned before, the King must
S-Kt-Kt 5
If
are of no avail.
the
alternatively
or
is lost,
pawn
;
4
B-Q 6 ch decides, and on 3. -Kt-Q
•
:;
B-B 6 ch, the Knight
On 3...Kt— ^^.
queens.
i ;
B X Kt would follow.
4 B-B 6 ch, K-Ki
.
^
.,
^
•.
•
•
out that it is imas
a square which is
Knight,
possible to gain a move with a
moves cannot be
of
number
odd
On this occasion I should like to point
accessible to
him
in
an
number.
reached by him in an even
A simple instance is
Diagram 74.
Diag. 74-
White loses, having the move,
2
K-R
2.
Kt-Q 2
;
i
K— R
3 K-R 8, Kt-B i
;
8. Kt— K 4
P-R
7. Kt4
cannot bring about
Black with the move cannot win, as he
move.
to
White
the same position with
which we have already
In end-games of Bishop v. Bishop, of
most
pawn wins
extra
an
Diagram
70.
had an example in
It is generaUy
colour.
same
the
of
are
cases if the Bishops
one of the
force an exchange of Bishops and obtain
m
possible to
well-known pawn endings.
different
On the other hand an ending with Bishops of
a
against
frequently even
colour leads mostly to a draw,
draw.
is
a
Diagram 75
majority of two pawns. The position in
92
CHESS STRATEGY
because it is impossible for the Wliite King to get round his
Kt pawn to drive off the Bishop.
H m M A ti
Wm:^
M m mWfM
'9 Sf & W9
s
wm.
^Mi.
•m.
'W^
WWA
Diag. 75.
With two passed pawns distant from each other, a wm can
generally be forced, as in the folllowing position (Diagram 76).
^ „._.
iP
^W^"^
,^my M^^^
"'WM
''m.
'wm'' ""^i^
H
^'"^^s^
M,
MB
^''"'i
^'^
fc
Diag. 76
The King moves up to the pawn, the progress of which is barred
by the Bishop (not the King). He thereby forces the sacrifice
of the Bishop.
If the Black King comes to the rescue of the
Bishop, the other pawn proves Black's downfaU.
THE END-GAME
93
B-K 2
3 B-K
2
K-K K-K 2 2 K-Q K-Q
K-B
6 K-K 6 and
2
P-Kt
5
4 P-Kt 6^-Q I
K-Ki
6|-B2
B R7;
tins; or5...B-B2; 6P-B6
B—Kt I 9 B— Kt 6 ch, K—B i 10 li y
8 K—K
I
5.
;
4,
4,
;
7,
;
;
7.
,
6,
!
observe this rule
if
""^men the pawns are united, one should n.ove to squares of
:
possible,
they are attacked, they should,
Bishop.
the colour of the opposing
Wt.te
set »"'>" diagram 77
position
Therefore in the
the-re^^
i
After
5
5.
5, but
should not play
the
assume
to
White
for
no possible chance
'"^T-ttl^t
it is neces
advance the pawns
Black squares, and in order to
if
wM
mm
li
^m
P-^
P-K
P-B
m&
wiiA
Wi
ill
m&.
f^*'mf^''-m^"""''^M.
P^
-m^,
M WM m
MiBlB
wm>y.
*^
in
%&m
^^
Diag. 77.
White and Black squares. In
sary to force access to both
would proceed on these lines
the present instance play
4,
B2 3
3,
c
4
2
, p
6
i
6
ch,
6
5
B-Kt
5
5
K2
through
get
only
White can
1 ,
4, B-Kt 5R
as
7 is
^''theKing-s Pal,
"/
^l^r^'^!
square
7
play
7. *«
to
order
in
But
set out above.
can
Bishop
the
time, so that
must first be covered a second
Therefore^ 8^C-Q
pawns.
two
the
for
5^
not be given up
10
i
6,
9
*)
7
;
6 (B-B 6
7. and wins.
I ; II
7 ch,
,„ ^^t„
on each side, an extra
,
V
B—R
7p-B
B-R
K
•
K—
K—K
;
P-B
;
K-B
K— K
;
K—
P-K
.
B_R
K-B
K-B
»
™-f
P-K
P-B
P-K
K-Q
;
Knight
In end-games with one
K-B
K-K
K
,
CHESS STRATEGY
94
pawn usually decides the game much in the same way as in
end-games with Bishops of the same colour frequently even
with equal pawns, the possession of a passed pawn is sufficient,
as it keeps either the King or the Knight busy, so that there
is only one piece available for the defence of the pawns.
An
instructive example is the end-game Ed. Lasker-Rotlevi on
;
p. 100.
End-games with Rook against Rook are the most frequent, as well as the most difficult. Here the possession of
an extra pawn is seldom sufficient for a win, unless the stronger
side has also an advantage in the greater mobility of the Rook.
Diagram 78 is typical of such cases, frequent in practice, in
,_ ..,.,,.
B,
'WM
'^W/M
'Wii
'''l
« wA^^^^^%mMk
Diag. 78.
which the greater mobility is the deciding factor. Although
White has one pawn more, he can only win by reducing the
mobility of the Black Rook through the following manoeuvre
I
B 2,
Q 2 2
R 2,
R 2. Now the Black
R—
:
R—
;
R—
R—
Rook has only one move left, whilst the White Rook has the
freedom of the Rook's file. For instance, the Rook can be
R
posted at
5 and prevent the Black King from attacking
White's King's side pawns, whilst the White King makes for
the R at R 7 and effects its capture. If, on the other hand,
the Black King tries to obstruct the way to the Queen's side,
White penetrates into the Black pawn position. Black cannot
maintain the opposition because the White Rook has spare
moves, the Black Rook none,
e.g.
3
K—B 3, K— Kt 3J
R-R K-B 3
7 R-R 5; K-Q 3
A
'^
;
;
THE END-GAME
95
K-K K-K 3
K-B 3
8 K-Q
5
4,
;
6 R-R 4. P-Kt 3
4.
;
9
the pawns.
K-K
5,
:
and wins
,
,,
the game by
Having the move, Black wonld draw
I
,
R-Q 7 ch
;
2
K-R 3. R-R 7-
,
By placing his Rook
condemns the opposing Rook to
behind the passed pawn he
file.
free to move on the Rooks
inactivity, whilst his o^vn is
the
force
end
the
comes up, he will
If now the mite King
meanwhile
but
for the pawn,
sacrifice of the Black Rook
pa\vns. and with passed
White
the
captures
the Black King
winning chances.
pawns on the King's side might get
of R against
W^en there is only one pawn left in endings
can comKing
R the weaker side maintains the draw, if the
position
a
shows
m'and the queening square. Diagram 79
be
mostly
can
and which
favourable to the stronger side,
a
forces
Black
too,
But here,
this end-game.
m
^
obtained in
I...R— B 2 2
draw with a pretty manoeuvre
is stalemate.
Black
and
PxR,
2 ch
3
;
:
R_Q
R— K h.t
2,
;
w
tM
» ^
« m
Diag. 79*
Q
The chances of a draw are even greater
evade
seldom
can
side
stronger
the
on
against Q, as the King
show a
For the sake of completeness I will
in endings of
perpetual check.
few cases in which Q or R cannot
win against an advanced
^^Ti' Diagram 80 White can still draw,
for in five
moves
by the King at R 7. and
the pawn reaches Kt 7. supported
in that
time Black cannot come up with his
King, so that he
CHESS STRATEGY
must give up the Rook for the pawn. Two passed pawns win,
56
even when the King is away from them, if they have reached
In Diagram 8i, for instance, White is lost,
their sixth square.
m
'mm.
wm
wm
^p
» M wm
i^
WM
wM.
Diag. 80.
as Black gives up his
Rook at Q 7 and plays P
—Kt
6, after
which one of the pawns queens.
The Queen wins against an advanced pawn, even when the
only the R or B pawn can
latter is supported by the King
;
wfm,
^Mk
Diag, 81.
draw sometimes, when the pawn is on the seventh supported
by the King, and the opposing Q cannot move to the queening
square.
THE END-GAME
97
The following illustrates the three principal
A. Position—White
Black
cases :
K at Q Kt 8, P at Q R 7
K at Q R 8. Q at Q B 3
:
:
plays Q-Kt 3 ch.
Black must stop the pawn and
unless White lets the
stalemate
is
sq and
answers with
only be won if the
can
end-game
Kt's file free again. This
two moves. Therein
opposition
the
stronger King can assume
was standing at
King
Black
the
example
fore if in the above
Kt 7
ch
i
2
I...Q—
K
follows
'^'
as
Black would win
« = Q, K-Kt 3. and
4 4
Q-lK 2 ch 3 K-Kt 8.
White cannot cover the mate.
White
K-R
;
B. Position-White
:
Black
:
White draws
:
i. .
.Q-Kt 3 ch
C. Position -White
:
Black
:
K—
;
:
K-B
;
P-R
K at Q Kt 8, P at Q B 7
K at Q 5, Q at Q B 3
;
2
K-R
8.
Q X P stalemate.
K at Q Kt 8, P at Q Kt 7
K at Q 5. Q at Q B 3
White loses.
Kt 5 ch 3 K— B 7,
K-R 7 Q-R 5 ch 2 K-Kt Q—
Q--B 3 ch
K-B
Q_B 4 ch 4 K-Q Q-Q 3 ch 5
ch
8 K-Kt 8,
K-B 4; 7 K-R 7. Q-R 5
6 K-Kt
K—B 3 9 K-B Q—R 3. etc.
I
;
6,
;
'
8,
;
;
».
;
8,
8,
;
End-games from Master Play
some instructive examples
In the following pages I give
by step we will find how
Step
play.
taken from tournament
simple endings treated
the
of
knowledge
verv important is the
it is often necessary to
that
see
shall
We
in the last chapter.
find the correct hne, but that
consider many moves ahead to
with
possible to foresee every consequence
it is nearly always
of
reduction
because of the
unfailing certainty. Moreover,
coninto
variations
take very many
forces there is
no call to
m modem
This explains why there is a tendency
sideration.
of pieces, as soon as
master play to enforce the exchange
CHESS STRATEGY
98
there
of the
the shghtest advantage sufficient to bring about one
elementary end-game positions, in which the win can
is
be forced.
I.
From a game Teichmann-Blackhurne {Berlin, 1897).
m m mi
»^M^ ^^^f
\,m
m m m m
m mMm
m « M ^
m
w.'"
f
i
i
fil
Diag. 82.
Black has an extra pawn on the Queen's side. But as it is
doubled, the material superiority is of no account. A perceptible advantage, however, lies in the fact that White cannot
" forced move " position, as Black has
bring about a
move P
the
— Q B 4 in reserve. White has also an infinitesimal
weakness on the King's side, the Rook's pawn having advanced
two squares and being therefore an easy mark. This disadvantage soon becom.es apparent.
1.
P—B 3
K—B2
3. K— Kt 2
K—R 3
2.
4.
K—B 4
P— R4
P— Kt 4
K— K 4
With this move advantage is taken of one of White's weaknesses. White must exchange pawns. If the King moves. Black
captures, freeing B 5 for his King, from where he can later on
get to K 6 or Kt 6.
But after the exchange at Kt 4, Black
has the chance of obtaining a " distant passed pawn " on the
Rook's file.
5.
PxP
K— Kt 2
7. K— R 2
6.
PxP
K—B 4
K—B 3
THE END-GAME
If Black were to play
8
99
P-R 5 at once. White would reply \vith
Black would have to
K-R 3. and after PxP, 9 KxP-
square at B 5 for
4, to gain the
give up the spare move
Kt 2 1
after
10
drawn
be
The game then would
his King.
opposition,
the
maintains
White
B "^ II
B 2, because
6 or Kt 6. Black thereand Black cannot get through at
P-B
K—
K—
K—
K
in such a way that the square
fore manceuvres his King
the White King is at Kt 3.
when
at his
4 is only reached
first
B
8.
g.
K— Kt 3
K— Kt 2
K—R 2
P—R 5
In the first case
Now neither P X P nor P-B 4 is of any use.
Black obtains the distant passed pawn.
obtains the distant passed pawn after 10
R4
P xR P, but loses it again after
K—
10.
11.
K-R 3
KxP
K—B 2
P—B 4, P xB P n
;
;
12
K—R
3.
^—^ 4-
PxP
K—B4
At last Black has captured the coveted
the spare move in hand.
12.
In the second White
square, whilst keeping
K— B 5
now, because in that
The White King cannot move to Kt 2
to the White Q B P and queen
case Black would move the King
only
and White, after seven moves, would
in seven
moves,
have the K B pawn at B 7.
JO K— K 2
K— Kt 6
P-B 4
B P now, but must capand wins, for White cannot hold the K
14.
K-K 3
King
it, after which the Black
ture the Kt P in exchange for
:
e.g.
ahead,
reaches the Queen's side two moves
K— K 2
K-K 3
17. K— K 4
18. K— B5
jc
16.
19.
KxP
K— Kt 7
K-B 8
K— B 7
KxP
K— K6, etc.
!
if White had played
Black would have forced a win also
Kt 2,
12
B 5
Kt 2 on his twelfth move thus
K—
13 K— B
:
2.
K—
K—
CHESS STRATEGY
100
Now White has the opposition, and after Black wrings it
from him by playing the spare move P— B 4, he assumes it
K— K
K—
K—
K— K
K—
K— K
But he cannot
Kt 6 16
3.
2,
again with 15
R 6 because the square at Q 3
maintain it after Black's
After 16
Q 2,
for distant opposition is not accessible.
Kt 7
18
Kt 6
2.
R 7
3,
17
K—
19
!
;
;
K—K
;
K—
K—
;
K— K 3, K— B 8 we get the same result as before.
II.
From a game Ed. Lasker-Rotlevi {Hamburg, 1910).
"^
fm
III i
—^
^ P
m. "m
il S
^"^m
Mmw—^.
—
"^fc
^^
^ 1
^^^ ^^ fc
^^^
Mm_
'^'fWA
^2 iSi^
Diag. 83.
White has the advantage, because Black must keep either
King or his Knight permanently near the passed pawn,
guarding against its advance, whilst both White's King and
Knight can attack the Black pawns. As yet they stand so
far in the rear that the White King cannot approach them
Therefore White must first try to force their advance.
his
1.
2.
Kt—B5
Kt-Q 3
P—Kt3
P—R4
This is now necessary, because the square B 3 is weak after
P Kt 3 and the White Knight threatens to win the Rook's
For this reason
pawn eventually with a check at B 6.
instead of the
be
played
could
not
for
instance,
Kt Q 2,
follow.
Black
would
move in the text, because 3 Kt
5
now cannot exchange, of course, otherwise the position would
resolve itself to an easy end-game win similar to the one in
—
—
—K
loi
THE END-GAME
Kt-Kt i to
There would be nothing left but
this would get the Kmght
oppose fte\hreat of Kt-B 6 ch, and
White could queen the passed
Diagram .;6.
entirely out of play, so that
pawn easily after 4 K
-
3.
—Kt
6.
P-B 3
K-K 5
The King was threatening to enter
via Q 5 and B 6.
Kt—K 3
and
obviate the threat: Kt— K 5-B 4.
If Black wishes to
all the
wins
and
B
to
goes
5
King
Q
Dlavs P-Kt 4. the White
sacrifice a pawn
4.
K—B 5
Therefore Black endeavours to
Id
two others, after which a draw con
in order to exchange the
White
Knight for the remaining
be forced by exchanging the
pawns easily.
P^""'
P-B4
5.Kt-K5
I Kt-B 4
7. KtxP
P-Kt 4
P-B5
M S « »
y/f
^
w^A
WmiA
mm.
^^^i
w/M/A
mz^
^^-^«
'ffm
-/,//"'
'yW/M
s
Diag. 84.
8.
9.
Kt—B4
K— K 5
K—B I
Kt-B 6 ch
Not K-B 2, because of 10 K-Q 4, Kt-Q 6
10.
!
;
11
Kt-K 5 ch.
Kt— R 7
following answer
Here White had only considered the
Kt-Q 6 ch II K-Q 4. Kt x Kt P
;
:
12 Kt xP, Kt-Q 6
;
X3
p_B 5, Kt-Kt 5
;
14 Kt-B
3,
Kt-B 7 ch
;
15
KxP,
CHESS STRATEGY
Kt— K 6 ch i6 K— B 5, Kt x P 17 P— R 4, Kt—K 2
20 K— B 7,
18 Kt— Q 5, Kt— B I
19 K— B 6, K— K i
102
;
;
;
Kt
—R 7
;
;
—
21 K Kt 7, and wins the Knight.
Black however draws, through a pretty combination
;
TO
:
I03
THE END-GAME
however, is inferior for Black,
because the
Q P is weak and
through.
eventually to force his Queen s Pawn
White threatens
I
....
2.
QxQ
3.
A.
Q-B4
BxQ
B-Kt 3
Kt-Q 4
Rxg
RxR
RxR
^. R_Ki
he must yield up the
Black wants to avoid the exchange,
would surely spell disaster, as
King's file to White, and that
have
field of action, and would
the Black Rook would have no
Kt
Kt—
5 en,
of a pawn through
to go to Q I to avoid the loss
the
of
possession
would take
after which the White Rook
the
into
Bishop
of the
seventh rank, fettering the action
^''^^""
If
6.KXR
7. P_Q Kt 3
Black is condemned to inactivity,
to work to force his pawn
B-Q6
K— Q 2
and White can quietly set
through.
K— Q 2
B— K 5
g.
P_Kt 3
B-Kt 8
11.
K—K 3
Kt—B 3
B— Kt 8
8.
12.
In order to play
.
P-Q Kt 4 and P-B 5, then to force
must first have the oppor-
Black to exchange at B 5, White
Black's Queen s Pawn.
tunity of bearing a second time on
Kt—B 3—Q 2—B 4.
Therefore he prepares the manoeuvre
12
I,
K— K2
pllo kt 4
B—B 4
4. p_g 5
B-Q 2
15.
16.
"^-^^l
B— Q 2
K-Q4
Kt— Q 2
17. Kt—B4
18.
PxP
PxPch
P—B3
advantage in position
not yet easy to materialise the
b
Q 6 ch would be very bad. as B 6 and
The advance
tempting
by
starts
White
would be made accessible for Black.
It is
P—
K
CHESS STRATEGY
104
the
pawns forv\'ard and thiis systematically creates points of
attack.
19.
20.
B—B 4
K— Q 2
P— Q R 3
Kt— Kt 2
P— Q R 4
21. P— R 5
The Queen's side is paralysed. The text move is forced, as
P R 6 would give White yet another passed pawn. Now
White turns his attention to the King's side.
—
22.
23.
24.
2526.
K—B 2
Kt—B 4
Kt—Q 6
B— Q 2
B— R 5
B— B 7 ch
K—K 4
P—Kt 4
K-Q 4
Black wishes to play P
B-Kt 3
—R
4, in
order to get a passed pawn
too, the only chance of saving the game.
27.
—
K— Kt I
P— R 3
—
Now P R 4 would be countered by Kt B 5, forcing the
exchange and leaving a backward pawn at Kt 2 and the Rook's
pawn would be bound to fall.
28.
29.
Kt—B5
PxB
BxKt
K— B2
i 1^1
M *
m.
im
iP
I
mm
m 11
''mf/.
fa
m
„„„„„
^^^ WM»._^
mi.
fm
Diag. 86.
now seem as if Black might have played P
—K
—
Kt 4
a passed pawn, and forcing a draw. After
4 Black would play P R 3, and it is not evident
P xP e.p.
K Kt 4 is parried by
The difference in the pawn positions, which decides
It would
here, securing
30 P R
how White is to win.
—
But
29... P
—
i°5
THE END-GAME
White passed
in the fact that the
the issue for White, is found
the support of the
pawn at Q 5 is unassailable because
P-Kt 3, ^^'^^t
be taken away by Black's
HJ
H^*
caZt
at
any t.me through
pa^ed pavvn at his B 3 can be isolated
on the
P_R I—R ; V^fiite would take up atheposition
push on
;P=^^^
R?f
Knight's fUe with the King, and
the text
On
prey.
easy
an
then
are
The isolated pawns
pawn on to compel P-K 3
move -White also pushes the Rook's
King. The passed Queen s
Tnd reduce Black to moves by the
pawn decides the game.
30.
K-K4
32.
K-Kt 4
P_R4
P—R 5
33.
34.
Otherwise there follows
:
K-g2
K-Q 2
K-B I
P—^ 3
P— R 6, K—R 5> etc.
K—B 4
36. K-K4
1^— Q ^
c!<.
K-B 2
^y
P__Q6ch
K—Bi
39.
P—B6ch
PxPch
40.
K—
(compare Diagram 68)
Resigns
B
IV.
5
From a game Bird-Janowski.
m
m
"If
m WA
i
I
mm
'
i.
11
Diag. 87.
material, the win is not an
In spite of the preponderance of
White's alarming pawn array
easy one for Black, because of
CHESS STRATEGY
lOb
on the Queen's side
The King must first make use of his
great power as an end-game piece.
I.
K—B2
K— K3
..
P— Kt 5
3. P— Kt 6
4. PxP
5- B-K 5
2.
PxP
K-Q2
P—
Kt 7. But as White must first move his Bishop
to cover his pawn, the Rook's pawn is lost, and the manoeuvre
threatens
therefore unsound.
P— R 3 was indicated
threatens the
P—Kt 4 and their capture by
it
;
break-up of the Black pawns by
the King.
5
6.
K—B3
B— Q 4
R_R 2 ch
RxP
R_Q 7
RxB
7.K—K3
8.
9.
K—B 4
!
P-Kt4
Black reduces the position to an elementary ending, which is
theoretically a win.
Whilst the two White passed pawns are
isolated and fall singly, Black obtains two passed pawns,
which
are united and unassailable.
10.
PxR
P—K6
PxP
P— R4
KxK P
12. K— B4
13. P— Q 5 ch
14. K— K 5
11.
K X Kt P
K—B 2
Resigns.
V.
From a game Steiner-Forgacz {Szekesfehervdr,
^*l
W¥^A
PPI 4. ^^# x'^
^™."_^C..™
'^"'
m
^...™.^
"^.,^.
Diag. 88.
«„A
H
1907).
1^7
THE END-GAME
greater mobiUty of his Rook,
White has an advantage in the
instructive fashion.
and makes the most oi it in an
P-Kt 3
R-Kt 4
I.
White provokes this move in order
^^^'
to produce a wealoiess
at
K-K3
R-K B I
K-K2
3. R-K B 4
2.
the Rook to penetrate into
Black naturally dare not allow
the seventh.
4.
p
OR^
P-Q
^4
P-Q 4
been exif the Rooks had
This move would win the game,
which
the distant Passed pawn
changed, because in that case
the issue
file would decide
Black ciuld obtain on the Q Kt
the centre pawns become
But supported by the mobile Rook,
B 4 was necesInstLd of the text move.
P-K
frresistMe.
Rook.
sary in order to release the
c
p_B3
6.
PxP
PxP
P-KB4
not help
Rooks, the centre pawns would
either
on
obtain a passed pawn
White, because Black would
If it were not for the
""''•
7.
K-Q 3
9.
P-Kt 4
IrJ^I
If
P xP. 10 R-B 6 ch, K-K 2
;
P-K R 4
PxP
12. R— R2
13. R—R 6 ch
14. P-Q 5
10.
11.
15.
16.
R-K 6 ch
R—B 6
!
P-K Kt 4
R-Bi
P-B 5
n R-R 6 wins.
P-K R 3
PxP
St/
K—K 2
P-?,^
K-Q 2
Resigns.
B P, and
RxR 17 PxR, White captures the on
the Queen
still
For after
overtakes the passed pawn which
Black obtains
s
CHESS STRATEGY
wing the pawns at Q 5 and B 6 are unassailable (K — K 8,
p— Q 6, K — B 7, P— Q 7, etc.). The consequences of 16 R— B 6
had to be calculated to a nicety. If, for instance, the Q Kt P
io8
;
were already at his fourth. White would lose. In four moves
Black would have one of his pawns at his R 6, the other at
Kt 5. In the meantime White would have taken the B P
and come back to the Q file. No\v Black would win with
P Kt 6, because after P x P the R P queens unmolested.
—
VI.
From a game Charousek-Heinrichsen {Cologne, 1898).
«^^ m.^^m,^m
Diag. 89.
White's position is superior
firstly, because the only
open file on the board is his, and secondly, because the Black
Queen's side pawns are advanced, and therefore weak for a
King's ending. After exchanging the Queen and one Rook,
the possession of the King's file ensures the advance of the
King to K 4 and from there to Q 5. Then the weakness of
Black's pawns decides the game.
;
I.
THE MIDDLE GAME
R-K 5.
with
pawns.
109
.
By capturing. Black would only
dislocate his
^^^^
K-B 3
P-Kt 3
R-g3
^—^ 3
K-rs 4"
I
R_K 5
K-K4
g. P_K B 4
..
8.
chance by getting a distant
Black probably hopes for a counter
But he underrates the
passed^awn on the K Rook's file.
and even without ^^^^^
weakness of the Queen's side P^^^^s
wm, by settling the King s side
change of Rooks, White would
the game
side, as
then tearing up the Queen's
first
P-Kt
12
5 eh,
2; II PxP, PxP;
Kt 4,
10
m
Ld
.
R-K
P-K
PxP; isPxPch.
PxP
PxP
12.
PxRch
K— K2
13.
p_Q Kt 4
Resigns
10.
seven moves in which to exBlack must capture, as he needs
queen his Rook s pawn, wh 1st
change the Knight's pawn and
amve
the Q P after PxP, and yet
in thft time White can win
queenmg.
from
pawn
the
in time with his King to stop
then
follows 14 KxP.
After i^ .PxP, however, there
his King,
and
with
4>
White covers his passed pawn
all the Black pawns.
having full freedom, captures
P-Q
CHAPTER VI
THE MIDDLE GAME
General Remarks
end-game, we should be
Having now a fair knowledge of the
how the middle game should be
in a position to appreciate
maintain a favourable
end-game which might be
pawn formation, in view of the
the other hand, as soon as we
forced on us by exchanges. On
to secure the ^1ctory
have gained an advantage sufficient
pieces,
ourselves, by the exchange of
the end-game, we must
conducted.
We
must
throughout
m
iro
CHESS STRATEGY
try to reduce the position to one of
cases which
we have
discussed.
the typical elementary
Now it will invariably be
found that beginners are unwilling to make these essential
exchanges. This is explained by the attraction which combinations involving the action of many pieces have for them.
They assume that exchanges, particularly of the Queens,
make the games dull. Such ideas only prove that the beginner
has not grasped the nature of chess, the essence of which is
stem logic and uncompromising conclusions, and this demands
the shortest and clearest way leading to a mate. To the strong
player, able to play logically, logic will always be inseparable
from beauty in chess.
To play logically means to subordinate all combinations to
a leading plan of campaign, but there is difficulty in finding the
latter.
An unsound scheme, even if worked out to its logical
conclusion, can of course be of no value.
All the same it is
And in time one gains by experibetter than no plan at all.
ence, and develops a sort of instinct for rejecting from the
large number of possible operations all those which, properly
countered, cannot bring any advantage.
Beside practical play, which is essential in order to gain
this instinct, a methodical theoretical instruction is of inestimable value, and accelerates the development of the student's
mind. Now the instruction I wish to give in the theory of chess
will not take the form of an analysis, brought up right into the
middle game, of the various openings, tested and found correct
in master play.
Such collections erroneously bear the title
of " Theory of the Openings," and are, besides, quite useless
at this stage, since they only embody the results of analysis.
It is first necessary to ascertain a few leading principles,
which can be taught in a most simple manner, by the exercise
of common sense, rather than by applying oneself to the study
The student will no longer need to
of long-winded analysis.
discover time-worn maxims in the light of his own weary experience, and on the other hand, these principles will help him
to understand analysis, and to keep clearly before his mind's
eye the common and principal hnes of play, of which he might
easily lose sight in the labyrinth of suggested variations.
I propose to show the apphcation of such principles to
master play, and this will give us a further opportunity of
THE MIDDLE GAME
III
out in the first part for
deeper study, both of the rules set
of the end-game princonducting the opening correctly, and
considered.
ciples, which should be well
have
I
made
the
pawn
skeleton
with
its
attendant
in the study of the
grouping of pieces the main consideration
problems of the
the
of
investigation
now in the
opening
from the transformation which the
;
middle game
I
wiU start
further operastarting-point for the
best
the
In my
tions.
different pieces.
choice of effective manoeuvres of the
pawn skeleton has to undergo in the course of
opinion this
is
must
scheme we
Before we are able to evolve a practical
important points:
following
the
consideration
have under
In other
How do we know if an attack is likely to succeed ?
it
On what point should I concentrate the attack ?
words
direct
to
possible use
should be clear to all that it is of no
away. Yet beginners
move
can
that
anything
an attack on
I have often witfrequently infringe this obvious rule, and
nessed manoeuvres such as these (Diagram 90):
•
rm A W^
m
PK^^b'
wm.
m.
m.
m
Diag. 90.
p_Q R 3 2 P—Q Kt 4, and then, after the B has retired
P-R 5- Meanto his Kt 3 even, 3 R-Q Kt i, 4 P-Q R 4. 5
to make a loophole
while Black will have played P— Q R 31
B at R 2, and what is the result ? The Black Bishop
at B 4. but White has advanced his
is as effectual at R 2 as
for his
more Uable to
pawns, and weakened them, as they are now
CHESS STRATEGY
112
Moreover, White has used up five moves to achieve
Therefore Black has
his aim, whilst Black only needed three.
the development of
for
use
can
gained two moves, which he
attack.
his pieces.
Diagram 91 illustrates another mistake frequently made in
the choice of an objective, and one which can utterly spoil
the whole game,
even in
its
earliest
stage.
Black has to
m
im/i^Mi^m/i
m,^
U.
lit..i..lii^i
» H
Diag. 91.
move, and his game is somewhat hindered by the dominating
The latter prevents the Bishop
position of the White Queen.
from occupying a desirable square at his Q B 4, and also
—
makes the liberating move P Q 4 impossible. Therefore it
would seem desirable to drive the Queen away. But this
should only be done if it is not attended by some further
disadvantage.
Now the average player
is
not particularly fastidious in
The Queen irritates him, therefore the Queen
must be repelled one way or the other. He would probably
try P Q B 4. The result is that the Queen selects another good
his methods.
—
K
R
square, for instance at
3 or Q
4, but Black has not improved matters, for he still can play neither B B 4 nor P Q 4.
—
—
On the other hand, irredeemable harm has been done, inasmuch
The attack
as the Black Q P now remains " backward."
must
consequently
rejected.
B
be
Q
Queen
by
P
on the
4
—
such as these, in which short-lived attacks are made by
They must
pieces, are always of doubtful value.
upon
pawns
Sallies
THE MIDDLE GAME
113
pawn skeleton
unquestionably be avoided if they break up the
the mobility of
which is formed in the opening, and confine
the pieces.
,
,
1
intended solely
Also with regard to manoeuvres of pieces,
is obviously essential that
to drive away an opposing piece, it
purpose should not be
their
effecting
in
the attacking pieces
out of play.
become
they
lest
afield,
far
made to stray too
good
underlying
features
the
with
dealing
I shall delay
treated
by pieces and pawns, until I have
,
.
forms of attack," both
of the choice of an objective.
From what we have already expounded, it is clear
that the
Should it,
of evasion.
subject of an attack should be incapable
being
from
piece
of attack, be desired to prevent a
in the course
" pm."
A
moved that can onlv be effected by means of a
the
pawn however, can be held in place either by occupying
controUing the latter
square immediately in front of it, or by
bring to bear upon it.
with more forces than the opponent can
ill
il
§
W>:i
Diag. 92.
Diagram 91
The last two diagrams exemphfy this. If in
suggested,
as
B
4
Black makes the mistake of playing P-Q
objective for White s
the backward Q P becomes a welcome
by playing
QB4
attack. White can keep that pawn back
develop
would
he
which
threatens to advance, after
P—
as soon as it
quietly, double his Rooks, and bring the
Q and Q B to bear m
position not unhke that in
a concentrated attack on Q 6. A
defends the
Diagram 92 will result ultimately, in which Black
CHESS STRATEGY
114
pawn as many times as it is attacked, but in which Wliite
can bring up his K P to the attack, as the Q P cannot move
away, whilst Black has no further defensive move at his disposal.
Play against a backward pawn nearly always develops
on these lines, and is even easier when there is no defending
B of the same colour as the pawn.
(See p. 40,
and Game
No. 26.)
Such manoeuvres, in the course of which pieces are
pinned and attacked, are illustrated in Diagram 90. The
most obvious move, which initiates an attack and at the same
time completes the development of the minor pieces, is B Kt 5.
Attacks by means of such devices are so frequent and varied
that it will be necessary to treat them at some length, which I
now propose to do. I should also add that, with regard to
Diagram 90, the student will derive lasting benefit from a
—
thorough study of the position, and will thus improve his power
open
After B K Kt 5, the
files, diagonals, doubled pawns, etc.
threat is to attack the Knight a second and third time with
Kt Q 5, and Q B 3, after moving the K Kt away. As
Black's K Kt is only supported twice, and there is no chance
of bringing up more forces for its defence, Black must undertake something to provide against the threatened onslaught.
The most natural plan is to develop the Q B at K 3, from
where it can be exchanged for the Knight should Kt Q 5 be
played. The doubled pawn, which White could force by
exchanging the Bishops, is in no way detrimental to Black's
game. On the contrary, the opening of the file for the Rook,
with the attendant chance of playing P Q 4 supported by
the doubled pawn, gives Black the advantage.
The doubled pawn which Black obtains after 2 Kt Q 5,
to judge of the desirability, or otherwise, of obtaining
—
—
—
—
—
—
Kt— K
2 4 B x Kt, would also
3 P X B (or 3 B X B),
be of no help to White. The apparent weakness created in
B 3 and
Black's game at
3 by the disappearance
B X Kt
;
of the
Kt P does not assist White in this case, because the
pieces
which could take advantage of such a weakness, the
;
K R
K
Q B and the Kt at Q 5, have been exchanged. There only
remains the K Kt and the Q for an immediate attack, whilst
the Black Rook will soon get into effective action on the open
Q 2,
R i 6
R 6, Kt— Kt 3
Knight's file, e.g. 5
Q—
K—
;
Q—
;
THE MIDDLE GAME
7
Kt—R 4, Kt X Kt
ling of the
;
8 Q x Kt,
Rooks on the Kt
Q—K
file.
ii5
2, followed
by the doub-
Considerations of a similar
Kt 5,
2 B x Kt.
2
B—
Kt— K
nature would tend to show that i
The White Q B, which is so
is in favour of Black.
B3
weaknesses at Black's
of
advantage
effective in taking
is not
Knight
Queen's
The
exchanged.
has been
;
PxB
K
and R 3
K B P, as
it would be exchanged or
Compared v^nth the position
Kt—Q 5,
considered above, which occurs after I...B— K 3. 2
available for attack on the
else driven off in time by P— B 3.
his Q B,
Black has the further advantage of maintaining
his fourth,
to
on
P
B
K
weak
the
push
to
possible
which makes it
a useful
and either exchange it or push it still further to B 5,
and secure position.
his King s
Matters would be different were Black to allow
dangerous
wing to be broken up without getting rid of White's
Let us consider what happens, if Black
pieces by exchanges.
prevents White's
takes no measures against Kt— Q 5, but only
K Kt 5. White
uhimate Q—B 3 by pinning the Knight with
Queen into play
gains a decisive advantage by bringing his
,
B—
the threatened
before Black is able to secure himself against
Kt by
combined attack of Q and B, or alternately Q and
K—R R—Kt I—Kt
I,
I will give two examples of
3.
how the
of the
whole game now centres on the attack and defence
how
and
Kt
P,
the
points weakened by the disappearance of
White pushes home his advantage in the one instance with
of the Kt.
the help of the B, in the other by the co-operation
L I B— K Kt 5, B— K Kt 5 2 Kt~Q 5, Kt— Q 5
Q_Q 2, BxKt?; 4 BxKt, PxB; 5 Q—R 6, and
;
;
2
there
no reply to the threat of KtxP ch and QxP
mate, except through the sacrifice of the Q. Forcing the
exchange of Knights is of no avail, for after 5...Kt—K 7
is
K—R BxP ch 7 KxB, Kt—B 5 ch 8 KtxKt,
and wins
White occupies the Kt
P X Kt 9 K— R
i
11 RxR
Kt
R—
Kt
K
9...K—R i 10 R— K
easily
Queen.
the
of
loss
or
mate
by
followed
Q xR 12 R— K Kt I
B—
PxKt;
R4
4KtxKtch,
5
3 Q_Q2, P— B3;
ch
BxP
K—
ch
R
Kt—
K
R
Q—
7
7
BxKt; 6
has
Black
Now
Kt
Kt—
R
K—
ch
Kt—
B
8 K xB,
5
9
ch
6
;
I,
;
;
;
file first
I,
:'
i,
;
;
;
1
II.
6,
;
;
succeeded
B P.
i,
in interrupting the
i,
3.
White Queen's action on the
But it has taken many moves, with the sole result that
CHESS STRATEGY
ii6
All the other pieces,
Black's Queen's Knight is better placed.
however, occupy the positions they took up in the opening.
The Black Knight, moreover, is only supported by the R P
until Black manages to block the White Bishop's diagonal by
P Q 4. Meanwhile White has gained a big start, and is
ready to occupy the open file with his Rooks. The sequel
might be 10
5 !, Q P x P
Q 4 !, B xP (if P xP 11
12
Kt I, etc.)
11
B 3,
Kt 3 12 Q
Q i,
—
P—K
P—
R—K
P—
B—
R—
K— R I 13 R— K Kt Q—K 2 14 R—Q R—K Kt i
R—Kt 2 (Kt xB 16 Q xP ch
16 R— B
15 R—R
;
:
!
;
i,
;
;
;
3,
3.
;
!
;
!)
;
;
3,
followed by BxP(B6).
Taking it all in all, we see from the foregoing that the
pinning of the Black Knight can only be injurious to Black
if he does not take timely measures to provide against White's
Kt
—Q
5,
attack on
which threatens to concentrate more forces for the
K B 6 than Black is able to mobilise for its defence.
Beginners, after having experienced frequent trouble
through their inadequate defence of this kind of attack, try
to avoid their recurrence by making such pinning moves
impossible from the
first
side the pin is threatened.
—
and playing P R 3 on whichever
Apart from the loss of time, on
which I remarked at length when discussing the opening, such
pawn moves have various other drawbacks.
With every pawn move it should be considered whether
the squares protected by the pawn before it has moved may
not need the support of that pawn at a later stage. This is
particularly the case with regard to squares in front of the
castled King.
If one of those pawns pushes on, the squares
which have lost its protection frequently offer an opening for
a direct attack by the enemy's pieces on the King.
A second consideration is the fact that the advancing pawn
itself becomes a target for an assault in which the opponent,
moving up a pawn on the next file, brings his Rooks into play,
or in which he sacrifices a piece for the advanced pawn and the
one that protects it, thus robbing the King of the protection
he sought to obtain in casthng.
The following examples will contribute much to the understanding of this most important subject, the grasp of which
will mean a great step forward for the student.
The position in Diagram 93 is from a game v. Scheve-
THE MIDDLE GAME
Teichmann (Berlin, 1907).
117
White played i P-R
B—
3 in order
Kt 5. ihe
Knight through
to avoid the pinning of his
required for the
move is not unjustified, as the Knight is
move, however,
support of the square at Q 4- The pawn
must thmk
White
and
has the drawbacks enumerated above,
the King's
on
fight
pieces for the
of keeping a sufficiency of
weakness
the
utihsing
from
wing, in order to prevent Black
forces.
superior
thus created for a combined assault by
Diag. 93.
In this case White does not take piecautionary
and succumbs in a surprisingly short time
measures,
PxP With this move White opens the
2. .Q Kt x P
diagonal for Black's K B for no apparent reason.
i...Kt—B 3
;
2
?
;
.
Instead of providing for the defence of his King's
3 Kt X Kt ?
side pieces. 3. .Q X Kt
wing. White exchanges one of the King's
.
White has provoked this sacrifice by his
4 Kt— Q 2 B X P
B P is pinned, and the Q enters by
two moves. The
!
K
last
given up by
way of her Kt 6. the protection of which was
5 P X B, Q— Kt 6 ch
pushing on the R P. The rest is easy
Kt^Kt
8 Kt— B 3,
i,
Kt
K—
5
7
6 K-R I. QxP ch
resigns.
10
BxP;
Ri,
Q—Kt6ch; 9K—
Marshall-Burn
Diagram 94 shows a position from a game
;
;
;
;
Strong in the knowledge that the Black
1907).
can only^ with
Queen's side pieces are not developed, and
defence of the King's side
difficulty be of assistance in the
(Ostend,
;
CHESS STRATEGY
ii8
because of their limited mobility, White takes advantage of
Kt pawn
the weakness created by the advance. of the Black
the
King's
assault
on
immediate
an
initiates
third,
and
his
to
K
stronghold.
mm hma
^i^^
Hi * wmr^wm - ^^
Diag. 94.
I P
file.
—K R
If
White push
2. . .Kt
style.
4,
R— K I 2 P — R 5. This forces open the Rook's
;
the pawn were still at
XP
on to
Kt 2, Black would simply let
R 6 and then reply with P—K Kt 3.
R
X Kt, White concludes the game in brilhant
3
Black's wrong development has given a welcome oppor;
K
B has an open
tunity for sacrificial combinations. Now the
diagonal, the pawn position is broken, and White's Q and R
have no difficultv in using the Rook's file for a deadly attack.
Kt 3 (if
3...PxR; 4 BxP ch, KxB; 5 Kt— Kt 5 ch,
Kt I, then 6 QxP, Kt—B 3; 7 QxP ch,
R i;
K—
K—
6
Kt—B P—K 4 7 Kt—R 4 ch, K— B 3
8 Castles,
8 Kt— R 7 ch, K—k 2
loKtxBch,
9 Kt— B 5 ch, K— K 3
K—K 2 II Kt—B 5 ch, K—K 3 12 P— Q 5 ch, K xKt
K—
etc.)
3,
;
;
;
Q X P ch, K— K 5
R—Q 4 mate.
13
;
;
;
;
;
14 Castles, followed by
P
—B 3 or
In cases where both sides have already castled on the same
wing, and the opponent has weakened his position by pushing
on one of the pawns of that wing, it is seldom advisable to
one of the pawns in front
of the King, as the latter 's position would be weakened.
An
start an attack with the advance of
THE MIDDLE GAME
ii9
prospect of
justified if there is a
attack of this kind is only
opponent
the
before
force
concentring with aU speed a superior
has time for a counter attack.
illustrates one much
The Black position in Diagram 95
the advance of the
" natural " players.
Here
favoured by
Diag. 95-
as his
K R P would not be a suitable plan of attack for White
be brought
Rook is no longer on the Rook's file, nor could it
endeavour to take
back in time. In this case White must
and K R 3,
advantage of the weaknesses at Black's K B 3
the modus
be
will
produced by his move P-K Kt 3. This
exchange
the
R 6, forcing
2 followed by
operandi :
B—
Q-Q
B. After that the Q in conjunction
of Black's valuable
to force an entry at
with one of the Knights will attempt
following, the moves
6, as for instance in the
B 6 or
and took note
watched
once
of which are taken from a game I
K
K
KR
of as being most instructive.
2
I
^
.r
Q-Q P-Q3; 2B-KR6, PxP; 3BxB, KxB;
Kt-Q 4 6 B-B 4. Q R-Q ^
4 p X P. Q-Q 2 5 Kt-K 4,
B-B i
9 Q-K^ 5,
8 Kt-B 6, Q-K 3
7 BxKt^PxB
4Q-B
^^^^-^
i,
10 Q R-K
4
(to prevent Kt-Kt 4)
P—
QxKt,
4;
KtxKt;
13
B
P—K R 3; 12 Kt—Q 4.
i6 P-K Kt 4,
B
P-K
4. P-B 5
15
P-Q
2,
5
Q-Q
14
Q-K 3; 17 P-B 5> Q-B 3: 18 R-K 4. B-Ivt 2;
-o
>
:
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
CHESS STRATEGY
120
R—
B 3 !,
19
followed by R
Q— B 4
20
;
QxP ch, KxQ
— R 7 or Kt — R 7 mate.
21
;
R— R 3 ch,
A somewhat more difficult case is shown in Diagram 96.
m^W^m
#j
Diag. 96.
Here the advance of the White King's side pawns has undeniably produced weaknesses in the pawn skeleton, and these
would be fatal had the Black pieces as much mobility as the
White ones.
But the congestion of Black's pieces on the
Queen's side makes his defence unwieldy, and White has no
difficulty in accumulating his forces on the King's side for the
final assault.
The prospects are that White will be able to
bring home his attack, before Black has a chance of forcing
exchanges and of bringing about the end-game, which through
the weakness of the White pawns would probably turn to his
advantage.
The play (E. Cohn-Ed. Lasker match, Berlin,
1909) is instructive, and shows how the attack should be
conducted
—
—
positions,
i
Kt Kt 3, B Kt 2
Kt i,
3
Q 2 4
4.
B 2. The concentration of the White pieces has become
alarming, and threatens to be continued by Q Q 2, R Kt 2,
2
K—R
K—
in
2,
such
P—B 3
R— K
;
Q R— K Kt I, and Kt— B 5.
Kt—
;
—
Kt—R
—
So the Black King decides on
flight, but he finds no peace on the Q side either, because
there his advanced pawns soon allow White to make a breach
in the Black position.
5
Kt—Kt 2, K— K 2
B— B I.
It is
Q— K
K R—K
6
2, Kt— Kt 3
B i,
7
Black's intention to play
B 4 as soon as
;
;
P—
THE MIDDLE GAME
to make an
oi
nracticable, and
pracucduit;,
tion on the
n
attempt at a counter demonstrai
x ?• (Black should
K V, A iv
Kmg s side, 8 F— K 15 4, K—^
have kept to
his
PvP O PxP-
original
10
121
intention
Q—B
2,
^
and P^^V^^ ^-^ 4K
Kt—Q 2;
II
P—Q R 41
I^Kt '2P 12 PxP, PXP; 13 RXR. BXR^^s opened up
Now White
out to do, He
has achieved what he set
u^se
side, and is ready to
Queen's
the
avenues of attack on
which
on
by playing P-Kt 4
the weakness of Black's Q B P
White
file for the
Black must submit to opening the
either case White brmgs
In
B.
White
Q
the diagonal for the
on the Black King s position
vastly superior forces to bear
game Black escaped only
and Black should lose. In this
his opponent
through a mistake on the part of
weaknesses
it was seen how fatal
positions
foregoing
In the
of the
advance
premature
the
can be which are produced by
can
pieces
opposing
the
pawns 'in front of the King, on whom
the
on
are
concerned
When the pawns
force their attack.
premature
a
of
disadvantages
opposite wing to their King, the
The weakness concerns
different way.
^Rf
advance are felt in a
the forces behind them and is
the pawns themselves and not
particularly of Rook
end-game,
apt to cause the loss of the
in Diagrams 97
positions
end-games. Let us compare the
k
ki
r« *-....„.-
i
A '"
Diag. 97-
Black pawns is broken
and 98. In the one case the chain of
The
of the Q Kt P.
other
by the absence of K Kt P, in the
absence of the
K Kt pawn can lead to serious consequences in
CHESS STRATEGY
122
the middle game, because of the weakness of Black's
and K R 3 (compare Diagram 90)
;
it
K B 3
can, however, hardly
become awkward in the end-game, as the pawns on the B and
R files are within the protecting reach of their King.
wMi
'fm^^WMi
il
ilAlfiiP
p^
Wf-"^
^p ^ ^^
Diag. 98.
On the other hand, the absence of the Q Kt P is of no consequence for the middle game. There is nothing behind it which
could invite an attack. The Q R P and Q B P, however, are
very weak for the end-game, as they are quite out of reach of
I do not wish to imply
the King (compare Game No. 19).
that Black should have avoided the exchange at his Q B 3
at all cost ; such an exchange has always the compensating
advantage of opening a file for the Rooks, which advantage
often means a favourable middle game, as will be readily
understood.
Further, it is often possible to get rid of the weak
Q R P by pushing it on, and eventually compelling the exchange of the opposing Kt P, an exchange which can usually
be enforced if the Rooks have occupied the open Kt file. The
pawn itself is often useful at B 3, in that it can support the
advance of P Q 4 in the centre, should it be desired, or it
can, by pushing on, be brought to exercise further pressure on
the opposing Kt P.
The break-up of the pawn position on the Q side can become awkward in the end-game and sometimes in the middlegame when the pawns can be attacked, and pieces brought to
—
THE MIDDLE GAME
123
the Knig's side
side without leaving
bear on the Queen's
"^'m
betlustrated by the position in
Diagram 99-
HlBlMMi
'
•
i"
wMwsm^m
W Bl M e"
7////X:
i
\
Diag. 99-
(Paris, 1914)
From a game Fr. Lazard-Ed. Lasker
sides are broken, and the
Here the pawn positions on both
advanfirst, gets a decisive
hat o^ccupie^s the open files
move. We can conclude at
In this case it is Black's
mnst
the opening ^adly. He
once that mite has played
stiU to =^Pt"^«
have lost two moves, for he has
*%^^^^47.
be his move. This disadvan
then being White, it should
with which White has emerged
tage' small as it may seem,
greatest
to bring him into the
from tTe opening, is sufficient
defend the Pawn by
d'Zities!%lack, of course, does not
practically reduce the B to a
2, as this would
S_Kt 2 or
i, would both attack
moreover^ White, by R-Kt i or Q
Instead of that Black ut.hses
file.
The B and obtain an open
^n ;th«rhas, as it were as a gift •"
the two moves, which he
Kt file^
the
Rooks on
equalised position, to bring both
rank
eighth
or
seventh
poUcy allows Black to occupy the
rear
or
flank
the
White pawns from
at wiU, and to attack the
radius
the
hampers
This menace
acco d ng to circumstances.
as they must always be ready
pieces,
White
of action of the
and this gives Black
ttdefence of the threatened pawns,
playe
Ssf
S
B-Q
4e
ms
for
by iar the superior game.
CHESS STRATEGY
124
The play was continued as follows
R— Kt 7
B— K 4, B— K 3
i. . .R
:
— Kt
i ; 2
P—Q R 3, K R— Kt i.
B x P,
The
White could
occupy the Queen's file, but the White B at K 3, which prevents
the entry of the Rooks at Q 7, makes the operation aimless.
Therefore White is condemned to inactivity. On the contrary,
;
3
4
;
Knight's file is now definitely in Black's hands.
Black's fine of action is clear.
His entry on the seventh can
only achieve something if White's Q B P can be deprived of
—
—
its support.
To do this Black has only to play P Q B 4 B 5
and P K B 4. This, of course, weakens Black's K B, and
the White Rooks might obtain an entry on the K file. There-
—
fore Black will effect a timely
exchange of one of his Rooks,
K file. These con-
after which his King alone will hold the
—
make the following moves clear 5 K R K i,
6 P K R 3, a further awkward necessity in
positions of this kind.
Before the Rook can venture out, a
siderations
P
—Q B 4
:
—
;
loophole must be provided for the King.
6...P—B 5 7 R— K
R—Kt 8 ch 8 RxR, RxR ch
K—
P—
B—
10
R
B
B
K—B 2 11 B— K 2 (threat9
4
ening R— Q B
R— Kt 2 12 R— Q B K—B 3 (now B xP
3,
;
2,
;
3,
;
3),
;
;
3,
;
—
—
not feasible on account of R Q B 2)
13 P B 4. White
wishes to keep the Black King from his Q 5 but cannot do so
is
;
Black, however, can occupy the Q file with his
Rook, and confine the White King to his wing. 13. .R Q 2
permanently.
.
—
;
K— Kt R—Q 5 15 K— B K— K 2 16 R— K 3,
K— Q 3 17 K— Kt R—Q 7 18 P—B B— B R—R 7
14
3,
3.
;
3,
;
;
2.
3,
;
would be a mistake on account of RxB ch, but the Q R P
—
cannot escape. 19 P Q R 4, P
21
Q I,
K 2,
Q 4 22
B— B—
R X R P.
24 R—B
;
2,
—Kt 3
—
—
B 3, R R 7 ;
Q 2,
R6
23
Now at last Black has obtained material
R—
R—R 8
20 B
;
;
R—
R—
;
which was made possible by his command of the open
To convert it into a win by queening the extra pawn
is only a matter of time.
We have now seen how the possession of open files reacts
on the mobility of the opposing forces, forever increasing
their difficulties until the positional advantage is converted
into material gain.
We shall meet with cases later on in which
the greater mobility of minor pieces achieves the same result
and find more and more proofs of the truth of the main general
principles which I introduced at the outset.
gain,
Kt file.
THE MIDDLE GAME
Let us now recapitulate the
the course of our deUberations
I25
touched upon in
chief points
:
I.
+ ^ +^
jx.
only be directed to
Generally speaking, attacks should
,
objects which cannot be moved
attack is aimed at driymg ott
If in particular cases the
favourable post
opposing piece from an especially
away.
2
an
involves the weakenmg
that attack is unwise, if it
have to take up mthe pawn position, or if pieces
effect their purpose
ferior positions in order to
either by leavmg
Pawn moves always create weaknesses,
behind, or by giving opother unsupported pawns
formerly guarded by
posing pieces access to squares
specially so in front of the
_
^
them, and this more
castled King.
moves are only justiAttacks which depend on pawn
be accumulated m
can
fied if overwhelming forces
might become the
pawns
support, as the advanced
object of a counter attack.
some drawbacks,
As pawn moves have very generally
hunting ground.
own
pieces'
the middle game is the
of sound
consideration
first
the
.
4
<
.
As in the opening,
make only such moves
play in the middle game is to
the pieces.
of
mobility
as do not reduce the
I shall now give examples
As illustrative of such manoeuvres
of these games
annotations
my
from actual master play. In
constantly
before the student s mmd
I have tried to keep
which
combmations
different
the
the main ideas underlying
avo d
I thus
strategical pnnciples
spring from general
into
bnng
mass of detail, and
burdening his memory with a
thereby
of each hne of play,
promi^^^^^^ the basic principle
game, even
for conducting a middle
developing his capacity
after an unusual opening.
I
have fixed mainly upon such
of the openings treated
cases the
first
moves
gan.es as are illustrative
In most
in the first part of this book.
need any special
will, therefore, not
being typical examples, will only
remarks. The end-games,
been rechapters in which they have
need reference to the
spectively dealt with.
PART II
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES FROM MASTER
TOURNAMENTS
Game No. i
V,Tiite :
Tartakower.
Black
:
Burn.
King's Gambit declined (compare p. 30).
I.
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
promote development either, and
7:
127
only compromises the Q B P
Kt-B 3
B^Kt 5
King's pa^vn, which is deprived
This is aimed at the White
Black
by the Q Kt. In this position
of its^natural support
his
defend
to
than
rather
P
Rite's
does well to attack
Being
him.
benefit
only
can
wtusP an oDen King's file
K
re^ortirh^erocVythefilewithhisRookbefore White
has time to bring his King
8.
KtxP
It would have been
^^^-^3.
into safety.
better to protect the pawn by
^
Q-K 2
(,^3^1^3 1
'"im i
p..
"wi
^^5
•^
......
Diag. 100.
The beginning of a brilhant attack.
changes the Bishop or the Knight,
Whether White ex-
he is overwhelmed.
KtxKt
Q-K i ™^;/°^-^1
After 9 BxKt, PxB; 10 KtxP.
9.
would also lose because Black gains
two pawns after Kt x P
,
note how speedily the
II 0—0, KtxP.
White's Q B 3 is brought to book.
It is interesting to
weakness at
10.
BxP
PxKt
KtxP 11
II.
129
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Game No. 2
Leonhardt.
Black : Marshall.
Falkbeer Counter Gambit
(compare p. 35)-
P-K4
P-KB4
3. PxQP
S'S^
P-§4
P-55
Kt-KB3
White
:
I.
2.
4;K^^3
the extra pawn ''^/f^/^P'"'^
followed by
gl,
^^ his Rook and there
B-B 7 ch or Kt-B 7.
6
B-QB4
....
7. B-Q 2
continue with B-K 3 m
of course Uke to
would o
White wouiQ
the diagonal. He
ssession of
Black's
chance of castling through
°'^Td however bse h
lines
the
where
cases
detrimental in all such
K.
time.
any
at
open
or likely to be forced
PnThe LtT'arropen
Ss
r
Castles
B—K 2
15=B3
II. B-K 3
Kt—
o
3
?
completed ^s
White has not yet
care should be to
Js.t
^KKt5
Wnjent
jf^^^^
bnng "'^t
^'^^^f Kt^''^^''I^Kt_R 3t;?:r°r^:vt?nte\%:i'not^^^^^^^^^
first
file but
gains a move
13-
m so doing.
Q-Q 4
^Q
3
CHESS STRATEGY
130
Black's course is obvious
he must win the
P.
The
forces will then be equal in material, but there will remain
a
Q
WM
W^.
^P
Mfl
fM4
^^
WIM
P S ^ ^^
A.
i
Diag. loi.
K B P, and this
flaw in White's position, namely the exposed
tells in the ending.
14.
P—K R 3
Now the square at K Kt 3 is unprotected, and this is
serious in view of a probable Knight's ending,
where, moreover,
K Kt 3 in orderBoth the K Kt P and K B P would
be weak, with the King on the other wing, and
be under
constant threat of being captured.
The game does proceed as indicated, and the simple and logical manner
in which
it
will sooner or later be necessary to play
to support the
K B P.
P
Marshall brings home his advantage in a
very short time
shows convincingly how fatal a shattered pawn
position can
be for the end-game. Instead of the move in the
text White
should have played BxB followed by Kt— B
which
would
3,
have completed his development without making
another
pawn move.
14.
1516.
KtxB
K R— K I
RxR
KtxKt
IQ. P— K Kt
3
1718.
making a loophole for the King.
correct, as the threat of mate ties
BxB
QR-Qi
RxR
QKtxP
KtxKt
P— KR3
In this case the move is
the Black Rook to his rank.
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
131
players are fond ol
wrong to make a loophole, as weak
that
case," before it is shown
doine as early as possible "in
ending.
will be a Rook
a need for it, or that there
It is
therf
wm be
20.
P— R 3
Q xP on account of Kt-Kt 5.
B 3- 21 QxP
threatens KtxB P followed by Q-Q
White is afraid of playing 20
which
of Q-B 4 threatening
would not be a sufficient defence because
a
4 would conjure up
mate, and on the other hand 21
the
When
Kt
4dang;rous attack, beginning with P-Q
there is always the danger of
wings,
different
on
castle
players
and opening up files for Ins
the opponent sacrificing pawns
The game then assumes
Rooks and Q against the castled King.
settled one way
generally
are
a wild character, and as matters
considerations
end-game
or another in the middle-game,
can be
pawns,
of
position
both with regard to number and
who
player
the
that
shown
disregarded. Experience has
Q-R
to win, and that it is of ittle
develops his attack first is likely
of this kind without atassault
use to submit tamely to an
tempting a counter attack.
the beginner to underSuch games are very difficult for
stand
There is about them something
violent
and difficult
m order to
and years of practice are necessary
weighing up the possibilities
gain the judgment required for
where the Kings have castled
of attack and counter attack,
on opposite wings.
to estimate,
23.
RxR
P—R3
Kt-B 3
RxQ
PxR
24.
Kt-Q 4
Kt—K 2
K—B I
20
21
r:1q I
22.
_.
QxQ
25.
Kt-K 5
irresistibly, and attacks
The Black King now pushes forward
King's wing^ The White King
the weakened pawns on the
the Black Kt would wm
cannot get any nearer, as a check by
a pawn at once. The end is easy.
26.
27.
28.
2Q.
30.
P-B 3
K—
B2
P-Kt 3
Kt—Q 4 ch
P-KR4
K-K 2
^—\^
Kt-B 7
K—B 3
P-KR4
CHESS STRATEGY
13^
Now the P at Kt 3 is " backward " and therefore lost.
31.
White
P-B 4
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
KtxKt
6. P— Q3
7.
8.
P— Q5
PxKt
Q—B 2
133
!
White offers his Q B P in order to be able to strengthen his
centre by P Q 4, and to free his pieces. To protect his Q B P
Kt 2 ?,
would be inferior, e.g. 8 Kt— K 2, Kt— B 3 or 8
—
PxP; gBxP.B—Kt5l; 10 BxB, QxRs
QxBch; 12Q-Q2, Q-Q5.
PxP?
8
It
ch
;
B—
11 Q—B 2,
would have been better, of course, to continue developing
B 3, which at the same time maintains the pressure
with Kt
—
on Q 5.
9.
10.
Intending
Kt
B-K 3
P-Q 4
Kt—R3
—B 4 with a view to exchanging the Bishop.
After that; Black's position on White squares is weak specially
Kt i, which was opened by Black's
on the diagonal Q
7,
K
R
fifth move, and on which the White Bishop can soon operate.
The game is instructive in showing the development of that
idea.
B—K2
Q—Q 2
QxKt
P-K Kt 3
13- B-Q 3
of Q— K 2 and B—B 4.
threat
White's
prevent
Black cannot
Q—Q 4
14. Q-K 2
10
Kt— B 4
12. KtxB
11.
M mm ^
11 M H
s ^^
Msfei,'^
gj
mm, _ g^
*
*
Diag. 102.
15. Castles
QxQ P ch
CHESS STRATEGY
134
Black is obliging. The opening of files in the centre is favourable for "VVTiite, as he can make use of his Rooks in the combined attack. Instead of the move in the text, development
with Kt— B 3 and Castles Q R was the last, though slender,
chance of saving the game.
B-K3
Q-Q4
If Q xP, Q— B 2 followed by B—
Q 4, B— K 4, K R— K i and
i6.
Q R—Q I.
Black has no sufficient means of defence to oppose
this massing of forces.
Q R-Q I
1718.
Q-R 4
BxBP
The end is swift, and easy to understand.
R—Bi
PxB
18
Q—Kt4
Q—R 5 ch
21. P—K 6
19.
20.
R—
B2
Resigns.
Game No. 4
White
:
Tarrasch.
Black
Giuoco Piano
P— K 4
Kt—K B 3
3. B—B 4
4. P-B 3
:
Capablanca.
P—K 4
Kt—Q B 3
B—B 4
1.
2.
The beginning of interesting operations in the centre.
steady development with
4 P Q 3, P Q 3 ; 5 Kt
:
Kt—B 3
B—K
—
B—K
The
—B
—
3,
Kt 5,
6
3 or Castles tends to a draw
from the very first, and is thought dull.
;
Kt-B3
Black can avoid the exchange of pawns, which White tries
P—
K
to bring about after
2.
Q 4, by playing his Queen to
This covers his
P a second time, and White's
4 can be
K
P—Q
I35
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
obstructs the
answered with B— Kt 3. White's Q B P then
In a game von Schewe-Teichmann
Kt's natural development
on p. 117 was reached
discussed
position
(Berlin, 1907) the
Castles,
:.
Q 4,
moves
Q 3 6
5
after the following
.
P—
P—
P-R 5. B-R 2.
;
B^Kt 3
7 P-Q R 4> P-Q R 3
J
56.
;
8
PxP
P-Q 4
PxP
B—Kt 5 ch
Diag. 103.
7.
B-Q2
is
The pawn sacrifice by 7 Kt— B 3, Kt xK P 8 Castles
of
spirit
the
with
keeping
much more interesting and more in
development and prethe opening.^ White obtains a quick
P—Q 4- After
playing
by
game
vents Black from freeing his
and after
attack),
(Moller
P— 5 follows
8...BxKt;
!
;
Q
9
1
various lines of attack
The following two short games will give an idea of the
which are to be found in this opening
s
-a -^ ^z^
England - America, 1907): »...BXKt;
a Howell - Michell (cable match,
Kt,
Rx
11
l, Kt-K 2
3
B-B 3 ; 10
g
5 (Moller attack),
would be this:
B X B 13 Kt X B, B-B 4 (the only chance of a draw
_
<i
R-K
P_Q
12 B-Kt 5,
;
Castles; 14 Ktx
R P. Kx Kt
,7 B-K 2. Kt-Kt 3
!
;
;
18
15
Q R 5 ch, K-Kt
Q-R 7 ch, K-B 2
B-R5ch,KtxB; 21 Q-Kt 6 with perpetual check)
P-Q
;
i
;
;
R-R 4, J-K B4!;
R-R 6, Kt-B 5 20
16
;
19
;
14
;
Q— B 3,Q— Q 2 (Bx R
;
B 16 QxB,
isQxPch followed by Q-K 6 ch andQxB); 15 B-Kt 5 Q xmoves.
mate in a few
P_K B 3 17 Q R— K I, PxKt; 18 RxKt ch and Castles;
12 P— Q 6, PxP;
11 RxKt,
h X v.Y, first 10 moves as before:
BxB; 15 Kt x B, Kt-R 3 (QxKt;
13 B-K Kt 5, Kt-B 4; 14 Q-Q 5!.
16 Q R— K i, resigns.
16 Qx P ch)
!,
;
;
;
CHESS STRATEGY
136
—
—
9...B
B 3, White wins back his piece by R K i (lo PxKt
would not be good, as Black could free his game by Kt P x P
and P— Q 4). On the other hand, after 8. .Kt x Kt P x Kt,
White in addition gains a move,, as B x P is countered by
;
.
Q-Kt 3.
As played here. Black succeeds in playing P—
game is even.
Q 4, and the
Indeed the isolated Q P is a weakness in the
White position.
BxBch
7
QKtxB
9- PxP
P—Q4
KKtxP
8.
!
Q—Kt 3
KR
K R—K I
10.
Q Kt— K 2
11. Castles
12.
Castles
P—Q B 3
Now the Knight is securely posted in the centre, and Black
can accumulate forces for the attack on the White Q P, possibly by Q— Kt 3, R— Q I, and Kt— B 4.
P—Q R 4
13.
in order to drive the Queen from her Kt
3, but this
is
" three-edged," as Master Gregory would say,
is sure to prove
advance
and the pawn
weak in the end-game.
Q—Kt3
B—K 3
g—B 2
13
M- Q—R 3
p—R 5
Kt—K4
15.
16.
Kt—K Kt 5 would seem to be stronger here. B—B 4 would
then be answered by 17
B—
Q 3. After B x B, 18 Q x B, White
obtains opportunities for a King's side attack, in which the
Rook could co-operate via
4 and Kt 4 or
4.
K
R
OR— Qi
16
17.
18.
Kt-B 5
P—K Kt 3
B-B I
?
K
K R 3, and there
This produces weak points at
B 3 and
being as yet no definite threat in Black's Kt— B
been avoided.
It
of attack, for there
is
is
5, should have
of course difficult to formulate a plan
no weak place in Black's armour.
In
137
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
have played Q R-Q i and Q 2 in
anv case White could safely
on the King's file or Queen's file acorder to double the Rooks
But now as soon as a Rook move^
cord ng to circumstances.
end to support
i-and that will have to be done in the
to
might become awkward.
the weak Q P-Black's B-Kt 5
18.
19.
20.
Q R-Q
Kt—B4
Kt—Q 3
Kt—Kt 4
I
l
BxKt
avoiding an isolated pawn in
a subtle manner.
W///9//A
tW///A
j*^
W/.
Diag. 104.
Q-Kt 4
22. Kt-Q3
23- Q Kt-K 5
24. KtxB
25- Kt—R4
21.
RxB
B—Kt5
P—R4
PxKt
Kt—K 5 would be answered by K R—Q i 26 Kt xP, Kt xP
If White stops
threatening both Kt-B 6 ch and Kt-B 7.
wms.
ch
both threats with Q—B 3, Kt— K 7
;
25
26.
KR-Qi
R— K 7
Q-Q3
Now Black foregoes his well-earned advantage.
Wliite's subtle move 28. P—R 6.
26
He overlooks
Q—B i was mdicated.
and there was time
White's Queen's Pawn could not escape,
seventh by
to dislodge the White Rook from the
R—Q
2, e g.
138
CHESS
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
I39
Kt—B 3
P_B 3
5. P-Q 3
4.
of P—B 3,
P_Q 4 would seem to be the logical consequence Black
will
move
After the text
preferable.
and therefore
pawn
the advance of his own
sooner or later be able to enforce
the greater mobility.
have
then
will
to
4. and his pieces
Q
P--Q3
5
P—
Q 4 at once. For if
Here Black might have played
in possession of the
Black
leaves
White takes the pawn, he
but plays
so
do
not
does
g Kt 5
he
pa^vn in the centre. If
of
exchange
the
and
2
be
would
Black's reply
B—
Q-K
instead,
pawns at K 5 would follow.
a lost move.
6.
B—K 3
White's
P-B 3 is then clearly
B—Kt 3
7. Q Kt— Q 2
i gt-B I
Kt—K 2
Q
Castles
Q_K 2
lo!
P-B 3
Kt-Kt 3
P-Q 4
PxP
B—Kt 3
Kt—Kt 3
11.
12.
PxP
account of his
Black has now the superior position on
pawn centre.
1^5.
Castles
KR
B-Kt 5
15. BxKt
14.
B—B 2
P-K R 3
PxB
Black's
K B
and
3
There is nothing in the weakness at
of his K Kt Pawn, as White
disappearance
the
by
caused
KR3
be a
B. On the contrary the open file should
has lost his
are
pieces
Black's
strong centre.
distinct asset, for, having a
attack.
an
get
more mobile and he is more hkely to
K
Q—K 3
17. P—K R 3
16.
in order to play
Kt—R 5, which otherwise would be answered
by B—Kt 5.
17
18'.
19.
K—R 2
.
K—R I
Kt—R 5
B xP was threatened.
K R—Kt I
P—B 4
B—K 3
CHESS STRATEGY
P—B 5
20. R—K Kt I
140
B ™ m
m
M
B B W
Wi W Wi ^
fWA
i
i
m^.
*
.„„...,
P
m.
h
\>
Diag. 105.
—K 5 would seem to be
P
for the
better, as
it
opens a diagonal
K B, and a diagonal, too, for the Q B, as White has to
exchange the pawns. Indeed Black would soon have obtained a winning advantage, e.g. 20. .P K 5
21 P X P
,
(Kt—R 2, Q—R 5
Q-R 5
;
—
j
Q—K Kt—K 4), B P x P 22 Kt—R 2,
P—B 4), Kt—K 4,
23 Q-K 2 (P—K Kt 4 or B-Q
threatening Kt
little time,
;
22
2,
—Kt 5 and Kt —Q
;
i,
6.
As it is, White gains a
although Black's position still remains superior.
21.
22.
to prevent P
Q—K 2
P—Kt 4
Q-K 2
P—B3
—Kt 5
23.
R Kt 2
24
25
Kt-Q2
QR-Ki
R—Ki
intending to play
P
—B
Q-B2
3,
thus retarding Black's
P- -K 5,
The
which is still hanging over White like Damocles' sword.
move, however, lets in the Knight.
25
26.
27.
R—R2
P—B 3
Kt—R5
P—B4
P-K5
Now this move is no longer feasible, as White's brilliant
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
sacrifice
demonstrates.
To make
the
141
move
possible
such as
preparations would have been necessary,
B—Q 2—B
:
long
R—Kt
3,
3, etc.
29.
QPxP
KtxKP
30.
31.
QxPch
R (R 2)—K 2
28.
QPxP
PxKt
R—Kts
White
The scene has changed with startling suddenness.
Black's
whilst
forces,
has open files and diagonals for all his
Whatever he plays, Black must lose
pieces are immobihsed.
the piece he has gained.
B-Q3
31
BxB
Q—03
Q-B5
RxR
33.
He cannot play B—Q 4 on account of Q—Q 402.
34.
35.
36.
Kt—B 6 ch
QR—Kych
RxBch
37. Q_Q 6 ch
K—Kt 2
BxR
KxKt
Resigns.
Game No. 6
White
:
Black
Mason.
:
Gunsberg.
Giuoco Piano.
_.
2.
o.
P— K 4
Kt-K B 3
B—B 4
% P_Q 3
I B-K 3
P—K 4
Kt-Q B 3
B—B 4
6.
B-Kt 3
Kt-B 3
Q—K 2
I.
7.
8.
A lost move.
P-B 3
Q Kt-Q 2
P-Q R 4
The logical continuation is Kt—B i—Kt 3
and Castles.
8
9.
P-Q 3
B—QKt 5
B-K 3
BxB
this are doubtful.
Generally speaking, exchanges such as
the B file for
opens
it
although
However, in the present case,
CHESS STRATEGY
142
White, White cannot prevent Black from obtaining the same
advantage.
10.
P—QR3
PxB
Black gives up the move he has gained. There is no justifor this, as nothing prevents him from proceeding
with his development at once with 10. .Castles.
fication
.
11.
12.
PxB
BxKtch
P—Q Kt 4
White is anxious lest his Kt P should be made "backward " by P Q R 4 and P B 4. This is one of the drawbacks of the premature advance of the Q R P.
—
12.
—
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
intention
is
to play
I43
P—Q 4. which, however, Black opposes
at once.
Kt-K 3
22.
Diag. io6.
now White plays P— Q 4, he loses a piece by PxP;
24KtxP?,RxR; 25 K x R, Q—B 3 ch.
If
23.
R—K I
R—
Q i, in order to play
The Rook has no future here, and
P_Q 4, is more logical. But as Black obviously threatens
advisable
to double his Rooks on the K B fUe, it would be
to play for an exchange of Rooks, with
and Kt— K i.
:
Kt—Kt 2, Q R—B i
24. q'r— K 2
R—B 2
Q R—K B I
25.
26.
Q—Kt 4
23
27.
28.
.
Kt-K I
Kt-Q 5
Kt (K3)—Kt 2
BxKt
R— Q 2
KxB
Kt xB is frustrated by Kt—B 6 ch.
28
Q-K6
All the Black forces are now in action,
defence, as his pieces can hardly move.
29.
K—B I
and White has no
Kt—Kt 6
Resigns.
ch
If R—K 2 or B 2, there follows RxR
Kt—Q7ch5 32QxKt, QxQ.
;
31
RxR,
CHESS STRATEGY
144
Game No. 7
White
Black
Marshall.
Tarrasch.
Max Lange Attack.
P—K4
PxP
P—K4
P-Q4
Kt— K B 3
B-QB4
Castles
Kt-Q B 3
B—B4
Kt—B3
Black can avoid the complications of the Max Lange attack
by 5...P Q 3. In that case White cannot recover the pawn,
and in order to develop his Q Kt effectively, would have to
—
play P—B
aiming at rapid development in return, after
But Black can frustrate this plan either
by pushing his pawn to Q 6, so that the Q Kt is barred
from the square B 3, or by playing B K Kt 5 with this
probable continuation 7 Q Kt 3, B x Kt 8 B x P ch, K B i;
9 P X B, Kt B 3, and Black has the better game, for White's
King's side is broken up and his pieces undeveloped, while
Black has prospects of attack on the open
B file.
6. . .P
XP
;
3,
7 Kt X P.
:
—
—
—
;
K
6.
—
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
This is the typical position in the Max Lange
With his ninth
move White threatened to win a
Kt xB and Q—R 5 ch.
145
attack.
piece
by
Black could not parry the threat by
ch.
g,,.Q_Q 3, on account of P xP followed by Kt— K 4—B 6
for Black,
favourable
be
to
appears
diagram
the
in
position
The
development
as all his minor pieces are in play, whilst White's
pawns at
is somewhat restricted by Black's strong
Q B 5
For a long time this opening has not been played
and Q
for White.
in tournaments, being considered unsatisfactory
With the present game, and his new move of 15 B R 6, Mar5.
—
shall has reopened the question as to
whether White's attack
on the K file plus the pawn at K Kt 7 is sufficiently tempting.
10.
11.
Q—B 4
Kt—Q B 3
Q Kt— K 4
Castles
QR
This is imperative. If Black retires the Bishop from his
unsafe position, White permanently prevents Black from
open
castling, which is bound to be fatal in view of the
K
Kt
P—
K 4,
Be— 11...B—Kt 3 12 P xP, R—K Kt i 13
Q_Kt 3 14 Kt xB, P xKt 15 B— Kt 5. R xP 16 Q—B 3
e.g.
;
;
;
;
;
with a violent attack.
12.
KtxQB
White tries to win the exchange in the following way
12P—KKt 4, Q-K 4!; 13 Kt—K B 3, Q—Q 4; 14PXP
followed by Kt—B 6, Black can initiate a promising counter
attack by 14...BXPI!; i5PxR=Q. RxQ; 16 Kt—B 6,
QxKt 17 QxQ, BxQ. In this case White exposes his
King's side by P— K Kt 4 in order to benefit from the unstable
:
If
;
K
B, but unless care is taken, he can
position of the Black
Kt file
easily fall a victim to an attack on the open
K
12
13.
]^ot
PxKt
P—K Kt 4
Q—Q 4, on account of P xP and Kt— B 6.
14.
15.
KR—Kti
PxP
B—R 6
This is Marshall's innovation.
-
Q—K 4
play, as
P— Kt 5 must
It gets the
Bishop out
necessarily follow, yet the
of
pawn at
K
CHESS STRATEGY
146
Kt 7 holds the Black Rook, and there is a permanent threat
B 6 either winning the exchange or, if the Knight is
of Kt
—
taken, giving White a pair of formidable passed pawns.
15
i6.
P—B 3
P-Q6
B— Q 3
This is quite to White's liking, since he wishes to advance
pawns. Black's only chance of escaping disaster
his centre
would be:
B—K 2, with R—Q
2,
Kt—Q i—B 2.
In-
stead of this, his next few moves do not reveal any concerted
plan, and he loses in a surprisingly short time.
17-
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
147
Game No. 8
White
:
Blackbume.
Black
:
Em. Lasker.
Scotch Game.
P—K 4
P—K 4
Kt— Q B 3
Kt—K B 3
PxP
3- P-Q4
B—
KtxP
B4
4.
Q-B 3
5. B-K 3
The threat KtxKt and BxB must be met in some way.
1.
2.
p_Q 3 is not satisfactory, for Black remains with a trebled
pawn after the double exchange. An alternative to the text
move is B— Kt 3. Q—B 3, however, has the advantage of
has no
developing a piece, and although it is the Queen, White
often
as
he
such
off,
same
early opportunity of driving the
game.
the
in
soon
so
obtains when the Queen comes out
6.
p_Q B 3
K Kt— K 2
7. Kt—B 2
In order to develop the Q Kt.
7
P— QKt3!
.
Out of three possible moves, Lasker selects the one which
nothing in
contributes most to development. B— Kt 3 does
Knight
Black
the
that direction, and BxB would bring
development
the
prepares
further into play. The text move
B at Kt 2 with the option of Castles Q R. If White
of the
his Q 4.
exchanges Bishops he gives up the command of
then the
but
result,
same
the
glack's P Q 3 might have had
on the
pawns
of
majority
White
a
exchange would have given
held
have
would
pawns
side
three
Q
whilst White's
K side,
the black Q side pawns, one of the latter
8.
Kt— Q 2
being doubled.
Q— Kt 3
—
The exchange of Bishops allows White to play Kt K 3,
B—K B 4
thus avoiding the weakening move P— K Kt 3. 9
is answered by P
Q4
—
!.
9. BxB
10.
Ti.
12.
Kt—K 3
P—Q Kt 3
B—B 4
PxB
R— Q Kt I
Castles
CHESS STRATEGY
148
To prevent Black's P
—B
4.
At first sight it seems as if the Q B P ought to move to B 4,
But White
as the advance of the Q Kt P has weakened it.
dares not allow a Black Knight to settle at Q 5.
P-Q3
12
13.
P-B4!
m^
m,..^JMa
Wl^
9 t'f3 'S 9
Diag. 108.
K—
—
Black threatens to play
R i in order to play P B 4.
White's position would then be very bad, and therefore he
rightly decides to anticipate the move, even at the cost of a
pawn. In order to gain the Q B P Black must waste a number
of moves with the Q, and White gains time for a King's side
attack.
The pawn sacrifice is very promising indeed.
Q-B3
13-
QxQBP
14. Castles
15-
R-B3
There seem to be many threats here, and the position is a
one to fathom. After disentangling his Queen, Black
tries very hard to force his P
B 4. As soon as he succeeds in
this he has a won game, for the open file is available both for
difficult
—
defence and counter-attack.
K—R I
17. R—Q B I
Q-Q5
BxB
18.
Q-Kt7
15
16.
RxB
B— K3
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Q_B 3
block the
is
K
I49
impossible apart from the fact that it would
5. PxP;
B P, e.g. 18...Q— B 3; 19
P—K
20 Kt— K 4, etc.
19.
R— Q B 2
Q—B 3
Now the attack sho\vn in the last note could be answered
with
Q—R 5.
20.
Kt—Kt 4
P—K Kt 4 could be answered by Kt—Q 5, e.g.
22 R— Kt 3, P—B 4.
21 P— Kt 5, Q— Kt 3
Q—Kt3
20
P—
Kt
B4
R—
21.
3
Q—K 3
22. Kt— K 5
Here
;
23.
KtxKt
24. p_K 5
KtxKt
Kt-Kt 5
!
This prevents the Rook from occupying the Q file which is
about to be opened.
25.
26.
R—B4
Q—R I
PxP
Q—Q 2
with unanswerable
If now QxP, Black plays R—B 2
threats of R— K i or Q
!
i.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Kt—B3
Kt—K 5
RxKBP
Kt—B 4
R—Bi
RxQ
33. P— R 3
34. R-Q3
35.R-Q7
36.
37.
PxP
RxRP
PxP
Q—K 2
QR— Ki
Q—K 8 ch
QxQ
KtxP
P—B 5
Kt-Kt 5
E-^^'
RxP
Kt—Q6
threatens mate in six.
38.
R—R I
Kt—K 8
mate is again threatened.
39.
40.
Kt—Q2
K— Kt I
41. K—R 2
RxPch
R— Kt 6 ch
R—Q 6
!
CHESS STRATEGY
150
RxKt
42.
RxKt ch
RxR
44. R— Q 7
45. RxP
46. RxP
RxR
R— K 6
RxP
P—R3
43-
R—B 6
47.
A few more moves " for fun."
47
K~Kt 2
49. R— R 6
50. R— R4
48.
R— Q B 4
52. K— Kt 3
53- R— B 3
54. K— R 3
55. R— B 4
56. K— R 2
57- R— R 4
58. K— R sq
59- R— Q B 4
60. K— Kt sq
61. R— B 5 ch
62. R—B sq
63. R—R sq
64. R— K sq
65. R—R sq
66. R— R 3 ch
67. R— R sq
51.
Resigns.
K— R2
P— R 4
P— Kt 3
K—R3
R—Kt 7 ch
K— Kt 4
P—R 5 ch
K—R 4
R_Kt 6 ch
P—Kt 4
R—Kt 7 ch
P_R 6
p_Kt 5
P—Kt 6
K— Kt 3
K—B 4
R—Q 7
K—B 5
K— K 6
R—Q 6
K—K7
Game No. 9
White
:
Salwe.
Black
:
Marshall.
Two Knights' Defence
P— K 4
Kt— K B 3
3. B-B 4
1.
2.
4.
Kt-Kt 5
p_K 4
Kt—Q B 3
Kt-B 3
^^^ ^^ tempting, as the B P cannot be pro-
J^^^^^*^^^
tected,
but It IS against that
elementary principle which says
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
151
opening until the
that no attack should be undertaken in the
that Black
course
of
provided
mobihsed,
minor pieces are
likelihood
every
is
There
moves.
opening
sound
also has made
lead to nothmg.
that the attack in the present instance will
reply, but now
correct
the
find
to
years
It has taken many
disappeared
practically
has
opening
the
that it is known,
text. White
the
in
move
of
the
Instead
practice.
from master
to a
unavoidably
almost
leading
can play either
Q 3.
might
which
Castles
or
piano,
Giuoco
the
of
variation
drawing
P—
bring about the Max Lange attack after 4.
.
.B—B 4
;
5
P— Q 4'
PxP.
P-Q4
4
Kt—Q R 4
PxP
5.
!
The
This is a typical position in the Two Knights' defence.
as
abandoned,
former continuation 5...Kt xQ P has long been
KxKt
P,
KtxB
the attack that White can initiate by 6
3, is dangerous,
3 ch, forcing the Black King to
7
the text breaks
in
the result is uncertain. The move
j
K
Q_B
though
the attack from the very first, and Black
ii,'i
Jm.k
mm
gets the advantage
'^m
mm
W3.
'm.
"W'iW S s B
Diag. 109.
two minor pieces which
as he can gain time by attacking the
and in addition obtain a
it should be noted, are unsupported,
speedy development, worth more than the
for it.
6
P-Q3
pawn
given up
;
CHESS STRATEGY
152
B— Kt 5 ch is an alternative. The advantage is Black's
also—5.^. P—B 3; yPxP, PxPj 8 B— K 2,
P—K R 3 9 Kt—K B 3, P— K 5 10 Kt—K 5, Q—B 2
11 P— Q 4, B—Q 3 (or PxP e.p. foUowed by B—Q 3);
12 P— K B 4. PxP e.p. 13 Kt xP, Kt— Kt 5 or 11 P— B 4,
B—Q 3; 12 P—Q 4, PxP e.p.\ 13 KtxP, Castles. Black
in this case
;
I
\
has an easy game and open lines.
6
7.
Kt— K B 3
8.
Q— K2
9.
PxKt
K Kt—Q 2
10.
P—KR3
P— K 5
KtxB
B— QB4
The Knight must move sooner or later.
10
11.
12.
Castles
Kt—Kt 3
Q—B I
B—K Kt 5
A sorry retreat, but the plausible Q — Q 2 would be disasP— K 6 13 P xP, Kt—K 5 and Q—R 5 ch
trous, e.g.
!
;
B—Kt5ch
12
Black's superior development begins to tell in no uncertain
Now White can neither play 13 B —Q 2 on account of
B X B ch 14 Q Kt X B, R— K i, followed by P— K 6, nor 13 Kt
B 3 on account of B x Kt 14 P x B, P—B 3 regaining the pa\vn
fashion.
;
;
and maintaining positional advantage. White has therefore
no alternative but
B 3, which weakens his Q 3, where a
Black Knight soon settles down.
P—
P—B 3
P—K R 3
15. P— Kt 4
13.
14.
B— K 2
B—R 4
B— Kt 3
At last White can castle. He can, of course, only castle
on the Queen's side, because his King's side pawns are shattered.
Now games in which the Kings castle on different wings are
more or less beyond calculation, as pointed out before. On
the whole, the player who first attacks wins. But experience
has shown that the Queen's side is more difficult to defend
on account of its greater expanse, and this theory is supported by the present game. In addition, White's develop-
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
ment is not completed yet, whilst
all
ready to strike.
i6.
153
the Black forces are
Kt-Q2
Kt—K 4
B-K3
17. Q Kt— Q 2
P-Kt 4
18. Castles
is pecuUar to this kind
Storming the position with pawns
opposmg paxvn
The intention is to break up the
of game.
are cheap
Pawns
Rooks.
position, and to open files for the
m
such cases.
matter, and
that
Open lines for the pieces are the thmgs
open
more
the
left,
are
the fewer pawns there
lines are available for the attack.
IQ.
Kt— Q6ch
PxP
QxP
K— Kti
21. K—R I
20.
White wishes to
The King was not safe on the diagonal.
4-B 5, and so on) But
push on his King's side pawns (P-B
check by the
there would be a fatal discovered
after P
xP e.p.
Black Knight.
QxP
22
marked. He has
Black's advantage becomes more
on both sides he
attacks
covered his pawn, and for the ensuing
re-
•is
better placed, having already two
22.
P-KB4
23.
QR-Kti
24.
Kt— Q 4
open files for his Rooks.
£-954
P-^?4
Q—I^ 5
1
»aMmrm^mm
^g g|
mi
m.
* 8
:W Ml A ill
mi.
m,
WM
m mwM,
MM.
m.
Diag. no.
,
CHESS STRATEGY
154
The position liristles with chances for daring sacrifices.
After 25 KtxB P, for instance, Black could play
!;
26 P X R,
Kt 5 ; 27 P X Kt, P X P ; 28
3 (Q—B 4 ch ?
RxKt
P—R
Kt—
B—B
2),
B—B 3; 29 K— R 2, QxP ch
mate.
25.
P-Kt 3
;
30 PxQ,
RxP
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
155
Kt—B3
B—B4
Castles
VM^/^Z/t,
_jt«v
W^^
WM.3::m^m
M^
^®
„.„„«,mm.
J
//»' ^
T
.
I
w.
Diag. III.
The idea underlying this pawn
sacrifice is to open the
K
file
Black
that, with correct play.
or the Rook. It will be seen
wmnmg
though
White,
and
Manages to castle just in time,
The opening
position.
back his pa^vn. has no advantage
m
is
seldom played by modem masters.
the
White can hardly defend
Instead of the move in the text.
captures the pawn
simply
Black
with Kt-B 3. as
K P
with a satisfactory position
and recovers his piece by P-Q 4,
reply
Black if White plays 6 B xP ch m
It is even better for
more imcapture of White's K P is far
to ^
KtxP.
The
B P, particularly as the
portant than that of the Black
dangerous on the diagonal
White Bishop, which could be
l^t><is.t,
Kt 8. is exchanged, e.g. 6...KxB; 7
O
3.
Black continues
Kt I
4 8 Kt—Kt 5 ch,
open lines for Rooks and Bishops.
K
R 2-K
K—
P_0
has
K—R 2 R—B I and
•
P-K R
!
KtxP
4-
B-B
Then he must
4Black can. of course, develop his
attack (5
Q 4- \^^\^
either submit to the Max Lange
case he loses the
giving up the useful B, in which
P—
play B xP,
pawn gained after 6 KtxB,
8PxP, PxP; 9 B— K
5.
KtxKt
^-^ ^ 4. P-Q 3
Q—B 3.
7
Kt 5, and eventually
P-Q 4
;
^
CHESS STRATEGY
156
R— K I at once would lead to nothing.
5
6.
R— K I
7.
8.
BxP!
Kt—B 3
PxP
P— Q 4
QxB
PA^#8J
^^^
^ ^ WM^W^,
^^
W mwrnkWA
wm,
^
w^i
§
m^ms.
teg ij^^
iijcj
Diag. 112.
This attack has been analysed extensively
by Steinitz.
Hie only square where the Queen cannot be
attacked at
once by the minor pieces is at
Q i. After 8...Q— Q i,
Black
obtains
quite a satisfactory
P—B
game: 9
RxKt ch, B—K 2-
10 KtxP,
This is Pillsbury's move, intending to
4.
displace the Rook.
Black has then open Hnes for his two
Bishops as compensation for his shattered
pawn position
.^^'^^^'' ^^ KtxKt, QxQ ch;
13 KtxQ,
?
^7^x?
PxKt.
Now
not easy to find a reasonable plan
4'
It
IS
for
White, as Black threatens to cramp White's
and
P—
game with B— Q 3
is therefore necessary for
B 5.
White to take
measures against that by playing
B 4 and
B 4 If
Black stiU plays
3.
4 foUows, with the intention
of exchanging and of provoking
Black's
4, which leaves
It
B-Q
theQP "backward."
^-
••
9.
KtxKt
10.
11.
13-
14.
B— Kt 5
BxB
QxP
Q R~Q I
B-B
R—
B—
P-B
Q— KR4
B—K2
B— K 3
KtxB
Castles
KR
i57
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Now mite is
aW ^^^l^^^^^Z''%','^t:\^l^^l
nvi. ^o.
n^ Oueen better piacea.
nlav ana
and his
m play
^^
vvmi-c
r\^Ti
play QxR.
^^
>
r ly
^
y L as
attacked by
he
ue
-Knight
away by the Black Kni^m,
rv. fhP Oneen being driven
\-n
VcJ
R—
pawns.
Blacli Queen's side
Kt—B 3
Ti
P-QKt 3
P-Q ^ 4
S: Qxl
19.
0-K 5
weataiess
Tt
is
created
createa
watch how this very slight
h.mmto
advance ot his P-wns brings
^^^^ ^^ j^,^ q g_ ^hich s
instructive to
hy
oy Ha I's
n'tger gua^ed by the Black Q B P.
and paralyses the whde
j-uc
JS^mg s me.
the possession of the
bj
e
a
gets
^-phf
ann^t move'until the King
move often affords an entry
we have seen, such a pawn
tinn
is
^^^^
As
to the opposing pieces.
20.
W
P-K B 4
B—^ ^
P-Q Kt 3 ^^^ Q"^^ ^'
K 3 is to go to Kt 2 so
hold up a
B
3 may also
STt the threat of mate after Q-Q
Not BxP
?he
because of
which cannot remain at
of course,
White piece.
21
B—Kt2
Q-Q 3
P—B 3f
p—B5
fa.Q-K^y
23.
R—K 2
Compulsory, as otherwise
P-B 6 forces the Kt P ^
Totl^hS rp'a^l^^IySrg
XerPxP there
24.
25.
is
—e^
to^RrOnL^^h: hand,
Kt^R 5-B 6, and Black is m a mating net.
Kt-K4
Kt-Q 6
Q-Q 4
B—B 3
CHESS STRATEGY
158
The threat was Q x R ch and
26.
R— K 8 mate.
P—K R 3
in order to retreat to R 2 in case of
Q—Q 8 ch. In way
P—K R 3 creates a certain weakness, as the square ata Kt
now defenceless, but Black has no pieces with which 3
to
take advantage of it
his Rook cannot move, his Bishop
is
on the White squares. If Black had a K B instead,
the move
is
:
would be very doubtful, because then Black might
through White's K Kt 3.
break in
P—B5
26
White's threat was to repel the Black Queen by
P—B 4
and to mate in five moves, beginning with
K 6 ch.
27.
Q—
P_K R 3
P—B 3
m
»«....^^....S
mi
wm.
mmt,
l4%5^
vy/>97y^.
^^P
v^yj^
^^^^P
Wi
WW'
^^^^
^
^.^
Diag. 113.
This disposes of the winning of the Queen by the threatened
mate. But it creates a weakness at Black's Kt
which
3,
White exploits in grand style.
He decides to play the
King himself to Kt 6, threatening mate at Kt 7. In spite
of several raids by the Black Queen, this quaint device is
crowned with success. The weakness created by P K R
—
could not be demonstrated more drastically.
K— R2
K— Kt 3
30. K— R4
28.
29.
P-Q Kt 4
P-QR4
P-Kt 3
3
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
If
White were to play
PxP now. Black would mate him
one move earlier (Q-Kt 4)first, and Black is helpless.
Of course he parries the threat
QxKtP
Q-B 7
R-K3
31.
R-Kt 3
32.
I59
K—Kt 4 on
P—Kt 4 eh White could not play 33
would play
He
6.
B-B
account of the pretty mate by
K-R 5-Kt 6.
After
PxP
R-Kt 4
35. K—R 5
g-S^^l!
Q-Bych
33.
34.
Resigns.
superior position
A most instructive game, showing how the by reducmg the
indirectly to a win
of the pieces can lead
impotence and compelling him
opponent's pieces gradually to
decisive
affording opportunities for a
to move pawns, thereby
entry.
Game No. ii
White
Schlechter.
:
Black
:
Janowski.
Ruy Lopez (compare p. 40).
1.
P—K 4^
P—K 4
Kt-K B 3
3. B-Kt 5
2.
4. Castles
A continuation, which has lately
Kt-Q B 3
Kt—B 3
KtxP
gained in favour, is
:
P-Q 3
B—K 2 (see p. 39)-
and
5.
B-K2
P-Q 4
for an
dangerous to gratify White's wish
The move may be playable in the
open me by playing PxP.
"Riga variation" see Game
system of defence called the
advantageous to be able to close
No i^) Here it would be
-^^tter when intendmg to p ay
It is clearly very
fhe'
K B's diagonal.
" Riga variation "
the
third move.
It
to have played
P—Q R 3 on tne
i6o
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
i6i
which the Bishop gets to Kt 2 with a threat of mate, and the
Q R is free.
i6.
17.
B-B I
Q-Q Kt 4
Kt— K 4
a
Fine play. If Black captures the pawn, White obtains
only
can
Black
which
to
Kt,
and
combined attack with Q, R,
oppose the Q, so that the result cannot be in doubt— ^.g.
ch
Q B 4.
P 18 Kt—B 5.
Q3 19
17...OXK
Q—
Q—
R—K 8 ch, K—R 2
P—K R 3
P_Kt 3 (Q— Kt 3?;
Kt— Q 3 and R— K 7.
20 RxR,
;
17
18.
19.
20.
21
23
Kt—B 5
R—K 3
Q-Q 4
21. P— Q B 4
preventing R
RxR
Q—K 4 ch,
;
;
;
;
22
QxQ, followed by KtxP);
23
Q-K2
R— Kt 3
P— Q R 4
R-Kt I
— Kt 4
21
22.
P— Q Kt 3
R— Q I
R— Kt 3
25. RxR
23.
24.
P—K3
Q— Kt 4
Q—B 4
PxR
K— R 2
Black has built a wall of pawns round his King, but it
does not avail against the superior forces which White can
concentrate.
He will advance his pawns, and
White's plan is clear.
the Black King, always taking
surround
break up those that
his Queen's side meanwhile.
free
not
care that Black does
and Black is forced to
easily,
in
break
then
His pieces will
look on passively.
26.
27.
P— K R 3
P-Q R 4
R—R I
to prevent the sacrifice of a pawn by
bring the Black Rook into play.
27
28.
29.
R-Q 3
K—R 2
P—R 5. which would
R— Kt I
Q— Kt 4
Q— K 2
!
CHESS STRATEGY
l62
30.
31.
P— B4
P—K 6
Q-B2
!
^
...
W3.
111
J
WW/
*
pi
J
'•yy/^z:.
^'-rv'-
121
m
Diag. 115.
A
beautiful
move which robs Black of his last chance of
freeing his Queen's side,
which he might have accompUshed
by the pawn sacrifice of P
—Q
3132.
3.
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
163
Game No. 12
White
Black Rubinstein.
Teichmann.
Ruy Lopez (see p. 37).
:
:
P—K 4
Kt-Q B 3
P— Q R 3
P_K 4
Kt-K B 3
B—Kt 5
B—R4
By exchanging the Bishop White could not prove P— Q
R3
with the Q P, obtains
to be a lost move, for Black, by retaking
to an easy developaddition
open lines for Q and Q B, and in
agamst a certain
set-off
is
a
ment, retains two Bishops. This
the fact
found
be
may
weakness in Black's game, which
on
three
to
pawns
four
has
PxP, White
m
P—
that after
Q 4,
on the Queen's side are
the King's side, while his three pawns
one of which is
pawns,
opposing
able to hold the four
in the end-game,
tell
only
can
doubled. But this weakness
and to which
purposes,
practical
for
which is too far ahead
of play will
line
usual
the
of
example
An
it may not come at aU.
be found in Game No. 18.
Kt—B3
B— K2
P—O Kt 4
Castles
R—Ki
B—Kt3
P-Q3
P—B3
r-
/c.
t^^/'^ii
//
> •
1
Diag. 116.
Castles
CHESS STRATEGY
i64
In Capablanca's opinion Black should not castle before
White's intentions in the centre have been made clear. It
makes a great difference whether White plays his Q P to Q 4 or
to
Q 3 only.
Kt— R
P—
B—
B 2,
B 4 White plays:
4 9
further to Q 5 as
pawn
move
his
is
to
intention
10 P Q 4, his
soon as Black has castled, and then to attack on the King's
If after 8...Q
;
—
P—
K Kt 4 and Kt— B 5.
wing with Q Kt— Q 2— B i— K 3,
For this reason Black should force White to disclose whether he
intends to exchange his Q P or to advance it to Q 5. In the
latter case Black can refrain from castling altogether and
counter-attack on the King's wing, e.g., 10 P Q 4, Q B 2
—
—
;
now 13
P— K R 3, B— Q 2 12 Q Kt— Q 2, R— QB i
P— Q 5 then P— R 3 followed by P—Kt 4— Kt 5 gives Black
11
;
;
if
:
many chances. If on the contrary 13 P x P, then Black need
no longer fear an attack on the King's side after he has castled,
as his Rooks will have a favourable opportunity for operating
However, there is still the dison the open Queen's file.
advantage for Black of having advanced Queen's side pawns,
which are liable to attack (P Q R 4).
—
The game takes a different course when Black exchanges
the pawns in the centre. The continuation would then be
:
II
,
P X P
;
Kt-B 3
14 P
;
12
Q Kt-Q 2, B— Q 2
X P, P X P
;
15
13
;
Kt-B i,
B— Kt 5, Q-Kt 3.
difficult to decide which side has the advantage.
It is
Black has an
extra pawn, but White has the initiative.
If in Diag. 116, after 8... Castles White plays 9 P
Q 4 at
once, Black has an opportunity for the following interesting
attack
Kt 5
10
11
9
3, Kt x K P
Q 4,
2
12 B X K Kt,
2,
13
5.
4
5 ;
K R 3,
16 Kt x Q,
14
15
5, B x Q
4
B X B 17 Kt X R,
X Kt. White cannot take advantage
of his Rooks, as there is no open file, whilst Black threatens to
initiate a strong attack with P
B 4.
Aljechin has analysed a variation of this line of play, which
he thinks leads finally to White's advantage
12 P X P,
Kt— Kt 4 13 B X Kt, B X B ; 14
R 3, B x Kt ; 15
B 8
Q X B, Kt X P 16 R X Kt, P X R 17 B x R,
18 Kt R 3, Q Q 7. I doubt that White can win this game.
—
P—
B—
B-Q Q-Q
P—
B-R
:
;
;
B—K
;
P-Q
Kt—K
;
;
B-B
P-K
;
R
;
—
:
P— K
;
—
;
—
9-
;
B—
;
P-Q 3
In this less aggressive continuation, in which nothing
is
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
immediately
165
attempted against Black's centre, White prepares
gradually for
with
a King's side attack, as in this game
for
time
obtain
But Black should
Kt 3.
Kt— Q 2—B I—
operations in the centre.
Kt-QR4
P—B 4
9
B—B 2
11. Q Kt— Q 2
12. P— Q R 4
10.
Kt—B 3
advance is always
In many vanations of the Ruy Lopez,
pawn, because the
good if Black cannot avoid exchanging the
difficulty,
White Queen's Rook, which only gets into play with
In
any case
file.
can either be exchanged or hold the Rook's
If, as
end-game.
the
the Black Knight's pawn is weak for
useless
is
play P-Kt 5.
4
in the present game. Black can
this
P-R
and even doubtful, as the Rook's pawn
weak in the end-game.
itself
may become
B— Kt 2
12
Ruy Lope:^ the
This causes the loss of the game. In the
B i— R 6,
Bishop is nearly always needed on the diagonal Q
B 5, which
at White's
to prevent a Knight from settling
Kt
3. a most
otherwise cannot be repelled except by
would
continuation
undesirable consummation. The proper
the
capturing
2 and
4,
3,
have been P-Kt 5,
game.
next
the
Queen's file. Compare note to move 13
K
P-K
P-Q
m
Q— B 2
P—Kt 3
B-K Q-B
13.
14.
Kt—B I
Kt— Kt 3
mm ZwM
'
'WM
W^A
mm, ,^mm:^^m.
IS
mi
Pi S
mm^^m
f^
Diag. 117
W
V^T^//a
K
CHESS STRATEGY
i66
Here is the weakness.
White first provides against Black's
—
P Q 4, and then starts a sharp attack on the King's side.
15.
P
—
Q R-Q I
B x Kt.
B-Kt 5
Q 4 at once is not feasible, because of
16.
17.
PxP
Q-B I
PxP
This brings the Q away from her file, which Black could now
—Q
secure by P
4, followed by
P x P.
KR—Ki
17
The proper continuation is the one outlined in the note above.
18.
P—R 3
White has now ample leisure to prepare the advance of
his
K B P.
R—Ri
RxR
B—Q B I
18
RxR
Kt—R 2
21. P— K B 4
22. P— B5
23. QxB
19.
20.
Kt—K I
BxB
Q—K2
Black seeks salvation in exchanges, which White, of course,
having good prospects of driving home his
attack.
His pieces are concentrated on the King's side, whilst
the Black forces are scattered, and unable to get back in time
for the defence.
Moreover, it is likely that the weakness at
Black's K R 3 and K B 3 will prove fatal as the Black K B is
exchanged.
tries to avoid,
24.
25.
26.
Q—R 6
Q—B I
R—B I
Q—B I
Q— Kt 2
P—Kt 4
White was threatening to play Kt
Kt— R 6.
27.
28.
Kt—Kt 4
KtxKt ch
—Kt 4 with PxP and
Kt—B 3
QxKt
One of the attacking Knights is eliminated.
another, which forces the entry at
29.
P—R 4
But there is
K B 6 and K Kt 6.
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
167
K R
Q-Q
If
Blrxk
6.
Queen at
to gain access for the White
6,
^
'
5.
:
30
3\
captures there follows
example of the wealiinstructive
an
6
ch,
B
-B I ; 32
Kt-R
Q-R
Kt—
Q—
ness created by P
—K Kt
3.
P—R3
Q-Q I
29
30. Kt—R 5
31. P—B 6
All this is easy to understand.
K—R2
B—Kt5
K— Kt3
3132-
PxP
33- Kt— Kt 7
3435.
36.
B-Qi
Q-Q 2
Kt—B5
PxBch
Resigns.
BxKt
K—
PxP;
R 2 37 ^—^5.
The conclusion might be:
40 Q-R 4
B-Kt
6 ch, PxB
I
Kt
39
R_K
QxP,
38
;
;
;
mate.
Game No. 13
Wliite
:
Black
Teichmann.
(see
Lopez
p. 37).
Ruy
Move 1-8 as in Game No. 12.
Diag. 118.
:
Schlechter.
,
CHESS STRATEGY
168
10.
P— Q 3
B— B 2
11.
Q Kt-Q 2
9-
Kt—Q R 4
P—B 4
Q-B 2
K P, this is not a lost move,
Supporting, as it does, the
although White has not played
P—Q 4. It prepares Black's
P—Q 4 (after Kt—B 3), the K P being fully protected against
White's double attack by P x P.
12.
13.
Kt—B I
Kt—K 3
Kt—B 3
B—Kt 2
—K
The logical move would have been B
P—Q 4.
3,
to enforce
Black is then very well developed, whilst White
labours under a somewhat undeveloped Queen's side.
An
attempt to exert pressure in the centre with
4 in order
Q
to prevent Black's
Q 4 would be belated. Black would
gain the advantage by: 14...K PxP; 15 PxP,
PxP* 16
P—
P—
Kt X P, Kt X Kt
17 Q X Kt, Kt— Kt 5
Nor would B— Kt
Kt—K 3 be more successful after B— K 3 14 Kt—K 35
QR— Q i; i5P_Q4, BPxP; 16 PxP, PxP; i7KtxP,'
;
!
before
;
;
Q—
Kt X Kt 18 Q X Kt,
B 4, Black has the better chances in
the end-game. The move in the text is not good because,
;
as we saw before, the Bishop is wanted on the other
to cover the square at
14.
15.
K B 4.
Kt—B 5
diagonal
K R—K I
Kt— Q 2
B— Kt 5
Even now it was desirable to aim at P— 4, therefore R— Q i
Q
Q
was preferable.
16.
B— Kt 3
Tlie position of the White pieces points to a dangerous
menace
to the opposing King's side.
Kt—Bi
16.
17.
B-Q 5
!
I
The beginning of a brilliant combination.
and Black must first cover his B at K 2.
B x Kt is threatened
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
17
18.
Kt— Kt 3
-'
KKtxB
BxB
Q Kt xB is not feasible, because of B xB and
KxB
19. BxPch!!
20.
169
Kt x Q P.
Kt—Kt 5 ch
Diag. 119.
are hidden in
Quite a number of charming combinations
If
P
KtxKt
then
21
i.
Kt
or
If
3
this position.
B 3 White can captuie the P first with check.
K-Kt
!
R
K—
20
21.
K—Kt 1
Q—R 5
22.
QxRPch
23.
QxKt ch
24.
Q—Kt 6
!
KtxKt
K—B I
K— Kt I
!
P—
Kt 3. which would allow
This prevents
Now nothing
at Kt 2.
defence
Black to bring up his Q for the
3—
K
B 3 or R 3.
can be done against the threatening
The
point.
R—
24
25.
Q—Q2
R-K 3
Resigns.
A wonderful game in which Teichmann, the great
judge of
master in hand-to-hand
position, proves himself also a
combinations.
sacrificial
of
chaos
ing, in the wild
fight-
CHESS STRATEGY
170
Game No. 14
White
:
Black
Spielmann.
:
Tarrasch.
Ruy Lopez (see p. 41).
P— K4
Kt— K B
B— Kt 5
B—R4
Castles
P-Q4
P— K4
Kt-Q B 3
P-QR3
Kt—B3
KtxP
4 ill i
i ill i
*
l"^."
11
i
»
g ^'
Wk^m^m
m..^^,:mm
Diag. 120.
PxP
In a game between Riga and Berlin
was tried for
the first time, a bold venture which anticipates White's desire
to open the King's
file.
After 7
R—K i Black can defend
the Kt by
P—Q 4, but after 8 KtxP White threatens again
to win the
Kt by P
—K B
3,
besides attacking the
Q Kt a
second time.
However, Black has a surprising answer in
readiness.
He initiates a violent counter attack which keeps
White busy until Black, by castling, escapes the dangers
of the double pin.
(Compare Game No. 17.)
6
B-Kt 3
8. P-Q R 4
7.
P—QKt4
P-Q 4
This gives Black an opportunity of disposing of his Q Kt
by exchanging it, thereby enabling him to round ofi his pawn
position by P Q B 4, at the same time threatening to cut off
—
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
171
P-B
followed by
3 is the
8
5the Bishop by
book
this
of
part
the first
natural continuation, as shown in
useful
a
on
operate
can
because the Bishop, retreating to B 2,
PxP
P-B
^^^g°^^^-
QKtxPl
8
an
O R—Kt I would not be so good, because White obtains
absolutely
The move in the text is an
open file for his Rook.
Schlechter in his match agamst
valid defence, as was proved by
_
Lasker.
^^.
PxKt
KtxKt
10. Kt—B 3
P xP and P—B 3 seems a more natural continuation.
KtxKt
10
9.
Not P xKt, on account of B xP.
P—QB4
B—K2
PxKt
11.
RPxP
12.
in order to castle in reply to
B—R 4.
Q-B 3
13.
Here White should have got back his second
pawn by P X Q P.
^^P, BxP,
4> Castles; 15
If then 13.. .P-B 5: 14
or i5.
his
for
retreat
a
Q B 3, providing
White plays
impossible,
becomes
manoeuvre
After the move in the text this
B 3 can be attacked twice but has
because the B after
lost the support of the Queen.
B-R
R
P—
P—
13
B—K3
14.
Castles
RxP
15. PxP
16. B—R 2
P-B 5
Now the Bishop is hemmed in permanently
;
in other words.
B—
R4
Black is a piece up and must win easily.
rate three pawns for
any
at
get
to
order
in
compulsory
was
Therefore 16
the piece, thus
:
16...B-Q2; 17QXP. RxR; i8PxR.
BxB; 19QXP.
16
17.
18.
19.
PxR
B—Kt I
Q-Kt 3
RxR
0—R4
P—B 6
CHESS STRATEGY
172
White tries to work up an attack on the King's side while
Black is still occupied on the other wing.
19
20.
21.
22.
R—Bi
B— KB4
P— B 4
R— K I
K—R I
In order to answer
B-B3
BxQ P by 23 B— K 3 and P—R 7,
22. . .Q X P is not feasible because of
P— R ^
22
R— Kt^i
QxP
Q-R8
P—R 3
24. B— K3
25- R-Q I
26. Q— K I
23.
1^^
Q x P.
wm
'mm X. WM>
m%
_^HiflBIMWA
Diag. 121.
The sequel forms an
instructive example of how superior
development can afford winning chances even when there is
no immediate prospect of material gain. The opposing pieces
are gradually constricted until the defending lines are weakened by compulsory pawn moves. In the present position
Black quietly sets to work to bring his Bishops to bear on the
White King.
26
27.
28.
K—R 2
Q—B I
B— K5
B— K 2
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
to free his game somewhat
with
P-B 5. which Black prevents
^tonce.
^g
I73
p__g^
^^^
B—R 5
29. R_k I
Black makes a few tek^^^^^^^
Being probably short of time,
openmg of the K Kt file but
the
If his aim was not
moves
Queen, he might have played
the subsequent sacrifice of the
Q__Kt 7 at once, followed by Q— Kt 4.
B—K 2
P—Kt 3
00.
B-Q 3
B-B 2
R-B I
^i.
^2.
34.
35.
36.
R_K I
R-B I
R-K I
Q-K 2
37.
R-Kt 1
^o
K— R 2
R—Kt 3
B-R6
Q-Kt 7
R-Kt 5
R-Kt 3
upon a counter attack, be<
Otherwise White might embark
is impossible on account
this
ginning with P—Kt 4. Now
of
R-Kt 3.
38.
39-
Q—Kt 4
R—K I
Q-R 5
Black would win easily by
After the exchange of Queens,
X Q,
40
2 also fails on account of Q X Q
^Q
7
the
and
P
B
x
5.
6
42
3,
41
7
proWhite
move
text
the
passed pawn costs a Rook. With
at Kt 8, apparently not seeing
Queen
the
of
sacrifice
the
vokes
disposal on the forty-first move.
the fine continuation at Black's
R_Kt
R_Kt
B—R
;
B-Kt
39
40.
41.
Compulsory.
;
B-Q
!
;
R
R-K
QxBl
RxR
RxQ
P—Kt 4
B—Kt i would be followed by R— Q B
8, etc.
B-B 8!!
41
Resigns.
Q-R
P-Kt 3 43
4. B xP ch
There might follow 42 K-Kt 3,
4I.-.B—
Q 3 would have
P—Kt 4 ch, and so on.
44
would still have
game
his
though
given White a little respite,
)
KxB
been hopeless after P xP and
R— K
8.
;
CHESS STRATEGY
174
Game No. 15
White
:
Black
Aljechin.
:
Niemzowitsch.
Ruy Lopez (see p. 41).
P—K4
Kt— KB
3- B— Kt5
4- B— R4
5. Castles
6. P-Q4
7- B— Kt3
8. PxP
9- P— B3
P— K4
Kt-Q B 3
P-QR3
I.
2.
10.
Kt—B3
KtxP
P-Q Kt 4
P-Q4
B— K3
B— K2
R— K I
a
^^^ s^ ^^
mm.
1
*»*
^;;,
aw pa - i*r/^
Diag. 122.
is one of the most important positions in
the Ruy
Black has the better development, but his centre is
less secure.
Whilst White has a pawn secured in the centre.
Black has a Knight there which will soon be driven away!
This
Lopez.
Q 4, the basis of his centre, is entirely in his hands,
while Black's Q 4 is exposed to a steady pressure by the White
pieces.
Finally Black's Q Kt is unfavourably placed, obstructing as it does the Q B P and preventing it from falling
WTiite's
into line with its fellows.
In Petrograd, 1909, Lasker tried the
i75
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Kt—B 4 followed by B—Kt 5. giving
following new defence
:
pressure on
up the moves gained before in order to relieve the
ultimately at Q 5.
the Black Q P and to exchange the same
have been disposition
the
The various possibilities of
added that
cussed in connection with Diag. 22. It may be
move than
better
a
surely
is
2
Q
after 10... Castles
Q Kt—
developed
be
should
side
Queen's
the
as
the usual
Q 4,
Kt X B,
?
12
2
(11...Q—
Q
attack
an
before undertaking
thought that
followed by R X Kt). For a long time it was
which enables
after Kt— Q 4 Black had to exchange Knights,
"
"
3.
White to make the pawn at Q B 7 backward by
Kt
his
guard
3 to
For Black must first play
However, a
4B 3 and
against the threat of
move was
Kt's
the
sensational innovation which refutes
sacrifice
following
is
the
introduced in Breslau in 1912. It
12
P
B 3,
Q3
11 Kt— Q 4, Kt
10... Castles
Q 2,
Kt 5
5 with an over14
13 PxKt,
powering attack.
;
Kt—
;
B—K
P—
P— K R
P—K R
:
xK
;
B—
10
!
!
!
;
'•
I
Kt—B4
11.
B—B 2
B—Kt 5
12.
Q Kt— Q 2
Castles
13.
'•
Q— R
Q—
;
B—
P—
Kt—Kt 3
Kt—K 5
Here Lasker played Kt— K 3 against Janowski (Paris,
Q 3 dis1912), but it proved to be inferior, because 14
Q—
organises Black's King's side forcibly.
The move in the text is not really a pawn sacrifice. After
16
Q 4, Kt x Kt
i4BxKt,PxB;
isQxQ.QRxQ;
—Q
17 KtxKt, R
4,
K Kt—
White cannot play 18 RxP, because of
P_Q B 4 19 Kt—B 2, B—B 4 or 19 Kt—B 3, R—Q 8 ch
22 R—K 3,
21 R— K 2, B—Q 6
20 Kt— K I, B—B 4
;
;
;
B—Kt4.
14.
P—B4
KtxP(B3)
Kt—K 5 ?
CHESS STRATEGY
176
This loses the Q B P, and weakens the Q P.
Black might have
would then have been
P—B 3 after moving the Kt
away. If Black was anxious to preserve his two Bishops he
would even have risked P— Kt 3. After 17
R 6,
B 2,
the Bishop could have been driven away again by the
K Kt
from Kt I or Kt 5. The open file offered some compensation
and chances of counter attack.
BxKt
B—
17 QxB,
Q 3.
possible to support the Q P by
tried
;
It
B—
17.
BxP
R—
Q-Q2
Not QxB because of Q x P ch.
18.
Kt— K5
BxKt
KtxKt
B— R5
bad because of 20 R x Kt, B— K B
4
20. B— Kt3
BxB
21. RPxB
B— B4
19.
R X P is
;
21
Q— Kt 3.
Now R X P was feasible with a level game after 22 R x Kt,
B—B 4 23 K X R, B X R 24 Q any, Q—B 4 ch, followed by
BxB. After missing this chance, Black soon loses the game.
!
:
!
;
22.
23-
24.
Q—Q 4
Q R— Q I
Kt— Q2
K R— Q I
Q— Q B 2
KtxKBP
A last and desperate attempt. Black obtains Rook and
pawn against two minor pieces, but has no time to initiate an
attack with the Rooks. The wisest plan was to give
up the
P, with a view to effecting the exchange of the
minor pieces,
because an ending with Queen and Rooks generally
produces
a draw. Black could not play Kt xKt P instead of
the move
in the text because of 25 B
Kt 3 !.
—
25.
KtxR
QxKtP
K—Ri
QR-Bi
Q-R5
R-B3
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
White now obtains a passed pawn, and a
Q-B3
33- PxQ
R_52
oA PxPv^
36.
8^8,
P-Kt3
R-Kt3
R—KtSch
P-Q R 4
K—B 2
\n.
R-Q B 8
K— Kt 2
RxB
RxP
K-R 3
R-B 5
^i P_B 5
p_B 6
39
40.
41.
42.
B—B4!
RxR
R—Q 7 ch
K-Kt 3
Kt-B 2
43.
44.
Mate was threatened by:
46
R-Q 5 ch, P-Kt 4
speedy win.
Q— R 4
Q—B 2
3132.
I77
47
;
K-Kt 4
K—R 4;
45 Kt— Kt 4 ch,
R-Q 6 and R-R 6 mate (or
RxKt ch, PxRmate).
K-B
R-Q 5 ch
RxP
4546.
3
Resigns
Game No. 16
White
:
Black
Yates.
:
Gunsberg.
Ruy Lopez.
1.
P— K 4
P__K 4
Kt— K B 3
3. B-Kt 5
2.
4. B-R 4
5.
g.
7.
Castles
p__o 4
B—Kt 3
PxP
9. P-Q B 3
10. B— K 3
8.
in order to exchange the
P-Q R 3
Kt-B 3
KtxP
B-Q Kt 4
P—Q 4
B—K3
B-K 2
Black Knight if played to B 4.
Castles
jQ
ii!
Kt— Q B 3
Q Kt-Q 2
^
if
CHESS STRATEGY
178
If
Q—Q 3. then Kt— R 4
;
12 Q
Kt—Q 2, P— Q B 4.
KtxKt
II
This furthers White's development, and should not be
played unless there is no other move available. To be con-
P—
B— K
B 4 and
Kt 5. An argument against
that White can deprive Black's weak centre pawn
of one protecting piece (12
e.p., Kt
(B
13
sidered are
P—B 4
is
PxP
Kt
xP
3) ;
Kt—
and experience has shown that White obtains the
superior game,
5),
12.
QxKt
13.
B—B 2
Kt— R4
Kt— B 5
A very dangerous manoeuvre, as White can evade the exchange of his Bishop and the Black Kt does not get back in
time for the defence of the K side, where White's attack becomes virulent. He should have played
Q B followed
P—
by Kt—B 3.
14.
4
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Q R— K I
19.
20.
179
P-QB4
P—K 6
A brilliant sacrifice to which no satisfactory reply can be
For instance, 20...PxKt;
found.
22 RxKt. PxR; 23 P—B
25BXP, etc.; or 24...
K 6, Q—K I
;
24
or 23...P—Kt 4
KxP 25 Q—R 5 ch, K—Kt i
;
PxB, PxP,
;
26
;
24
PxP ch,
P—B 6, BxP; 27 Bx
21...B—B4; 22 PxP ch, KxP; 23 BxP ch,
P, etc. ;
or
PxB
24 P
;
Q— Kt 4, Kt—K 6,
R—KB i; 25 PxPch, RxP; 26 Q—
27 BxP, etc.
;
21
5, BxP;
—B
5, etc.
There are many variations, all lead-
ing to a speedy end.
'^?
mm^M mmkm is
i
A wf$ X
4.
mi
Diag. 123.
20
B—KB3
21.
PxKt
Q—Kt 4
22. P—B 5
23.
P-Q6
BxKP
BxP
PxKPthen 24 PxKt P, Kt—K 4 25 RxKt, BxR;
26Q—R5, Q—B 3; 27 RxQ,BxR; 28 PxP ch, K— R 1
or 26...B xP
27 B— B 8, etc.
29 Q—B 7, etc.
If
;
;
;
24.
25.
PxB
K—R I
Q—Kt 3 ch
Resigns.
!
CHESS STRATEGY
i8o
Game No. 17
White:
Black: Riga.
Berlin.
Ruy Lopez.
Move 1-6 as in Game No. 16.
= mm, •'^
_ ii i
>y^^/A
i il i
Diag. 124.
PxP
Compare note to move No. 6 in Game 14.
7.
R—K I
8.
KtxP
P-Q4
B-Q3
This is the key to the variation. Black threatens to obtain
ch, followed by
by perpetual check through
This is not good enough against
ch.
Q
5 ch and
a weaker opponent in a tournament, and a strong player
cannot afford to play the Riga defence. But that is not a
point against the variation. To prove it unsound, White has
BxP
a draw
—R
QxP
to find a win.
9.
10.
After 10
KtxKt
K—R I
BxPch
K—B i Black has a tremendous attack, and drives
it
home before White can manage to bring his extra piece into
play.
A game Maroczy-Berger (Vienna, 1908) is an illustra10 K B i, Q R 5
It continued in this way
tion of this.
:
—
—
;
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
i8i
Kt-K B 3.
B-K 3, Castles I2 Kt-Q 4. B-Kt 5 I3 continuation.
Q_R 4 Now White has no satisfactory
difficult to bring
II
;
;
Queen, and it is
14 Kt— Q 2 obstructs the
action.
14 Kt—B 3, Q
Q »
concerted
the Rooks into
KtxKt, PxKt;
QxP;
17
PxB.
16
BxKt;
3,
i=i
i,
20
2. Q-Kt 5 ch
19
6 ch
18
3.
PxP;
3,
4; 22
4? 21 B-Kt 3.
R— ^
0-0
0-B Q-R
R-Q
;
K-K
R-K R
K-B
;
P-B
Resigns.
Q-R 5
10
But a fine sacrifice forces
pieces, and saves the
attacking
Black's
were lost.
It now looks as if White
the exchange of
all
situation.
11.
12.
13.
14.
PxR
QxQ
RxKtch
Q-Q8ch
KxKt
KtxQch
KxB
^
»
*• iS,^,^^^^^^^8-^„„,»
p
Diag. 125.
After the terrible
Black has a
clearer.
somewhat
Rook and two pawns for two minor
slaughter,
the
position
is
advantage for the end-game, but as yet there
end-game. White, in possession of two
is no thought of an
which the Black King
Bishops, with an open Queen's file on
and most masters would
stands, has good attacking chances,
think the position favourable for White.
pieces, a slight
14
B-K 3
!
CHESS STRATEGY
i82
P
—K B 4
is
a plausible move, but is followed by a pretty
— Kt 5. The move in the text threatens to
eliminate the K B by P— Q B 4, P— Q Kt 4.
P— K B 4
15. B— K 3
16. Kt— B 3
K— K 2
17. P— K Kt 4
mate by 15 B
—
Tarrasch recommends 17 R Q i, threatening Kt Q 5 ch.
B 3, White could play 18 B Kt 6, thereby permanently
preventing Black from contesting the Queen's file, and then try
to exchange Black's B by Kt
K 2 Q 4. With two Bishops,
White would then have winning chances.
A subtle idea underlies White's move of P K Kt 4. He
wishes to take advantage of the fact that Black has exchanged
the K B by playing P Kt 5, thus holding all the four pawns
on the King's side. But Black finds a surprising reply, which
seems to refute White's plan.
Capablanca played against Ed. Lasker (New York, 1915),
17
K Kt 4,
K Kt 3 18
Kt 3,
K R 4
19
P X B P,
R 5 ch 20
R 2, P x P 21 Kt— K 2,
Kt 4 22
Kt 3, B X B 23 R P x B, K
K Kt i
24
Q I, Q
Q I 25 R x R, K X R 26 Kt— K 4,
winning a pawn.
If
P
—
—
—
— —
—
—
P—
P—
;
R—
P—
P—
B—
R—
;
K—
;
P—
;
;
R—
;
;
P— K Kt 3
17
K—
;
;
18.
P— Kt 5
Q R— K Kt I
!
Black offers the exchange in order to get rid of White's Q B.
If White accepts the sacrifice, he loses his K Kt P, and
Black retains three passed pawns for the piece, at least an
equivalent for the end-game.
White should decline the
doubtful gift and meet the threat of
R 3 and
K Kt 4
with 19
K Kt I.
P—
R—
P—
B— Q 4
BxR
P— R 3
20. B— B 6 ch
K— B 2
RxB
22. R— Q I
in order to play 23 B—
Q 7 in answer to P— B 4. This explains
19.
21.
White's check at move 20.
PxPch
23. K— Kt 2
K—B3!
If now 24 Kt—
ch.
Black
would
assail
the
5
White King
Q
with K— K 4
25 Kt x P, B— B 5— K 7— B 6. The Black
22
;
phalanx of pawns becomes menacing.
25.
R PxB
24.
B— Kt 3
K— K 3
BXB
26.
P— Kt 4
R— R 2
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
183
Black need no longer fear to exchange Rooks, for he would
then threaten the Queen's side pawns with his King whilst
the passed pawns kept the White forces occupied.
27.
28.
29.
The aim
R— Q 2
K— B 3
P— B 3
Kt— K 2
Kt— Q 4 ch
P— Q B 3
move is not clear. Black should adopt a
P— Kt 5, P— B 5, R— R 2, etc.
P— Kt 5
30. R— K R I
of this
forward policy with
31.
R— R 8
Now none of the pawns can advance
R—
R—
K 8,
K2
answered by 32
Kt 3 and one of the pawns is lost.
31
Kt— K 2
33. Kt— p 4
32.
R— B 8 ch
R— Q 8
R—Q 6
37. Kt— B 2
38. R— Q 7 ch
39. R— Q 6
34.
35.
36.
40.
;
:
P— B 5 would be
33 R X R, K X R
;
34 Kt—
R— K 2
R— Q 2
R— K 2
K— Kt 2
P— B 5
K— B 2
R— K 3
R— K 2
R—K 3
R-Q I
costs—and loses. By a forcible
advance on the Queen's side, he creates new chances, but also
White tries to win at
all
new weaknesses.
40
41.
P— B 4
R— Q 4
R_Q 6
44- P— B 3
42.
43.
K—B3
R— K 2
K— Kt 4
P— K 6
!
P X P fails on account of P— B 6 ch and R— R 2.
44
45.
46.
Kt— K I
P-K7
P— Kt 6
P— Kt 5
Too late
46
47. PxBP
R— R2
PxP
CHESS STRATEGY
i84
R— K 6
K— Kt I
Kt— B 2
51. RxK P
52. Kt— K I
53. R— Q 2
R— R 7 ch
R— B 7
RxP
R— Q 6
R— Kt 6
P—B 6
48.
49.
50.
54.
P-R 4
Kt-Q 3
Resigns
The R P cannot be prevented from pushing on to R 6,
R on the eighth
R—Q i would then be compulsory. But that lets
the Black Rook in on the seventh (K R — R 7, followed by
after which a mate is threatened by the Black
rank.
P— B 7 ch).
Game No. 18.
Emanuel Lasker.
Capablanca.
Ruy Lopez (see p. 37)
1.
P— K 4
P— K 4
Kt— Q B 3
P— Q R 3
Kt—K B 3
3. B-Kt 5
4. BxKt
5-P-Q4
2.
Q PxB
PxP
—
Worthy of consideration is
5...B
K Kt 5 6 .P x P,
X
Q
Q ch 7 K X Q, Castles ch 8 K— K 2, R— K i 9 P—
K R 3, B X Kt ch 10 K x B, P B 3 with a good game.
:
;
;
;
—
;
;
;
In this opening Black is justified in assuming the initiative,
as the exchange, which has opened a diagonal for his Q B, has
furthered his development. If he does not do so, and confines
himself to defending tamely, the chances are that he will lose
on account of White's majority of pawns on the King's side.
6.
QxP
QxQ
If B — K 3 instead, 7 B — B 4 attacks Q B 7.
reply
to that would be inferior.
in
By exchanging
3
Q
—
Bishops White would render the Black Q P " backward," and
Compulsory.
B
on the open file its capture would be inevitable.
7.
8.
Kt X Q
Kt— Q B 3
B— Q 3
Kt—K 2
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
185
It is more
side.
Black prepares to castle on the King's
to castle on the Queen s side, as
usual, and probably stronger,
which in the present case
the King then protects the Q B P,
exchanged.
would be weak if Black's K B were to be
9.
10.
Castles.
Castles
R—Ki
P—B 4
-fMAm^mWm
wm.
• w ^ ^
mf^.
Diag. 126.
on the King's
Black allows his opponent too much latitude
P-B 5, which obstructs
wing. He should prevent White's
K 5 the game would be
After
P—
Q B, by P— K B 4.
B— K 3.
and
xKt,
B
B—
B
4.
equalised by
,, ^.
certain, with the Bishops
practically
be
then
would
A draw
would not
his
.
,
,
Black probably thought White
But with unfailing judgrisk weakening his K P by P-B 5of the greater
ment Lasker foresees that, in consequence
before a
successful
be
will
mobihty of his pieces, his attack
instituted.
be
counter attack on the weak K P can
of opposite colours.
II.
P—B3
Kt— Kt 3
would keep
Even now P— K B 4 was imperative, though
continuation could have
the Bishop from that square. The
it
been 12
P-K 5. B-Kt 5
;
and the Bishop is safe.
12.
P—B 5
1
1
I3
Kt-K 2 (or R 4). Kt-Q 4.
CHESS STRATEGY
i86
This
move has a twofold aim.
allows B
—B
4,
It
shuts in the Bishop, and
exchanging the Black Q B.
P-QKt3
12
The diagonal Q R i— K R 8 is the only one in which the
Bishop has any prospects of action. However, as soon
as he
relinquishes his present diagonal, a White Knight
settles at
K 6 and the Black Rooks are very much hampered.
13.
B—B 4
B—Kt 2
Black should have exchanged the Bishops. Now he gets
a
weak pawn at Q 3. Before playing B— Kt 2, P— B
should
be played to prevent the Knight getting from Kt
14.
BxB
15.
16.
Kt-Q 4
Kt— K 6
17.
18.
19.
4
3—Q 4—K 6.
PxB
Q R__Q I
R_Q 2
P_Q« Kt 4
Q R— Q I
Kt—B I
R—B 2
K R— Q 2
^
This holds Black's Kt at B i. White's next
move prevents the
Bishop getting into action by
B 4. After depriving all
the Black pieces of their mobility, White
turns his attention to a determined assault on the Black
King.
P—
19
20.
P-Q Kt 4
P—Q R 3
K—B 2
23. P— Kt 4
24- R— Q 3
25. P— KR4
21.
22.
26.
PxP
QR— K2
K-B 2
B-R I
R— R 2
p_R 3
P—Q R 4
PxP
R(R2)— K2
There are no prospects on the Rook's fUe, and Black
is restncted to keeping his pieces mutually protected.
He cannot
prevent White from penetrating the King's side.
K—B 3
K—B 4
29. R— Kt 3
30. K—B 3
27.
28.
If
R_Kt I
p_Kt 3
p_Kt 4 ch
Black captures the pawn, he would lose
it
again forth-
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
with through Waiite's
also be captured.
30
187
R-R 3. and the pawn at R 3 would
Kt— Kt 3
;•••
RPxP
R_Q2
PxP
32. R—R 3
33. K-Kt 3
31.
fM i wms^wm
Diag. 127.
P—
B4
The White King leaves the diagonal because Black's
intends
White
which
by
interfere with the combination
would
to annihilate Black's game in a few
moves.
K— Ki
34:QR-KRi
35- P-K 5
B— Kt 2
1
A beautiful final stroke
35
36.
..
Q PxP
Kt—K 4
R— R 7 ch and Kt x P.
1
threatening mate by
36
Kt-Q4
B— B I
37. Kt (K 6)—B 5
of Kt x B and
account
on
Rook
the
move
White dares not
Kt—Q6ch.
KtxR
39. R— R 7 ch
40. R— Q R I
41. R— R 8 ch
42. Kt—B 5
38.
Mate in two is threatened.
BxKt
K— K I
K—Q I
B— B I
Resigns.
Black's only
move is Kt— K 2.
CHESS STRATEGY
i88
is helpless, and White can capture the pawns
one by one at his leisure (R B 7, etc.). In this game, so
beautifully engineered by White, we have a further example
of Lasker's remarkable grasp of position.
after which he
—
Game No. 19
White
:
Eduard Lasker.
Black
Four Knights' Game.
I.
:
Janowski.
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
because
189
P-Q 4. threatening to fork t^° P'^«^' *°''^^**''
»l^t—v5'
After7...B-Kt 5
on the other hand, we get the
9 B-B 4, B-B 4.
^vhich White obtains the adin
on p. 115,
change of Black's centre pawn.
Kt!!l-Q 5
•
,
positi'on discussed
vantage bv
Q-Q 2.
Instead of
9..
-B-B 4, Black should
But he has not the co,„st
Bishop for the attack and White
oLv 0-0 2 with a similar threat.
peLL^of hrs King's
^° K* >< ^^ "^^
6 fails on
P-KR3(BxKt; 12 P x B,
Kt xKt ch
Kt i) 12
manages to escape with a draw, e.g. 9. -Q-Q 2
?tKt iiBxP
Tccouni o l-R X and R-K
j3%"kI B-K R 4 14 K-R
15 R— K kt I.
;
^ iMW;
Q-R
P-B
;
;
3,.
K-R 2 (Diagram 129)
I,
'Wm
BF
V/W//.'^
tuntr^'
I
Pi I Bl*M *
wm mk fM,
Bi
:
H la
i
Diag. 129.
Black had his B at B 4, as
This is the saving clause. If now
White would first have
White has in the corresponding attack.
after
2, and would be lost
to protect his B P with 15
as
Kt 3
17
R 4 fails
Kt i,
Kt I 16
on the
^nd
Kt 3
3
18
6
because of
B i,
plays
Black
other hand, after 17 RxR.
attacking the B P a second time.
^, , ^
Black does not
With the Black Bishop at Kt 5, however,
Kt i 16
15...R—
be
could
The continuation
succeed.
draw.
probable
a
with
4,
Kta; 17
R_Kt3
both sides, and it has
This line of play is most difficult for
tournaments.
been avoided so far in
continuation for many
In Diagram 128 the favourite
Q-K
R—K
;
Q-R
R—K
;
R—
B-K
B—
;
,
R-B
;
R-K
PxR
K
R—
B—R
;
CHESS STRATEGY
190
Kt—K
years was: 7...BxKt; 8 PxB,
2.
The opening of
the
Kt file by 9 B x
Kt is not to be feared, because of the
reasons given when discussing Diagram 90.
But White obtains
the advantage with 9
4, preparing the opening of the
B file by
4 and P x P. 9. .Kt-Kt 3, in order to retake
with the B P after 10 Kt xKt and to open the file
for Black's
Rooks, is not a sufficient reply, because after 11
K
K
K
Kt—R
P-B
.
P—B
4 and
PxP White has a clear advantage, having an extra pawn
in
the end-game. For the three Black
pawns on the
King's side are held by the two adverse
pawns, which thev
cannot pass.
effect for
The attempt to expel the troublesome Bishop
9...Kt-K I by P-K B 3, and then play for a
—B
after
centre
by
Kt— B 2 and P— Q 4 fails on account of the withering
attack which White obtains on the K B file
ee Q Kt— K i
10 B-Q B 4. K-R I n P_B 4, P_K B
5'
12 V^
Q-R
3
-^ 5,
PxB; 13 PxP, etc.
In consequence the defence by
7. .B x Kt and Kt— K 2 has
been
1
3,
•
;
;
.
abandoned.
In the present game Black reverts to a
very old defence
compnsmg the moves BxKt, Q— K 2, Kt— Q
i— K 3.
:
It
had been abandoned because White, by playing
K i
^7^9 ^'^^^ eventually B-B i and B-R 3, forces the exchange
of Black s centre pawn, and obtains
an advantage, on wellknown grounds.
Here Black strengthens the defence by
R—
P-K R
interpolating
3 !, after which White must come to a
decision as to maintaining the pin.
If he decides to do so
the White Bishop will no longer be able
to threaten the Black
Queen from Q R 3.
BxKt
7-
PxB
9. B— K R 4
P-KR3^
8.
If
fence
the B retreats to B i or K 3, Black can
adopt the deKt-K 2-Kt 3. Then Kt-R 4 would be inferior, because
Black can simply play
P-K Kt 4.
In this case the advance
of the pawns is justified, because Black
can bring his
Kt to
K Kt 3 and have practically one piece more on theQKing's
side, and good prospects for the
K-R
2,
R— K Kt
I,
attack which he can open with
w n
Kt-Kt 3—B 5.
P
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Q-K2
9
P
191
—K Kt 4 would be premature. White would win at
11 B x P, as he can attack the
once by 10 Kt x Kt P, P X Kt
K
B
Knight a second time by
4 and P x P before Black can
the "pin."
relieve
or
sufficiently
either protect it
;
P—
Kt— Oi
Q-Q 2
P— Q4
12. O— K 3
13- QxB
10.
B—Kt 5
II-
It
BxKt
Kt-K 3
would be wrong to play for the gain of a pawn with
P—K Kt 4 and P X P, e.g. 13. .P—K Kt 4
P xP 16 P— K 5, etc.
15 R— K I
.
!,
14
;
B—Kt 3, P x P
;
;
14.
BxKt
Black's threat was to develop an attack, similar to that
described at move 9, with P
14
15.
16.
—K Kt 4 and Kt—B
5.
QxB
PxQ
QxQ
B—B 4
exchange the Knight, which is generally superior
to a Bishop in an end-game, as mentioned before.
in order to
PxP
PxB
16
17.
18.
BxKt
PxP
p^ tl^ ii
w^ s
B ^p
Wm
I'^f
Diag. 130.
Ci
'^1
iMi
192
.
CHESS STRATEGY
In the end-game thus brought about the White Rooks have
more freedom, as they can be mobihsed easily on the third
rank to act on either wing.
stronger, being easily protected
Black's pawns, however, are
by the King, whilst White's
weak pawns at Q R 2 and Q B 2 are at too great a distance
from the King therefore White must see to it that Black does
not open files for his Rooks on the Queen's side.
;
QR—Bi
18
19.
20.
21.
Q R— Kt I
K R—Q I
P— Kt 3
K R—Q I
R—Kt 3
White must now allow Black to occupy the Q B or Q file.
P Q 5 Black would simply play P x P 22 P x P,
After 21
P
—B
—
;
3, with a certain draw.
21
22.
P— Q 4
R— Kt 3 ch
—K
B 3 was the correct move here, in view of subsequent
threats of mate.
1^
K—B 2
22.
23.
24.
25.
PxP
RxP
P_Q R 4
R—Q R 3
P— K B 4
?
A mistake under time pressure, costing a pawn. Q R Q 3
was the move.
P—QB4
RxP
RxP
R_Q 7
25
R-QB3
27. R— Kt I
28. RxKt P
29. P— K R 3
30. R— Kt 5
QR-Qi
26.
Not RxP, on account of
R— B
7,
and the K Kt P cannot
be saved.
30
R— K Kt 3
32. P— B 4
33- R— K Kt 4
34- R— Kt5
31.
35.
P— R 4
R— (B5) B7
P_B 4
P_B 5
P_R 4
RxP
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
193
Mate was threatened in a few moves through R
and R (R 7)—R 8.
— Q B 7 —B 8
R-(B7)Kt7
35
—B
White would win the K B P or obtain a
Q Kt 8—
Q Kt 7 ch, followed by
perpetual check (36
still
draw,
can
White
text.
in
the
K B 8). After the move
as he wins back his pawn.
If
now R
36.
37.
7,
R—
R—
RxR
RxR
RxRP?
This careless move now loses the game. Of course White
R 5,
5 held the
should have taken the B P. If then
pawn from behind, also after 37. .K—B 3 ; 38 x Q R P,
as the White B P
4, a draw would have been the result,
R—R
P—
P—
R
.
K
—R
would soon have become threatening, e.g. 39 R
8,
K—B 4
;
P—B 6, R—Q B 7 42 R—Q B 8,
K_Kt 5 43 P—B 7. K xP 44 K—R 2, P—K 6 45 R—B 8,
RxP; 46 RxP ch, K— Kt 4; 47 R— K 4, R—B 6;
40
p_B 5, P— K 5
41
;
;
;
;
48
46
;
K—Kt
R—K
3. etc.
I,
or 44
;
R—B 7
;
R— K R xP 45 R xP, K—Kt 6
RxP 48 R— K 3 ch,
47 K—R
8,
;
;
i,
;
and so on.
37
38.
P-R5
P—R6
RxP
Resigns.
After
40
R—R 5 there follows P—R 7 and R— Kt 8 ch, or
K—R 2) P—B
6.
Game No. 20
White
:
Eduard Lasker.
Black
:
Englund.
Four Knights' Game.
1.
P— K 4
P—K 4
Kt—QB3
B— Kt 5
Kt—B 3
Kt—Q 5
Kt— KB3
3. Kt— B 3
2.
4.
5.
KtxP
N
(if
194
CHESS SIRATEGY
Black can now get White's K P by playing Q — K 2, and
moreover exchange White's valuable Bishop.
Instead of the
move in the text it is advisable to retire the Bishop to R 4
or B 4, or else to play 5 Kt x Kt, P x Kt
6 P— K 5, P x Kt
Black would then play Q x P and not P x Q P ch,
7 P X Kt.
as the latter move allows White to develop quickly, and Black
;
;
has no time to castle— ^.^. 8BxP, QxP; 9 Castles,
10
B 3, followed by
1
B—
R—K
;
Q-K2
5.
6.
B—K 2
Kt-B3
KtxP?
lHitf*iAJ
11
^
^.
fm
e^?^
mi 5 mi
Diag. 131.
Here Kt x B was essential, followed by QxP, freeing the
Bishop.
After 7
Kt xKt,
QxP ch
;
8
Q— K
2',
^y.(^ ch
;
KxQ, Kt— Q 4 (10 P— B 4, P— Q R 3), Black completes
his development a little later (10 R
— K i, P — K B 3;
11 K— B I ch, K—B 2), but after the exchange
of Queens
9
there is not much to fear from an immediate
attack, and the
value of the two Bishops soon asserts itself.
In a
match
game Ed. Lasker— Cole (London, 1913) the continuation
was
P—Q 4, P—Q R 3 13 Kt-B 3, KtxKt 14 PxKt,
P—Q 4. Here the doubled pawn a disadvantage, in that
12
;
;
is
the
pawn at B 2 is immobile, and constantly hable to
attacked by
B—B 4. P—Q 3 was the better move.
7.
Castles
KtxKt
be
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
195
After Kt x Q Kt there
Now Kt X B was no longer possible.
K i and P—Q 3.
would be threats of Kt xB P as well as of
as the King
stage,
this
The game is almost lost for Black at
castHng.
file
by
the
K
attack
on
cannot escape the impending
R—
8.
QPxKt
9.
QxKt
10.
KtxKt ch
Q—B4
B— K 2
R—K I ch
B-Q 3
prevents castling, as Q— K 4 would win a piece.
P-Q4
II
12. B— K 3
11.
White has the development of the B gratis, as Black must
lose time with the Queen.
12
13.
14.
Black
being
Q—Q3
Q— K B 3
B— K B 4
QxP!!
behind with
development is already
If he takes the Bishop
B i 16
Q 8 ch !, B xQ
his
threatened by sacrificial combinations.
K—
B—
Kt 5 ch,
he loses by 15
15...P—B 3
or
mate,
8
K
17
R—
Q—
;
;
;
16 B xP ch, and so on.
P-B3
14
15. Q— K 4
16. R— K 3
B— K 3
B— Q B 4
Here Black might have castled on the Queen's side, but
R Q I would have had much the same sequel as in the
actual game.
—
17.
18.
B— K 5
R— Kt 3
A sorry retreat.
Q-R 3
B— K B I
But after Q— Q 7, which may have been
Black's original intention. White plays
R— K B
i, threatening
B— KB 4.
19.
R-Q I
This move completes White's development, and only seems
to give Black a chance of castling. However, Black has no
satisfactory continuation.
CHESS STRATEGY
196
19
Castles ?
QxPch
21. B— R 6
Mate
20.
PxQ
Game No. 21
White
:
Eduard Lasker.
Black
Three Knights' Defence.
P— K 4
Kt—K B 3
3. Kt— B 3
4- Kt-Q 5
1.
2.
Developing another piece by B
more in accordance with principle.
4
:
Aljechin.
P—K 4
Kt—Q B 3
B—Kt 5
—Kt 5 or B 4 would be
B—K2
There was a threat of Kt x B and Kt x P.
If
Black plays
P—Q 3, the B must retire all the same after 5 B — Kt 5.
It
seems best to retire the B to K 2 rather than to B 4 or R 4,
because there remains the threat of a pin subsequently by B
K Kt 5, which might become serious with the Knight at Q 5.
—
5-
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
II.
12.
197
BxB
P—Q4
PxB
B W^m.
W'^
^w
iil
m.
W£
mm. A K^ A r/!^^ ^
%«fi
Wi.^
«
pr^ 4. ^^
Diag. 132.
13.
PxP
The second mistake. Unimportant as it seems, it leads to the
White did not defend the pawn by Q—B 2,
loss of the game.
lost
it would have proved 10 Q— Q 2 to have been a
But giving up the centre is a far greater evil. Black
now commands his Q 5 and K B 5, and this enables him to
The game shows
start an attack to which there is no defence.
because
move.
conclusively how important it is to maintain the centre.
KtxP
13
14. Castles
15.
16.
KR
P-Q Kt 4
Q— K 2
P—K
P—B4
P-Q Kt 3
which would now be countered by
K 5 cannot be prevented
PxP and Q B 4. However, as
permanently, and the Q must move in any case, Q B 2 would
have been the better move, as there the Queen cannot be
molested by a Rook.
to
prevent
—
5,
16
17.
18.
19.
P— Kt 5
B—Q 2
R—R4
P—
—
Q-Q3
Q Kt— K 2
Kt—Kt 3
Q R—K I
CHESS STRAIEGY
198
Black's game is beautifully developed, whilst White cannot
make a combined effort. The Black Rooks are particularly
well placed,
and threaten to take an
attack in various ways.
losing the centre.
20.
All this
is
effective part in the
the outcome of White
P— K Kt 3
—
is
Though this prevents Kt (Q 4) B 5, it weakens K B 3, which
more serious as Black threatens to open the file by
all the
P-B5.
Q-Q2
20
If
now White refrains from taking the pawn, Black plays
P-Q R 4
1
21.
RxP
22.
Kt— Q4
23.
24.
QxP
Q-K 2
P— K5
PxP
Kt—K4
P-B 5
All the avenues of attack are now open, and White's game
collapses quickly.
25-
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
would support the advance
Q B 4 and also be of use eventually in an attack on
K Kt—Q 2 is better, because
of
p
I99
it
P—K
B 3. The text move allows the
White's centre by
exchange of two minor pieces, which can only be to White's
advantage, as Black cannot get his Q B into play, and is for a
long time practically a piece down.
6.
BxB
KtxKt
After P X Kt the pawn would be very weak, and could hardly
be held for long.
7.
QxKt
KtxB
P—K Kt 3
To be able to play P— K B 4 before developing the Kt (see
p. 49).
P-QB4
8.
Kt—
P-QB3
B3
9Q-K2
10. P— K B 4
B-Q2
II. Q-Q2
Castles K R
12. Kt— B 3
P—B5
13- B-Q3
P-Q Kt 4
14. B—B2
P—Kt 5
15- Castles K R
P-QR4
16. Q R— K I
8.
wm WM ^Ml
A WM A IfTi
WM W^>
w/V/,
j*v
Diag. 133-
So far the game is easy to understand in the light of the
remarks made on page 44, when treating of the openings.
The continuation shows in an instructive fashion that White's
CHESS STRATEGY
200
attack is the more effective, being directed against the King's
side.
P—B5
17.
fice
K PxP
!
This sacrifice of a pawn in conjunction with a second sacrion the next move, produces a combination of rare beauty.
18.
P—Kt4!
!
PxP
If Black did not capture White would.
In either case the
storming of the position by pawns achieves its object and the
lines of attack are free for the pieces.
19.
Kt— Kt 5
P_Kt 3
Now that White has made an opening for himself at K B 6,
19. .P— R 3 is of no avail.
The sequel might
have been 20 Kt— R 7, K R— Q i 21 Kt—B 6 ch, after
which White wins after either P x Kt 22 Q x P or K R i
the rest is easy.
.
:
;
;
KtxP.
20.
R—B 6
Black gets no breathing space.
Q R— K B I
Q—B 4
23. P— K 6
24. Q— K 5
25. Q R-B 5
21.
22.
K—Kt 2
If
P
—R
3,
then 21 B xP.
B— K I
Kt— Q I
R—R 3
K—R 3
Help!
25
26.
Kt—B 7 ch
27
R—R 5 ch
28.
RxKt Pmate
BPxP
Q X Kt
K—Kt 2
Game No. 23
White
1.
2.
3-
:
Yates.
Black
French Defence.
P—K 4
P-Q 4
Kt— Q B 3
4.
B— Kt5
5.
BxKt
:
Esser.
P—K 3
p_Q 4
Kt— K B 3
PxP
PxB
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
If the Queen recaptures,
201
White obtains too great an advan-
submits to the
tage in development, and therefore Black
a handicap,
means
this
if
doubtful
doubling of his pawns. It is
Black keeps his
although the King's side gets broken up. For
succeeds
White
unless
weapon,
two Bishops, a powerful
present
The
side.
King's
the
on
attack
developing swiftly an
both
to
afforded
chances
the
shows
and
game is instructive
B 6.
at
exchange
the
by
about
brought
sides by the position
m
K
6.
P—KB4
KtxP
advance
As the K B obtains a long diagonal at Kt 2, this
to
objections
strong
be
would
there
Otherwise
is justified.
apart
and
attack,
to
subjected
be
to
likely
it, as the pawn is
from that, it gives up command of Black's K 4.
7.
Kt-Q B 3
Kt—Kt 3 would seem more natural, firstly, because Black
K
side, and White will need
has weaknesses on the
and secondly, because the Q P ought
quarter,
for attack in that
B 3, as Black will attack it by
be supported by
his pieces
P—
to
B—Kt 2.
B—Kt 2
7
8. Kt—B 3
9.
If
Castles
B—B 4
now the Knight were at Kt 3, White could play P— B 3
and B Q 3. This is the proper place for the B, which might
obtain an open diagonal after P K Kt 4.
—
10.
11.
12.
Kt— K 2
B-Q 3
P—B 3
Kt— B3
Kt—R 4
P-B 4
P— Q B 5
p_Kt 3 seems preferable, as the text move releases the
hold on White's Q 4. The isolated pawn resulting after
is not to be feared, as the B at Kt 2 would have
13
Kt i), and WTiite would not be so
greater efficiency (Q
PxP
R—
firmly established in the centre.
13.
B—B 2
14-
Q-Q 2
P— Kt 4
CHESS STRATEGY
202
There now ensues an interesting struggle. Wliite
builds
up an attack with Q and both Knights and eventually
the B
(P— K Kt 4). If Black can manage to play his King into safety
at R I in time, and then occupies the Kt
file with his Rooks
he would have the better of it, his pieces having
by far
the
greater range of action.
B— Kt2
Q—B 4
Q-B3
K— R I and K R—Kt i might be considered.
16. Kt-Kt 3
B—K R 3
17. Q— B 7
Q_Q
^ ^I
18. Q-K 5
14
15.
W^ite gains a move by attacking the Knight's
Pawn
may seem far fetched if I now point out that this could
It
not
have happened if from the first Black had given
preference to
the pawn formation at Q Kt 3 and B instead
of Kt 4 and B
4
5
though the whole game would almost certainly
have taken a
different course.
Still, when advancing a
protected position there always is the risk
pawn into an unof its becoming the
object of an attack at an opportune
moment,
the plan of development does not necessitate
and whenever
such moves they
are best avoided.
B-Q4
18
19.
20.
Kt—R5
Q— Kt 3 ch
Kt— B 3 ?
?
?
Wi^^''/^
If
»
^^^
Wfm.
^*%i
t
*
m
4???%^/^^
m
Diag. 134.
m.
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
The last moves have decided the game.
203
Both players have
—
overlooked that 20 Q B 6 would have won a pawn at least
(QxQ, 21 KtxQ ch with KtxB and BxP). 20...BxKt
22 Q xB folleads to an immediate loss by 21 Q xB. B xKt
;
lowed by P
—K Kt 4 with an overwhelming attack.
!
P—
B 3,
Instead of i9...Kt—B 3, Black should have played
i and the occupation of the Kt file by the
followed by
Rooks.
K—R
White's last
move allows him to do this with even
greater effect.
20
21.
K—Ri
R—K Kt I
Q—R 3
Black has now a preponderance of material on the field of
not being
battle, and it can be concluded off-hand that White,
able to bring his Rooks into play, must lose.
22.
Q-B3
Kt—Kt 3
23. K— B I
K—K 2
is
a shade better.
But there is no longer any
adequate defence.
R—Kt5
Q R— K Kt I
23
24. R— K I
25.
Kt-K 5
Black was threatening
BxKt, followed by R— R 5 and
P—B5
KtxKt
25
26.
PxKt
27.
28.
K—Kt I
Q-Kt 4
BxPch
RxKt?
Q-R 5
QxQ and B— K 5 ch was simple and effective.
BxR
29. RPxR
BxQ
30. QxQ
R-Qi
31. KxB
32. P— B 4
R— Q I is much more promising, although it means the loss
R and B—B 8, etc.) With Bishops of different
of a pawn (R X
.
colour the game is not easy to win even now.
CHESS STRATEGY
204
R—Q7
32
PxB
34- R— Qi
RxB
33.
R— Q 7
RxRP
35.
36.
RxKt P
K— Kt 2
R_QB7
— Kt 5 at once.
He could have played P
R— R 5
37.
38.
R-Q Kt 7
P-R 4
R—R 3 would only have drawn out the agony a httle longer.
P-Kt 5
38.
Resigns.
Game No. 24
White
1.
2.
3.
4.
:
Atkins.
Black
French Defence.
P— K 4
P-Q 4
Kt-Q B 3
B-Kt 5
P-K 5
6. BxB
5-
:
Barry.
P—K3
P-Q 4
Kt— K B 3
B— K2
K Kt— Q 2
QxB
i
^ ^i »
s m w
aMim^mam
"i
^M'
'^^'^it/^^2^^^^^'
Diag. 135.
7. Kt-Kt 5
The intention is to strengthen the centre
by P-Q B 3
Though It takes a number of moves to
bring the Knight into
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
205
this varia-
the tournament games in
Plav again, yet most of
side
White, mostly through a Kmgs
«on hfve been won by
the notes to Game No^ 22^
attack on the lines set out in
show that this ,s d"e to the
Investigations by Alapin tend to
devoted h.s attention to Queens
fact that Black in all cases
Game No. 22 ) when he could have
side operations (just as in
by himsel starting a
utiUsed White's backward development,
then either aim at
can
He
counter attack on the King's side.
B4
play
else
or
B 3,
the White centre at once with
2
i-B
Kt-B
3-Q
by
Kt P
and prepare the advance of the
Simple
discussion.
under
various lines of play are still
to the move in the text.
development is probably preferable
B 4 9 Kt-B 38
4,
3, Castles
eg
P-K
P-K
K
mse
7
B-Q
;
P-B
7
P-Q
K-Ql
J
^tion
of
Rooks into ';°n<=^rted action^
It
the
forfeiting
There can be no advantage in
of getting the Kmg mto
way
other
no
be
there
unless
castling
safety and of bringing the
of pieces is
otherwise the free development
is obvious that
appreciable danger for
hindered, and the King is in
^^^^^^
pawns
than on the wings where the
to open files in the centre
Kt-Kt 3 is the only move
have not advanced yet. Therefore
worth considering.
P-K B 3
p_Q B 3
9. PXP
8.
With the Black King remaining in
the centre. Vv-^ite has no
maintenance of his pawn at
further interest in the
centre.
contrary he will try to clear the
K 5- ^n
the
PxP
P-B3
9
Z Q-Q2
I?.
Kt-Bi
K^QR3
Black will have to
trymg to complete his deveconfend titWifhcnfties in
is barred on accoun
B
At this early stage it
bpment
clear that
is
The usual way (P-Q
4)
Black's King with which a
of tTe dangers to
centre is fraught.
12.
13.
B-Q 2
Kt-B 3
P—K Kt 3
I
clearance
m the
CHESS STRATEGY
2o6
As Black can force this advance at any time by playing
I, White decides to develop his
B at Kt 2, thereby
R— K Kt
covering his
K
K B 3 and K R 3.
The weakness of the latter
squares would not be of any great moment if White
were to
castle on the Queen's wing.
But as P— Q B 4 is necessary in
order to break up the centre, castling K R is the right
course.
13
14.
15.
16.
B—Ki
B— Kt 2
Q Kt— Q 2
KtxP
Kt— QKt3
PxKt
Kt— Kt 3
P-B4
PxP
KtxKt
17.
18. Castles
19.
20.
21.
22.
KR
K R—K I
B— Q 2
R_K I
Q—B 3
Kt—Q 2
P~Q R 4
Q_B I
!
White wishes to get rid of the pawn at Black's
order to break in with his Knight at B 5. Black
Kt 3, in
has no means
of preventing this, and soon succumbs
to the overwhelming
array of White forces.
22
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
P—R 5
Kt— Kt 3
BxKt
RxR ch
Kt—B 5
R—K I
Q—K 3
Q_B4ch
Kt—K2
p_Q Kt 4
Kt—Q4
KPxB
BxR
Q_B 2
K—B 2
B—Q 2
Resigns.
If K— Q
31 KtxP ch followed by
K— B I White wins by 31 Q—Q 6 and R—KKt—Q 6 ch.
I,
7.
Game No. 25
White: Emanuel Lasker.
Black: Tarrasch.
French Defence.
1.
2.
P— K 4
P-Q4
p_K 3
p_Q4^
If
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Kt— K B 3
Kt-Q B 3
B—Kt5
B—Kt5
Pi-TMi
Pi
207
tBi
1^
^p
^
W If p p
s
m
.^^
Diag. 136.
This line of defence, called the McCutcheon variation, was
recommended for many years by Tarrasch as being the
5 leads to
The most obvious continuation 5 P
strongest.
reached.
been
yet
not
has
verdict
final
the
comphcations, and
to be
thought
is
continuation
best
the
R 3,
After 5 P
PxP;
Kt
i;
8
4.
PxP.
6 PxKt', PxB; 7
—K
K
R—
QxP.
loQxRP,
Q—
B3;
9Q—R5.
P—K R
White has an easy development, whilst Black, as m most
to bring his
variations in the French defence, finds it difficult
to retire
After
3, it is not advisable
into play.
Q B
P—K R
P-K
Kt 4 7 B-Kt 3. for here the
4,
the Bishop 6
bemg free
Bishop is out of play, and Black's King's Knight
K B.
Black's
can play to K 5 for concerted action with
simple
once
at
is
Lasker's continuation in the present instance
system of deand effective. It leads to an entirely different
velopment.
;
B-R
5.
PxP
;
QxP
move
Black recaptures with the pawn, he must lose a
isolated doubled
with the Bishop in order to avoid getting an
B 3. The doubled pawn which Black
pawn after 6
not be isolated,
get after the move in the text would
If
Q—
may
and
therefore
not necessarily weak.
It
could
become a
CHESS STRATEGY
208
weakness
Black were to castle on the King's side. But
otherwise it might even become a source of strength, supporting, as it would, an advance of Black's K P against the
if
White centre.
6.
P—B4?
Kt—B 3
Black should retain the option of castling
White exchanges at his K B 6
have been better.
78.
;
Q R, in case
P—Q Kt 3 and B— Kt 2 would
BxKt
PxB
Q-Q2
9- QxB
ID. R-Qi
BxKt
Kt—Q 2
PxP
12. Q-Q2
Q-Kt3
R—KKt
QxP
II.
guarding against the mate at Q i before moving the Kt.
But this would have been better effected by
K 2. Aftei
Kt 3 the Knight cannot move yet because of
Kt 5 ch.
Q—
B—
Q—
Wm
IS
-m^ii.
±
J^i
wm
M
^m.
my'..
W^
s m^ ,BP
11
2
Diag. 137.
P—B 3
Q-B 2
15. P— K Kt 3
13.
14.
16.
B-Kt2
Black wishes to push on the K P.
P-QR3
P—B4
Kt—B4
Q-B 2
White, however, prevents
this at once.
Q-K
17.
2
18. Castles
P—Kt4
B— Kt 2
ILLUb'lKAllVE GAMES
209
The
The Black position has any number of weaknesses.
King cannot castle into safety the pawn position is full of
WTiite takes full advantage of this
holes, and open to attack.
and wins in masterly fashion with a few strokes.
;
P—Kt 5
P—B 4
Q—Q 2
19.
20.
R— Kt I
Now W^ite cannot capture the Kt P because of BxKt.
But he does not want the pawn, he wants the King.
21.
Q—R6
BxB
23. KR—Ki
24. Q-B 4
25. Q-Q 6
22.
BxKt
Q—K4
QxP
V^
§
P-B 3
'
Mate in two was threatened (B—B 6 ch, etc.).
B—R 5 ch
26.
BxRch
28. RxPch
27
R—Kt 3
PxB
Resigns.
Game No. 26
White
:
Capablanca.
Black
:
Blanco
French Defence.
P— K 4
P—Q 4
3. Kt-QB3
4. KtxP
5. Kt— K B 3
1.
2.
6.
KtxKtch
7.
Kt— K 5
P—K 3
P—Q 4
PxP
Kt—Q2
K Kt—B 3
KtxKt
This crosses Black's plan of developing the Q
B at Kt 2.
B-Q3
P-B 3
Q-B 3
Kt xP was threatened.
9 B— Kt 5 ch, P— B 3 10
7
8.
;
Q
10'
II.
p B 3
B— K Kt 5
B-Q 3
Castles
B— K 2
CHESS STRATEGY
210
Whatever Black plays now, he must create some weakness
in order to provide against White's
Q— R 3, BxKt, QxR P,
and White's attack must succeed.
The whole of Black's plan
as the onty reason for abandoning the centre
is thus frustrated,
by P X P was the occupation of the long diagonal by the Q B.
Now the Queen's side pieces cannot get into play without
much difficulty, and by the time they have succeeded it is
too late.
m
11 i
m
I
fm.^ wm
i IS
HH
am
M
wm>.
wm
m>.
W/.
lit wm.
SJ
^ i^ ^
Diag. 138.
Kt—Ki
II.
K
Intending to intercept the diagonal of the White
B by
If Black plays
Kt 3 with the same intention, White plays P
R 4-5 and P x P, and brings the Rook
P— K B 4.
—K
P—K
into play.
12.
Q—R 3
P—K B 4
— K R 3 would lead to an immediate disaster 13 B x P,
P
PxB
:
;
14 QxR P, P— K B 4
;
15 P— K Kt 4.
The move in
the text avoids the immediate attack on the King, but the
King's Pawn is now " backward," and White immediately
fastens on this weakness.
13-
BxB
KR
15- KR— Ki
16. R— K2
17- Q R— K I
14. Castles
18.
P-QB4
QxB
R—B3
Kt-Q3
B-Q2
R— Ki
Kt—B2
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
19.
20.
21
P-Q5
211
^^""^L
P—KKt3
RxKt
BxP was threatened.
K—Kt 2
Q—R 4
21.
P-g 4
Q-Q 4
23- g-B 3
24. PxP
25. B—K 2
22.
P-Kt 3
B—Bi
The Bishop now settles at Q 5, and whether Black takes
the
the pawn or not, he is paralysed either by the pawn itself, or
taken.
is
pawn
the
if
Bishop
pin of the
BxP
25
B—B 3
27. B— Q 5
28. Q— K 3
29. Q— R 6
30. P— K R 4
26.
The deciding manoeuvre,
tearing
front of the K.
K—B 2
Q—Q 3
R— K 2
K— Kt I
up the chain of pawns in
P-QR3
P— B 5
30
P—R 5
32. PxP
33. RxB
31.
PxP
Resigns.
RxR
After RxR, 34 RxR,
A beautifully concise game.
35
QxP ch wins a piece.
Game No. 27
White
:
Black
Niemzowitsch.
French Defence.
1.
P—K 4
:
Tarrasch.
P—Q B 4
This opening is called the Sicihan Defence. White, howvariation of
ever, adopts a continuation which leads into a
the French Defence.
P—Q B 3
P—Q 4
4. P-K 5
5. Kt-B 3
6. B—Q3
2.
3.
P—K 3
P— Q 4
Kt-Q B 3
Q-Kt 3
PxP
CHESS STRATEGY
212
Black seeks to demonstrate that White's Q P is weak. The
present game, however, seems to prove that White is able to
guard it adequately, thus permanently supporting the K P too.
It would therefore appear to be better to attack the K P itself,
and to play P B 3 on the fifth move. Now B Q 2 would be
better than the text move.
As White cannot give further
support to his Q 4, he would have to play P x P, and the protection of the K 5 would have to be undertaken by pieces,
which is not desirable.
—
7.
—
B—Q2
B— Kt 5 ch.
PxP
Not Kt xP, 8 Kt xKt, Q xKt, because of
8.
B—K 2
The B cannot go to B 2 on account of Kt
9.
10.
— Kt 5 and B — Kt
4.
KKt— K2
8
P—Q Kt 3
B—Kt 2
Kt—B 4
Now White's centre is safe from further attacks. Tme,
Wliite has forfeited castling, but as he dominates the King's
side,
where Black cannot undertake anything, there
— Kt
harm in P
3,
10
11.
Directed
Kt
—
against
no
B—Kt5 ch
B— K 2
K—Bi
BI
12
P- -Kt
4,
driving off
the Kt.
R 5 would follow.
12.
is
preparatory to " artificial casthng."
P—Kt 3
P-QR4
Diag. 139.
Now
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
213
This manoeuvre is unwise White counters with 13 P
;
—Q R
4,
a move which was necessary in any case, in order to develop
getting
the Q Kt via
3, this being the Knight's only chance of
times
three
into play, because as long as the Q P is attacked
R
That is a
Black to
for
necessary
was
weakness in White's game, and
P—
Kt
K R 4 was
4.
prevent his Kt being driven off by P—K
P
play
to
also
had
White
K R 4 to
the correct move. Then
played
have
could
Black
case
which
prevent P K Kt 4-5, in
concerted
into
P
Rooks
his
brought
K Kt 3, and have
13...
P K Kt 3 would have been necessary before castling,
action.
because White's B Q 3 would have attacked the K Kt. The
latter could not then capture the Queen's Pawm on account
the lines of
B and Q must not be interrupted.
it
—
—
—
—
—
of a discovered check, e.g. 12... Castles ; 13
—Q
B
3,
Kt xP ?
;
14 KtxKt, KtxKt; 15 BxKt, QxB?; 16 B— R 7 ch, and
P—
Q R 4 is not only a lost move,
In Diagram 139 Black's
but moreover allows a White piece to settle permanently at
Q Kt 5. It also prevents the Knight from playing to Q R 4,
from where White's P Q R 4 could be answered by Kt Kt 6
—
—
eventually.
13.
14.
P-Q R 4
B— Kt 5
R-Q B I
Kt— Kt 5
All these skirmishes only result in the exchange of pieces,
and as long as Black's K R is out of play this can only be of
advantage to White.
15.
Kt-Q R 3
Kt-B 3
This is in order to drive off the B. Black should have exchanged his own inactive Q B, as the White B might become
R 7, whilst Black's Q B
effective on the Diagonal Q Kt i—
K
has no future.
16.
17.
K— Kt 2
B— K 2
Kt— B 2
B—Kt 5
Black cannot yet castle, because of 18
19B-QB1).
B—Q 3 Kt— K R
3.
CHESS STRATEGY
214
i8.
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
215
R—Bi
25
P—^ 3
RxP
Kt—Q 3
26.
27. KtxKt
QxKt
28.
20.
Kt—B 3
PxP
B—B I
P—Kt5
31. BxP
32. B— K 3
PxP
R— Bi
Q—K 2
30.
Q-Kt 4
33-
Bishop by
This provides against Black attempting to free his
Kt 6 ch. White
Q 2 is countered by
Black's
4.
mobility
greater
the
through
new wins surprisingly quickly,
B—
B—
P_K
oi his pieces.
Q-B3
33
R—R I
R—R 5
34. R— Kt I
35. K-R I
Here Black could have held out a little longer by
ing his Kt P
K—Kt I
;
:
38
35.
.
R—R 5
QxP (RxP, 39 Q—R 5)
.K—B I
B— Kt 5,
;
36 R-Kt 3,
;
;
37
39
defend-
Q—Q
R—Q 3.
^'
QxP; 40BXR, QxB.
RxP
Q—Kt 3
B—Kt 5 was threatened, and after R— R
36.
Compulsory.
i,
Q X P. Q X Q, R X Q, the R P wins easily.
BxR
QxP
39-Q-Kt2
40. RxQ
41. P— R4
37.
38.
KtxB
Q-B6ch
QxQch
KtxP
Resigns.
Game No. 28
White
:
I.
Black
Alapin.
Defence.
Sicihan
P—K4
:
Rubinstein.
P-QB.4
as
At first glance this move would seem to lose time,
opening strategy,
does nothing towards the main object of
shall find that
we
But
pieces.
of
development
namely, the
it
CHESS STRATEGY
2i6
does contribute to that aim, although indirectly. For one
thing it could, by a transposition of moves, lead into an openin other
ing in which P Q B 4 is played in any case
first
the
against
the
from
it
acts
that
in
openings it is of use,
formation of a strong white centre. Concurrently it prepares
it
—
;
the opening of a file for the Rooks.
2.
Black should not play
P
—K
Kt— K B 3
Kt—K B 3
?
Kt—K B 3 as long as White's
means the clear gain of a move.
of developing moves to choose from.
5
There are plenty
can be followed by Black
develop at K 2 or Kt 2. In
the first case (compare Game No. 29) P
3 is played. In the
this
course
2. .Kt
QB3
second case, the opening might take
Two systems of development
according to whether the
KB
is to
—K
:
3
.
—
;
P—Q 4, PxP; 4 KtxP, Kt—B 3; 5 Kt— Q B 3, P-Q 3
—K Kt 3
(not P
at once, because White would exchange Knights
P—K
B—K P—
6
K Kt 3, and
K Kt by
3,
5)
is
superior,
as
he
has
a pawn in
position
White's
B
the centre in conjunction with greater mobility. Black will
Nevertheless his
find it difficult to bring his Q B into play.
and drive off the
—
;
Kt 2.
position is compact and difficult to get at.
3-
P-K 5
Undoubtedly Rubinstein had taken this move into account
K B 3. His idea was to provoke the
advance of the K P. The pawn at K 5 is weaker than at K 4,
particularly as Black's Q B P prevents its natural support by
P Q 4. Moreover Black's Q 4 is free from interference by
White. White refutes this ultra subtilty by simple and straightforward play, and he gets such an advantage in development
that his attack succeeds before Black is able to demonstrate
any weakness in WTiite's game.
when playing 2...Kt
—
—
3
4.
Kt-Q4
Kt—B3
KtxKt
QPxKt
Kt—B3
B-Q B 4
P-Q 3
After 6. .P— K 3, 7 B — B 4 would restrain the Q P.
PxP
7. B— B 4
5.
6.
.
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
217
satisfactory means of de-
At this early stage Black has no
velopment. The Q P is attacked t^^^V'T'^'''^
B be developed at Kt 2.
the
the K P cannot move, nor can
is refuted by
B-Kt 5, in order to play BxKt and PxP, about
the exThe move in the text which brmgs
ch
at the
piece
another White
change of Qiieens. but develops
watch
to
instructn^
same time, is more or less forced. It is
matenahses.
soon
how White's advantage in development
f^tT
K
BxP
KtxP
QxQch
0.
RxQ
10.
BxKt
P-QR3
8.
KtxKt
Kt 5 ch could not be panied by
White's threat of
Q 2 because of 11 B xP ch.
B—
B—
wmtm
Ri t HI
'9'
WM
•f
f^-f
Wm
«
^m.M
m 1
fM
y/sm
^^ ^^
^.easij
z;z^:^'
Diag. 141.
B—Kt5
B—B4
B—B 7
P—B 3
13. B— Kt 6
14. B— Kt 3
15. B—R 4 ch
16. P— Q B 4
11.
QR—Bi
12.
P—K4
K— K2
Here White could have won a pawn at
If then K— K 3, 17 P— Q ^ 4-
16
17.
18.
19.
20.
K—
K—B2
BxB
B—K2
B2
B—Q7!
R X B ch
K R—Q I
P—B3
once by
1
R— Q
5'
CHESS STRATEGY
2i8
The pawns can wait.
fitable because of
20
R—Q Kt i.
RxP would not have been pro-
K— K3
20
RxP
B—Q3
Black might have resigned here.
It is
21.
only a question of
time.
22.
B—R7
R—B3
—Kt
Otherwise there follows R
23.
6.
P—QR4
R— R I
P—R 4
P—R 5
RxP
R— Kt 7
25. R— Q 5
24.
26.
27.
28.
P—Q R 4
P-Q Kt 3
R (R i)-Q B 1
R— Kt 5
Resigns.
Game No. 29
White
Teichmann.
:
Black
:
Spielmann.
Sicilian Defence (see p. 215).
1.
P—K 4
P—Q B 4
P— K 3
Kt-Q B 3
3. K Kt— K 2
2.
—
—
This comes to the same as Kt B 3, as after P
Q 4, P x P
the Knight recaptures. If, however, Black plays P
Q 4
—
there is a certain advantage for White to have the Kt at
e.g.
3...P_Q4;
4
PxP. PxP;
5
P—Q 4-
If
does not exchange pawns. White is able to bring his
bear on the centre after
Kt 3 and
Kt 2.
P—K
K 2,
now Black
K B to
B—
Kt-Q B 3
3
White can exchange this Knight later on, and thus make
—K
P
5 possible as soon as he should deem it advisable to
drive the Black Knight from his
B 3, where the same is
K
bound to develop sooner or later. It is perhaps wise to prevent P— K 5 by
B 2 instead of the move in the text. This
is an old defence, introduced by Paulsen.
Though it retards
Q—
the development of Black's minor pieces, it produces a strong
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
defensive position, and the opening
side.
ing chances on the Queen's
like this:
6
219
Q B file gives attack-
of the
The
^f
Q-B2
Jl"".
3...P-QR3; 4P-Q4.PXP; 5KtxP
^^%-^l
B—K 3 Kt-K B 3 7 B-K B-K 2
2,
;
;
8 Castles,
P-Q Kt 4
Kt-Q 2, etc.
followed by B-Kt 2. P-Q 3. Q
PxP
P-Q 4
45-
KtxP
6.
KtxKt
P-QR3
Kt PxKt
B-Q3
P-Q 4
B— KB4
B—Kt5
78. Castles
9-
Kt—B3
^i/#
^
1
Diag. 142.
3,
As White can force Black to play P—
have played
should
Black
Q-Kt
4.
move, by P-K 5 and
P—Kt 3 at once, so as to have Kt—R 4 in answer to P—^ 5.
Kt
a weakening
of the King's side.
thus keeping one piece for the defence
text, and White s
The latter is in jeopardy after the move in the
attack succeeds.
P—K 5
Q—Kt 4
12. K R-K I
10.
11.
Kt—Q 2
P— Kt 3
P-Q B 4
sacrifice of the ex-
Of course Black must not accept the
Kt-K 4, B xR 14 Ktchange by playing P-Q 5- After 13
in
a matmg net, from which
is
Black
R X B,
BI
;
K—
15
6 ch
time to collect sufficient forces
there is no escape, as he has no
The move in the text does not stem the tide
for the defence.
•
—
CHESS STRATEGY
220
either,
and White quickly forces the win by a beautiful com-
bination.
P-Q R 3
B— K Kt 5
13.
14.
B—R 4
Q—Kt 3
Q— B 2 leads to the same conclusion.
15. P— Kt4!
PxP
KtxP
16.
P—K 6
17.
PxKt
The object of White's fifteenth move is revealed.
K I would now be attacked.
With-
out it the R at
P—B4
17
Kt
—B 4
fails
on account of 18 P x P ch, K x P
;
K 7 ch, followed by Q— K B 4.
18.
PxKt double ch
19.
B x P ch
19 R
KxP
Resigns,
Game No. 30
White
:
Tarrasch.
Black
:
Spielmann.
Sicilian Defence.
P—K 4
Kt—Q B 3
3. P— K Kt 3
1.
2.
P—Q B 4
Kt—Q B 3
Speedy development by Kt— B 3 and P— 4 is more desirQ
Black may have time to get a firm footing
able, as otherwise
at his Q 5.
3
4.
B— Kt 2
P—KKt3
B—Kt 2
The Black Bishop is the more effective, as the line of the
White Bishop is masked by the K P. Small as this advantage
would seem, it becomes serious later on. It is another confirmation of
in the
the doctrine that the value of each manoeuvre
opening depends on the measure of mobihty it affords
for the pieces.
5.
6.
K Kt—K 2
P-Q 3
Kt—B 3
221
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
freer
game with P-Q 4-
Here White could still obtain a
a pawn
Perhaps he was afraid of losing
^^^^l^-^''^'
8 K Kt x ^t
m it, e.g.
nothing
is
there
Kt X P Kt X P. But
-7
(KtxKt P?
KtxKt Q KtxQ KtxQ; 10 KtxB P!
xB P ? n Kt xR.
B xKt '11 B xB?R-Q Kt i) K xKt (Kt
There was
Lxr'; 12 KtxP. KtxP: 13 KtxP), KxKt.
nothing else to be feared after P—Q 4;
•
P-Q 3
6
B—Q 2
and B-R 6 and to exchange
in order to play Q-B i
7. Castles
be weak points at
Bishops, after which there would
K R 3 and K B 3.
8. P—K R 3
Castles
P-K R 3
9. B-K 3
Black also prevents an exchange of
Q-Q 2
11. P— B 4
10.
The
position has
Whites
Bishops.
K-R 2
Kt—K I
now become
exceedingly
difficult.
In
of his
favourable development
order to make the most of the
moving
Queen's side. But
the
on
advance
B Black must
m
K
must
to the Queen's side, Black
his king's side pieces over
with
attack
an
might get chances of
proceed warily, as White
overwhelming forces on the King's side.
12.
P—K Kt 4
Kt—B 2
13. Kt— Kt 3
R-B
in order to P^ay the
2
Here it was necessarv to play
to drive the Kt to
manage
could
Black
R to K B I before
Q
Q I by P— Q Kt 4-5.
13
14.
It would still have
leave
jc
P-QKt4
Kt—Q I ?
been better to play Q
R—K i and to
possible after
the Queen's side to itself as long as
Kt—
P—Kt 5,
Q I in order to start an assault on the King's side with
Kt 5. After the text move the
and
p_B 5, P—K R 4,
P—
Queen's Rook remains shut in.
14
15. Kt— K 2
QR-Kti
1
CHESS STRATEGY
in order to play P— B 3 and P—
Q 4. The whole plan, how222
ever,^ IS inconsequent,
King's side.
as
he has started an attack on the
Now he suddenly opens up files on the Queen's
where Black has assembled superior forces.
The result
White gets into trouble on both wings, for as soon as
he
gives up his King's side attack, the
advanced pawns there,
as one knows, are only a source of
weakness.
side
is that
P—Kt5
Q-Bi
PxP
Q-R3
15
P—B3
17. PxP
18. P— Q4
PxP
16.
19.
20.
21.
PxP
R—B I
Kt— Kt 4
P-Q 5
m
m^mM^
Diag. 143.
This shuts in the White K B
altogether, and at the same
time opens the diagonal of
Black's
B.
Therefore on
principle alone the move is
questionable.
In effect it gives
Black an opportunity for a beautiful
winning combination.
Unly
5 was worth considering, as then the opposing
Bishop would have been shut in
and White's own diagonal
K
P-K
21
QxKt
23. QxKt
24. KtxB
22.
Kt— Kt 5
Kt-Q5
BxQ
1
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
223
generally an equivalent
Although three minor pieces are
game collapses quickly
White
case the
for the Queen, in this
too many weak pomts
produced
The advanced pawns have
Black forces.
which afford an entry for the
KR-Bi
24
RxR,
Q-R 6
RxR
R-B 2
27. R—K 2
25.
26.
But the text move is of no avail
comthe game with another fine
B-R ^ was threatened.
either.
Black winds up
bination.
j^_g s
*
If
I
QxB
BxR
28.
R—K Q—B 4
I,
QxKtch
Kt—B3
29.
B—Kt 4
K_B 2
30-
Resigns
Game No. 31
White
Black: Janowski
John.
SiciUan Defence.
P_K 4
Kt-K B 3
o P— 04
liaxP
1.
2.
P-Q B 4
Kt--Q B 3
PXP
Kt-B3
Kt-B 3. and mcidentThe aim of this move is to provoke
P-Q B 4.
ally to prevent
command of his
The latter move would give White
Q 5 and not only prevent
buTalso immobilise Black's K
" backward."
5.
Q Kt-B 3
P unless his
Black s P-Q 4
Q P is to remam
P-KKt3
must be played first. In any
As shown on p. 216, P-Q 3
playing P-K Kt 3^ If for ms ance
case Black must be wary of
^^th
6 B-Q B 4, and Black rephe^
after P-Q 3 White plays
P—K Kt 3, there follows 7 KtxKt, PxKt, 8
P— K 5 W
CHESS STRATEGY
224
P—
Kt—Kt 5 (PxP ?, 9 BxP ch) 9
K 6,
K B 4, with
advantage to White (see game in the match Schlechter-Lasker).
;
6.
P—
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Castles
225
Q R is stronger still, as the Q R gets into action at
once.
B—KKt2
R—Kt 3
14
15. B— K B 4
RxB
B— 3 6ch
16.
B— Q 2, the continuation might have been: 17 BxB,
QxB 18 Q R—Q i, Q—Kt 2 19 K R—K i ch, Kt—K 2
or 18...Q—B i;
20 RxKt ch, KxR; 21 BxP ch, etc.
19 B X P, etc.
If
;
;
;
;
After 17
with
B—B
R—K i Black could have held out a
little
longer
After the text move, however, Black's game
3.
collapses quickly
before
the concentrated onslaught of the
White forces.
QxRch
Q R—K I ch
19. RxKt ch
20. R— K I ch
21. BxPch
22. R— K 8 ch
23. RxBch
Q—Q2
Kt—K 2
KxR
24.
Resigns.
17.
18.
!
Q—B 3 ch
K—B I
K—Kt I
B—B I
K—Kt 2
Game No. 32
White
:
Ed. Lasker.
Black
:
Mieses.
Centre Counter Defence.
1.
2.
P—Q 4
P—K 4
Kt— KB3
PxP
P—
Q B 4, a weak move
This is to tempt White to play
would obtain by
Black
Q B 3
By playing
(see p. 35).
pawn.
the
for
far the better game in exchange
P—
3.
P-Q4
QxP
In either case White wins a
piece
by Kt— Q B 3 or
Black
Q B 4.
move by driving off the
plan
Black's
centre.
the
in
pawn
a
has
White
Furthermore,
the
on
early
castle
to
be
might
Queen
the
in retaking with
P
KtxP can also be played.
P—
CHESS STRATEGY
226
—
Queen's side and attack White's centre pawn by P K 4, and
White must be on the alert against this plan, though it will not
be easy for Black to put the same into execution, because of
—
is
the only
—
After 4 Kt Q B 3, Q Q R 4
move which brings the Queen into momentary
the exposed position of his Queen.
security, and
even then Black must provide for a retreat, as
B—Q
after WTiite's
2 there would be a threat of an advantageous " discovery " by the Kt. P
provides such a
—Q B 3
retreat, but it bars the
Q Kt from its natural development at
B 3, where the Kt could exert further pressure on White's
Q 4. The Q B, too, is difficult to get into play and easily
becomes an object of attack, as in the present game.
Q-QR4
B—B4
Kt-Q B 3
Kt—B3
—
B Kt 5 would only help White's intentions to attack on
the King's side in the absence of Black's Queen, e.g. 6 P
— K R 3,
P— K Kt 4, B—Kt 3 8 Kt—K 5 (threatening
Kt—B 4), P—B 3 9 P-K R 4, Q Kt— Q 2 10 Kt—B 4,
B—R 4
;
7
;
;
;
Q—B2; IIP—R5, B—K5; i2KtxB, KtxKt; 13Q—B3
and B
—B 4 with the superior game.
m
mk ^
'^B'K'm.,
'WB.
mm
WM.
'mm
m^
Diag. 145.
6.
Kt—K 5
!
Kt—K 5
P—B 3 was urgent here, to provide against Kt—B 4 and
Q—B 3. Now the game as good as lost. White obtains
a
is
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
227
and brings it home before
forces,
violent attack with superior
has time to complete his development.
Black
If
K^-Q 3
Q-B 3
7.
KtxKt, B— Q2.
P—K 3
B—Q 2
8.
B—Kt 3
g. p__K Kt 4
Black had to guard his K B 2 because
Q
^ X P ch.
of
Kt—Kt 5, KtxKt,
^
^
Q—,,
^^* 3
B
P—
K 3
II. Castles
KtxKt QxKt;
Compulsory. Kt-B 3 is refuted by ^^
the other hand,
On
P—
R 5ic{
X Q P X Q 14 B— Kt 2 and
B 4, Q-B 4;
B-K
be
12
the answer to ii...QxP would
.
P—K R 4
10.
•
13
p_R 5, p_B 3
by R xKt'and
15
14 P X B, P X Kt
mate.
Q 8 or
B7
;
;
R—
PxKt
KtxB
12.
B— K Kt 5 followed
Q—
QxP
13. B-Q3
K—B 2 or P—K B 4 were also unavailing in consequence
of Black's poor development.
14.
K—Q2
BxPch
B-K 3
P— R 3
17. QxKtP
18. B-K 4
Q-Kt 5
15.
16.
Q—B 5
Q—B3
'
Resigns.
Game No. 33
White
Barasz.
:
Black
:
Mieses.
Centre Counter Defence.
1.
2.
P_K 4
PxP
Kt-Q B 3
Kt—
B3
4.
3.
Q^^St.
R
Q-Q
4
advance the Q P at once and so threaten
proQ 2 after which Black is almost under compulsion to
Kt,
his
blocking
thus
B
Q
P-Q
by
3,
for his
It is better to
B—
P—Q 4
vide a retreat
Q
CHESS STRATEGY
228
4
5.
6.
Kt-Q B 3
B—B4
B— K 2
P-Q 3
Already now the mistake of having allowed Black to develop his Queen's side unmolested is apparent. P
Q 4 is
—
now impossible, for Black would castle on the Queen's side
and keep the initiative by exerting a permanent pressure on
White's Q P by P
White must yield up the centre to
4.
—K
Black.
6
7.
8.
P—K4
Q-B 4
B— Q2
Castles
P-Q R 3
—Q Kt
The Queen must escape from Wliite's threat of P
Kt
9. Castles
10.
11.
P—Q Kt 4
P— Kt 5
—B 3
4.
Q— K 2
This advance is somewhat purposeless, as the White pieces
are not ready for an attack on Black's King.
It is difficult,
though, to find a sensible plan, as the White pieces have so little
mobility.
It would perhaps be best to
—K
play R
and Kt— K 4.
Kt-Q 5
II
R—K I
13. B— K B I
14. Q—Kt I
Q-B 4
B-Q3
12.
?
m^^
1
^S32K?
V/^^^//
(i'i'"'''//
Wi
IMi
mm.
Wi^^
WM
^^
C 2 S_mmIIIWM
^
,
Wa
»'&''¥'S
M5fi
wm.
m.
'm^.^/wM
Diag. 146.
i,
B—B i,
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
229
The purpose of this move is not clear. The advance of the
Kt P could only be condoned by a desire to obtain an open
If White wanted
it now.
file, and it seems illogical to protect
have moved the
not
need
he
Kt
his
K
of
to escape the pinning
prevented the
this
and
effected
have
Queen. KtxKt would
King's side from being laid bare.
White's game would still have been bad, particularly as the
B, but
opens the diagonal for the Black
at
exchange
K
Q 4
the move in the text has even a worse effect.
Mieses concludes
the game with an elegant sacrifice.
14
....
15. PxKt
pPxP
17. KxB
R— K2
16.
KtxR
PxB
K_R I
KtxKt ch
P—K5I
BxPch
QxPch
RxR
QxKt
Q— K4ch
R—K I
Black has wrought fearful havoc in the White ranks, and
of the
the defenceless King cannot withstand the onslaught
three White pieces for long.
23.
24.
25.
threatening
p_Q B 4
K—Kt I
K—R 2
Kt—R 4
Q—Q 5 ch
R—K 7
Q—R 5 ch, Q— B 7 ch, and mate at Kt 7 or R 7.
Q—K 4 ch
26. Q—R I
QxPch
P—
27.
B4
Q—Q 5 ch
28. K— Kt I
Resigns.
Game No. 34
White
Black Niemzowitsch.
Caro-Kann Defence (compare p. 50).
:
Em. Lasker.
1.
2.
P-K 4
P-Q 4
:
P-Q B 3
P-Q 4
CHESS STRATEGY
230
4.
Kt— QB3
KtxP
5.
KtxKt
3.
Kt PxKt
B—B 4
Q-R 4 ch
P—K R 4
B— K 2
7. B— B 3
6.
8.
p_B 3
A deep conception.
fice of
If
PxP
Kt—B3
!
White accepts the proffered
a pawn, he loses time, as he must retire his
KR
sacri-
B before
open, he
Queen
Black
But there the
bringing out his Kt, and, moreover, the
file being
can only castle on the Q side.
If he refuses the sacrifice, the text
is ready for the attack.
move is still of value, as even then it is hardly advisable for
side, whilst Black can play B
R3
White to castle on the
as soon as it might be desirable to exchange White's Q B,
K
9-
—
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
18.
19-
Q-R5
Kt—K 4
Q—B 3
Kt—B 5
wm ^wM
*
231
,
I
^^
^^'^^"""'"'W
Diag. 147-
pawns by moving
Whilst Black was busy capturing two
concentrating the whole of
the Queen four times, White was
to win back the pawn with
his forces, and now threatens
lor
R_Kt 4 The move in the text anticipates the threat,
P
Kt
x
21
Kt 4 would be
4
now the answer to 20
ch, winmng the Q.
Kt-Q
?
?
7
4
22
4 ch
Q—R
R—
Q-B
;
.
)
Kt-K
K-R I
Kt—Kt5
22. B— B I
23. R—Kt 2
20.
21.
intending to get rid of the
Q 3-K 524.
25.
26.
K R—Kt I
Q—K 2
Kt—B 3
P—K B 4
B—Q3
R—Q 2
B—B 2
awkward Black Knight by Kt-
Kt-Q3
Kt—K 5
Q-R6
27. P—R 3
White appears to be in
" time " difficulties, or else he remains
an opportunity for making the
P-B 3 and
K 4.
passive, in order to give Black
pawn by
risky attempt to hold the extra
27
28.
29.
B— K 3
K—R 2
P—R3
KR-Qi
R—Ri
P—
;
CHESS STRATEGY
232
—
B 3.
If Black wants to play for a win, he must play P
In view of the favourable position of the White pieces, he
prefers to risk nothing and to avoid the weakening of position which follows upon practically every pawn move.
K R—Q I
R—K 1
RxR
R— Q I
K—R I
K—R 2
32. R— Kt 8
30.
31.
33.
34.
35.
RxRch
R-Kt 7
R— Kt 8 ch
R-Q 2
As long as Black plays steadily, White cannot hope for more
than a draw.
35
36.
37.
R— Q I
R—B I
R— Kt 7
Kt-B 3
P-B 4
In order to drive
off
the
Rook; White now enforces the
draw by a fine combination.
38.
B—Kt 5
39.
40.
RxP!
QxPch
!
Kt—R 4
RxR
R—Q2
Not K— Kt I on account of 41 Q— K 8 ch, K— R 2
42 Q X R, Q x Kt
43 Q X B, threatening B— K 7.
;
Draw.
Kt—K 5
For after BxKt there follows 42 Q— K 8 ch, K—B 2;
41.
!
43 Q X B ch, with perpetual check.
Both players have shown a deep positional insight, and the
game shows in an interesting manner how a preponderance
of material can be counterbalanced by the greater mobility
of the pieces.
Wliite
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
PxP
3. Kt-Q B 3
4.
KtxP
5-
Q-Q 3
233
Kt— K B 3
Queen's
White wishes to castle as soon as possible on the
file with the help of
side, in order to operate on the Queen's
the Rook.
P-K4
5
centre
Here Black loses two moves in bringing White's
sound.
Q Kt—
pawn away. The manoeuvre therefore is not
moves
developing
Q 2, Kt xKt, and Kt— B 3, or any other
would be preferable.
Q—R 4 ch
PxP
7. B-Q 2
6.
8. Castles
QxP
!
mm-P ^« ^^^
WM
mm
WmL
W « R
« « ^M y^
^
??i
jg.
Diag. 148.
White prepares a magnificent mating combination, which
can only be made possible at such an early stage, when the
opponent has utterly neglected his development.
KtxKt
8
KxQ
O— Q8chl
10. B— Kt 5 double ch K— B 2
11. B— Q 8 mate
A beautiful mate. If 11...K— K 11 R— Q 8 mate.
9.
!
i,
234
CHESS STRATEGY
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
235
have a far-reaching influence,
the unsatisfactory development
to the King's side by way
forces
be ab^to bring his
accessible by the d-PP----^^^
4 which is made
bear
has time to bring his Q B to
Black's Q P. before Black
ims
Kt 3 and B-Kt .
4 by
mit?'s
34 and
5 is
mediate threat (after
defend himmust
be
Kt
3,
risk
K B ack does not wish to
In tl^e meantime White can
X. Kt_B I.
sdf wHh
Queen s file. This
5. opemng the
I and threaten
postpones the efficiency o
3, which
atain necessitates
Kt and Q R have been brought
the Q B atKt , ,ntil White's Q
on these hues, and pronn for the attack. The game develops
the command
of the advantage of
"wm
Tk
^
We
P-Q
k
B-g
Q-K 2-K
P-K
P-K
R-K
pW
P-Q
P-B
R_Q
vfd"excdLnt example
of the centre.
g-K 2
^—^^
P-QB3
Q-B2
P-K 5
11. Q_K 2
10.
12.
13.
preparing P
QR-Qi
Q-K?
—Q Kt
3.
Kt—B I
K R—K I
15. Q-Kt4
14.
ig.
P-QI^t3
B-Kt 2
B-Kt 5
g__R 5^
17. 6__K4
R-B
as
4 ^^ threatened
Black cannot yet play P-Q B 4,
The Bishop which obstructs the
with an attack on K B 7.
ancl
the sonry retreat to Q L
Q would have no move, save
B-Q
B 4 18
4'
^
White would win speedily 17. .P-Q
:
ig
R-B
•
1
P--Q5. PxP; 20 KtxP, BxKt;
R and P.
R-Kt4
19. PxB
18.
Q xP was threatened.
20. Kt—Kt 5
21. Kt— K 4
Even the Knight is brought in via
21
22.
23.
21
BxB, attacking
BxKt
K—Ri
R—K 2
K4.
R-Qi^
R-Q 3
Kt—B 6
P-Q ^ 4
CHESS STRATEGY
236
—
QxP
ch and R Kt 8 mate.
Black cannot
capture the Kt because of Q x P ch and mate at Kt 7. But
the mate cannot be delayed much longer in view of the con-
threatening
centration of superior forces for the attack.
2324.
R-R3
Kt—Kt 3
Resigns.
There is no answer to Q- -Kt 5 andRxP.
Game No. 37
WTiite
Marshall.
Black Capablanca.
Queen's Gambit Declined (see p. 52).
:
I.
:
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
is
bad, because
237
PxP prevents the natural developm^^^^^^^^^
after castlmg
attack
K Kt at B 3, and Black can obtain an
by P— K B 4-5QxB
6. BxB
7. B-Q 3
This also is a good move, as
it
furthers development.
KtxKt
PxP
PxKt*
8.
the
in this case is not against
Giving up the centre pawn
which
on
the only diagonal
spir?tT'the^opening, as it opens
operate.
the Black Q B can
BxP
Q-B3
11. gt-K 2
S-85'3
P-QB3
9.
iS
B-Kt 2
KR
13- P-Q R 4
Castles
12. Castles
White intends to operate
move can only be good if
P-R 5possibly by K R-Kt i and
on h^ Queen's side,
the adoption
makes
Queen
White
Bnt the position of the
one thmg .t .s
T. Afferent plan compulsory.the For
Queen
*='„^^^here
'=='";^.\%'^^;
to concentrate forces
other hand
the
On
side.
Kmg's
the
therefore in this case, on
to could not be P"* -*» -7*^^
referred
mani^uvre
he
P-Q B 4 and
Black can prevent P-R 5 by
This
raW
here because
P—
taking
K. 4,
A fairly obvious course was to play answered
by
be
then
would
B
4
possession of the centre. P-Q
Kt—B ^
Rooks would be very effective
initiate a King s
In this game White does
1 and K i.
at
13... P-Q R 4 .s clearly a
tL^attack subsequently, and thus
Tq
White
5 after which the
lost move.
^__^^ ^
Kt-B3
I'.Q-K^'S
15.
Q R— B I
Kt—B 4
The tempting move of P-K 4
xB
cannot be P^ed because
Kt-R
P
4 .^^
17 P
and
P
Kt
X
P,
P
x
threatens
The move in the text
of 16
Kt-Q 5, Q-Q I
;
B-R2
17. K R— K I
16.
:
K R-Q
R X B.
KR-Qi
Kt-R 4
i.
CHESS STRATEGY
238
This threatens B
—B 3 attacking the R P. White decides
to yield the same at once, thinking quite rightly that a direct
attack must have good chances, as Black gets two pieces out
of play in capturing the pawn.
18.
19.
B-B 3
Q R-Q I
Q-Kt 4
Black cannot take the pawn yet, because of Kt x P and
BxPch.
19
20.
P—Q 5
P-B5
?
"Wm.
H^
il
'^
M
i III i
X
WM
W^A
w^,^-
WM
m^% ^ ^^1
Diag. 151.
There is no need to play for violent comphcations. The
course was to open the way to the King's side for
the Rooks by P K 4. The continuation could have been
Kt 3 22
P 21 Kt—R 5,
K 5.
K 4,
20
followed by Kt B 6, with a strong attack;
23
logical
—
P—
BxR
BxR
RxB
;
also after 21... P
are good.
—B
After the
:
P—
;
—
3,
22 R
—Q
2,
P—
;
White's attacking chances
move in the text, Black could get an
advantage by simply exchanging:
20...PxP;
21
KtxP,
24Q— KB5,
BxKt; 22RxB,RxR; 23 QxRch. R—
taking
the
R
P, however,
In
R
6.
Kt
Q—
P— 3 25 Q—B 2,
Q i;
;
Black incurs grave risks.
?,0
239
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
and K R 3 ve^
Black finds the weaknesses at his K B 3
of 25 R X R,
because
once,
at
R X P would lose
troublesome.
QxR; 26Q—R6!
25. Kt— B6
RxP
QxR
RxR
27. B— Kt I
26.
Q R 4 would have been answered by K —Kt 2.
Kt—B3
27
pieces for the
Black must try to bring back his minor
time, the end-game
If he succeeds in doing that in
defence.
side.
is easily won on the Queen's
R—Q I
B—B 5
of Q—R 6.
because
Not PxB
29. P— K R 4
28.
By ex
White's attacking resources seem inexhaustible.
way
this
in
back
changing Queens he could have got his pa\\Ti
30 BxKt,
6)
I (RxB ?, 30
7,
29
B-Q
Q-R
Q-B
:
BxB
;
3iQxQP,Q-Q3; 32Kt-Q7,QxQ; 33KtxQ,B-Ki;
But even then Black would mamtam a
34 KtxQBP.
of his passed
superiority in the end-game owing to the freedom
after
seventh
the
at
pawn, and because he can post his Rook
win
to
not
prefers
This explains why Marshall
P_q' Kt 4.
attack with a
back his pawTi, but to enter upon a violent
right move in
the
finds
doubtful issue. However, Capablanca
game.
the
wns
finally
all the ensuing compUcations, and
m m "*
*
WM 5
€
'WM.
WM A W|
JiW,*- ^^„„ 1
,
%i,
B ff 51
*JJlil
I
I
e;^^
Diag. 152.
'ili^A^
;
CHESS STRATEGY
240
29
30.
31.
32.
Kt— K 2
Q—B 2
K—Kt I
Kt— K 4
Q_B 6 ch
B— K 6
This is now compulsory. If White loses time in withdrawKt Q 4 and
ing the B, Black consolidates his position by
:
Q—K
—
2.
PxB
32
R—B I
is
refuted by 33
33.
Better than
Kt— Kt 5
!,
P xB
34 Q xR, etc.
;
QxKPch
Kt—Kt 5, for after Kt—Q 4, 34 QxP ch,
the Black King finds a safe retreat at Kt 2.
33
34.
35.
K—Bi
Kt—Kt I
Kt— Kt 5
P-B 4
in order to open the file for the Rook.
35
36.
R— Ki
R— K2
K— Kt 2
B— K I
K—R I
PxP
R—B I ch
P—R 5
39. P— R 6 ch
37.
38.
Kt xP fails on account of Q
40.
—B 6
ch.
Q-Q 6
\^Tiite takes all possible advantage from the position, but
cannot bring home his attack, as Black has concentrated his
Black must still be careful to avoid a
forces for the defence.
mate,5.^.QxQ?; 4iPxQ,RxP; 42 R— B 7 or 41. .R— Q 2
.
42
R—B
8.
Q-B4
40
41-
Q-Q 4
—
Here White could have tried Q X Q and R B 8. There was
then a permanent threat of R x B, e.g. 41 Q X Q, P X Q
;
42
R—B
8,
RxP
;
43 Kt—B 3,
R—K 2
;
44 Kt— Kt 5, etc.
It seems as if Black would have to give up the piece again by
—
.R R 5 in order to win. White, however, would then have
drawing chances, which would have been a fitting conclusion
to this wonderful game.
43.
.
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
RxP
41.
42.
241
R— K 2
Q-Q7
Resigns.
Game No. 38
Black: Teichmann.
Queen's Gambit Declined.
Q 4
4
White: Rotlewi.
1.
2.
P—
Kt-K B 3
P— K 3
P_Q
Kt— K B 3
P— B 4
Kt-B 3
5. B— Kt 5
3.
Q Kt-Q 2
4.
B— K 2
against Ed. Lasker in New
Capablanca tried 5...B— Kt 5
was
6 P— K 3, P— B 4
continuation
The
York, 1915.
Q—
Kt
3.
8
7 B— Q 3. Q— R 4
wms the
The correct move is here 8 Castles. If Black
B P,
pawn by B X Kt 9 P X B. Q P X P 10 B X P, Q X
;
:
;
;
Q—
R—
;
-^4.
B i,
White obtains a strong attack, e.g., 11
P)
5, with
P
X
13
B
13
(Kt
X
B
P
X
Kt.
12 B X
Kt— Kt 3, 14 P X P, P X P
this possible continuation 13
Q 6, with a strong attack.
i^
Castles
6.
3
B 4
2
7.
side, and to follow
Queen's
the
on
White intends to castle
pawns. Although
side
King's
the
by
this up with a storm
;
;
P-Q
;
Q—
p_K
Q_B
P—
Rubinstein has on many occasions been successful
with this
where Kings have
form of attack, it is open to criticism. For,
King which has
the
on
attack
the
wings,
castled on different
successful.
castled on the Q side should be more
mm
m.
wm
Wa
^ mm
wm
I
km
TS
Diag. 153.
;
242
CHESS STRATEGY
This is much stronger than P— Q Kt 3 and B— Kt 2, as
then the Black Queen cannot participate in the attack quickly
enough. As pointed out before, speed is the first consideration
for the attack, whenever the Kings have castled on different
wings. An interesting counterpart to the present game is
found in a game won by Rubinstein from Teichmann (Match,
Kt3;8PxP, PxP;9 B— Q 3,
P—B 5
P— K
P—
Vienna, 1908) 7...P— Q
R 4,
B 4 11
Kt 2 10 Castles Q R,
file)
B
of
the
12 B
opening
the
in
lay
Q
(the only hope
B—
;
;
;
?
—B
5,
R—K i; 13BXK Kt, KtxB; 14 P— K Kt B— Q 3;
Kt—K 5 16 P—R Q— K 2 17 Q R—Kt
15 P— Kt
18
B xP ch K xB 19 P— Kt 6 ch, K— Kt i
R
P_Q 3
4,
^,
5,
;
!,
;
20 KtxKt, PxKt;
23 R—R 8 ch, K X P
i,
;
;
21P— R6, P— B3; 22PXP, PxKt;
24 R— R 7 ch, and Black resigned a
;
few moves later.
8.
Castles
9.
PxQP
White loses time in the centre.
ceed at once with
Q— R 4
It
was imperative to pro-
P—K Kt 4 followed by B x Kt, P— Kt 5 and
P— K R 4.
9
PxP
11. Kt-Q 4
10.
12.
It
K— Kt I
KPxP
B-K 3
KtxP
would be too risky to leave both King and Queen on
the Q B file.
12
13-
B— Q 3
The threat was
P
:
QR— B
B x Kt and B x P ch.
—K Kt 4 and P— K R 4 instead
I
P— K R 3
Had White played
of effecting exchanges in the
centre, Black would not have been able to afford this weaken-
ing move.
But now Black wins the game on the other wing,
before White is able to make use of the weakness thus created.
14.
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
243
The Queen must leave the Q B file without delay, as Kt— K 5
Black's game is aheady superior; with the
is threatened.
Queen, White has no piece available for the
the
of
exception
attack on the opposing King.
17
18.
R-Q3
R— Q B I
R—R 3
Now White must again provide against Black's Kt— K 5,
as White's Q Kt is needed for the defence of Q R 2.
19.
P—B 3
R—Q I
Black intends to move his B and then to advance his K P
is
with an attack on the Queen. The object of the text move
the
on
attack
to prevent White from saving himself by an
Rook (Q—B 5).
20.
R—B 2
BxKt
By this exchange Black achieves his object of driving off
his R P
the Knight by P— Q 5, but White has time to give
prehave
would
Black
further protection by P— Q Kt 3. This,
vented by playing
B—Kt 4 instead of the text move,
e.g.
21P—B4,P— K4; 22Q—B5,PxKt; 23PxP,B—B3;
24PxKt, P— Q5, etc.
21.
PxB
Q—Kt4
23. QxP
24. Q— K 5
22.
P—K4
PxP
Kt—K3
This delays the fatal advance of the Q P for one move.
24
25.
26.
P-Q Kt 3
Kt— K 4
R—Q 2
R— Q B I
29. Q— Kt 2
30. K— R I
27.
28.
P-QKt4
P-Q 5
P— Q 6
Kt— Q 5
Kt—B 7
Kt— R 6 ch
Kt—B 7 ch
CHESS STRATEGY
244
31.
32.
33.
Kt—R 6 ch
Kt—B 7 ch
K—Kt I
K—R I
K-Kt I
Diag. 154-
Black does not play for a draw, but only wishes
to gain
^
^„
R-QB3
time.
33
at
The intention is to double Rooks and to force an entry
B 7. P— Kt 5 would not be good. The White Rook would
the Q P.
no longer be attacked, and the Knight could attack
34.
R (B I)—Q I
K R— Q B i
Now that the White Rook has left the Q B file, one Rook
ch
would be sufficient to force an entry at B 7, and Kt—R 6
34...
P—Kt 5 could have been played at once,
Kt
P—
(preventing
Q
4)
P—Kt 5
Kt—R
35 K—R
36Kt—B2,R—B7; 37RxR,PxR; 38 R-Q B Q-Kt 3
by RxR ch, Q— Q 5 ch and
3g Kt— K 4, R—Q 8 followed
P—B 8 mate.
Kt—R 6 ch
35- RxP
P—Kt5
36. K—R I
Q-K 4
37- R-Q 7
followed by
6 ch
e.g.
i,
;
;
i.
!
If
QxQ, Black mates in three.
38. R— Q 8 ch
39.
40.
RxR ch
R-Q I
RxR
K—R2
QxQch
I
;
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
245
Q—B 2 only
better.
Curiously enough there is nothing
the same end-game
and
Queens
of
exchange
leads to the
Black, as the permanent
which, however, is an easy win for
tied to the first rank,
mating threat keeps the Wliite Rook
to capture aU the White pa^vois.
whilst the Black King threatens
the exchange of Queens with the
If
Q_B 2 White forces
Q"Q
R—
Q—
2,
B 7 42
Q 3.
41
and
ch
Kt-B
of
6
threat
8 ch
43 K-Kt 2, with a
play
to
13
7 en,
mate. Black therefore would have
following combination
R-B
Q_R 7
:
;
Q—
;
etc., as in the game.
41.
5-g7ch
RxP
KxQ
42. K—Ri
43. R— R I
P-Kt 4
K-Kt 2
K-Kt 3
P-Q R 4
I4. Kt-B 6 ch
4
45.
46. Kt-Q 6
Kt-K
the White
We have now a position with a forced move.etc.If Therefore
4-B 5.
Knight moves, there follows K-B
voluntarily.
P
his
R
White gives up
47.
48.
R— QBi
RxP
Kt—K 5 ch
Kt— Kt 4
K—Kt 2
R—K 7
R—K 8 ch
Kt-R 6
K—B I
R—K 7 ch
Kt-Kt 4
Kt-B 4
Now Kt—B 6 and R xP mate are threatened.
49.
50.
5152.
R_B 5
K-Kt 2
R—B 7 ch
R—B I
55 K— R I
53-
54-
56.
K-Kt
Kt—B 7 ch
Kt—R 6 ch
I
Black again appears to be short of
.7.
Kt—Kt 4
K— R I
fs. R-B 5
59. K-Kt 2
60. R-B I
Now
after the sixtieth
time.
^-W""^
Kt-R 6
R-K 7 ch
move Black has again plenty of
time, and can prepare the final
combination at leisure.
CHESS STRATEGY
246
61.
247
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Kt
xP,
White cannot win the Q P by 10 P xP, P xP 11
KtxKt; 12 QxKt, because BxP ch wins the Queen.
;
up the
been
have
would
Q R for the attack on the Q P. However,
Black
as
P,
P
first
by
X
more correct to fix the object of attack
playing PxP, after
could now cross White's intentions by
by occupymg the
move
a
which he would sooner or later gain
to retreat.
Queen
White
the
file with a Rook, and forcing
The text' move is played with the intention of bringing
it
Q
Q-K2!
10
Black offers to give up his Queen's Pawn. If White
Queen's file will become
the sacrifice, Black's attack on the
accepts
bringing his Queen out
deadly as White must lose a move in
Rook. The White Kmg has
of the line of action of the hostile
P, P X P
12 Kt x P,
then no time to get into safety, e.g. 11 P X
i
3 followed
14 Q-Kt 3,
Kt xKt 13 Q xKt,
;
R-Q
;
B-K
;
by KtxP, etc.
B-Q 3
i, Castles)
Here again PxP (followed by B— K 2, R— Q
m my
indicated
as
move,
would have avoided the loss of a
II.
?
Now White loses yet another move, as
note to move 10.
taken two moves
Black exchanges pawns and the Bishop has
B.
the Black
of
case
the
in
only
to reach B 4, as against one
fatal,
be
should
stages
opening
the
The loss of two moves in
Rubinstein gives a striking example in the present
K
and of this
game.
PxP
P-QKt4
g-g/
B— Kt 2
II
BxP
13- B-Q 3
12.
14.
Q_K 2
15. Castles
KR
Kt— K 4
move is
The advantage which Black obtains by his last
Diag.
(compare
36).
opening
this
generally gained by White in
has
Black
and
moves
two
lost
But in the game White has
the
acting
on
Rook
a
moreover
assumed the offensive, having
Qfile.
KtxKt
17. P—B 4
16.
BxKt
;
CHESS STRATEGY
B x P ch followed by Q— Q 3 ch and
Black's threat was
replies
17 K R— Q i the answer is Q— B 2
Q xB. If WOiite
and the Kt. The text move is
P
the
R
attacking both
necessary to advance the K P to
be
will
as
it
unsatisfactory,
24S
:
:
K 4 or K 5, where
it
will
block the diagonal of one of the
Bishops.
B—B2
QR— Bi
B— Kt 3 ch
17
P— K 4
19. P— K 5
18.
20.
K—R I
Kt— Kt 5
!
!
Diag. 156.
The beginning of magnificent sacrifices. 21 QxKt cannot be
played because of R X B and R— Q 7, etc.
21.
22.
B— K 4
P— Kt 3
Q—R 5
P— R 3 Black wins also in fine style R x Kt
23QxKt,QxQ; 24PxQ,BxB; 25 B x R, R—Q 6 threator, 23 B xR, B xB
ening R— R 6 mate
24 Q xB, Q— Kt 6
After
:
Q—R 5 mate.
22
23.
*
PxQ
24.
QxR
25.
Q-Kt 2
and mate at R 7.
RxKt
R-Q 7
!
;
;
;
25 P X Kt,
!
1
!
!
BxBch
R—R6
!
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
249
Game No. 40
White
Rubinstein.
Black
:
CapaWanca.
Queen's Gambit Declined.
P— Q4
P-QB4
P—K3
KPxP
Kt—O B
B—K3
B—K2
P— Q4
Kt— KB
3- P—B4
4- PxQP
5- Kt— B3
6. P— KKt
7- B— Kt 2
I.
2.
:
R—Bi
8. Castles
It rather
This move is not satisfactory at this juncture.
similar
in
to
resorted
helps a combination which is frequently
subseand
Black Q B
positions, namely, the exchange of the
diagonal
the
on
B
quent pressure on the K P by the White
been played, after
have
should
B
8...Kt—
3
8.
B
3_Q
Yi R
K
w%
Diag. 157-
which White could hardly be said to
possess any advantage, e.g.
B-K 3. Kt-K Kt or 9 P-Q ^3,
Q B-Kt 5, Kt-K
After 9 P xP. howB-Kt
10
5, B-K 2.
or 9 P XP, B xP
5. or 9
5,
;
ever
it
would be weak to recapture with
the Queen.
In a
CHESS STRATEGY
250
game E. Cohn
—Ed. Lasker (match 1909) there followed:
9...
Q— R 4; 10 Kt— K Kt 5, QxP; II B—K 3, Q— R 4; 12
Q— Kt 3, after which Black had to give up a pawn already
R 13 Kt xB, P xKt 14 B—R 3, etc.
Castles Q
;
;
Q.
:
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
PxKt
17
If
251
R xKt, White exchanges Queens and plays B xP
0—^7
18. QxB
1920.
ch.
Kt-Q 5
Q-Kt 5
Q-Q 3
exchange of Queens.
With an extra pawn White forces the
P loses the Knight on
Black cannot prevent it, as 20...QxKt
20...Q-Kt
5 loses the Q P by
account of 21 K R-Kt i, and
Q I and B—K 6 ch.
21 K
R—
20
21.
22.
QxQ,,
KR-Ki
PxQ
B— Kt 4
Black Rook
K R—K I would not prevent the entry of the
i, R-K 7;
B
Kt-B 7; 23 RxR ch, RxR; 24 R-Q
:
Black would win the pawn back and
end-game xvith a Knight against a
niight even succeed in the
2c
B—Kt 4 R—Q 7.
Bishop.
^
22
23.
24.
KR—Ki
RxR
R-Q_ 3
RxR
R-QKt3
B 3, and keep the
Black should first play his King to K
the
that
Not
Q P is of paramount
5Rook away from his
K
But
the Q Kt P fully makes up
importance
from his dommatmg position,
as played the Knight is driven
No doubt even
into play.
gets
and the badly placed Bishop
and it requires
difficult,
most
is
ending
after the text move the
issue.
successful
a
to
it
bring
Rubinstein's fuU powers to
for its loss.
;
R—K5
RxP
B—K6ch
^
27
28. R—B 5 ch
29. B—B 7 ch
25.
26.
30-
B-B 4
RxP
Kt—B3
K—Bi
K—K I
K— Q 2
P-Q R 3
the Q side. To
Black's only chance is his extra pawn on
3i
30...K—
by
B
B 7.
Q3
exchange the Kt for the
where
time
much
too
take
would
Kt
Kt P,
4 32
side in the
the
clear
would
White
time' is all-important.
;
K
•
RxK
xB
R—
K
Kt—
CHESS STRATEGY
252
meantime, push on his K R P, and ultimately give up his R
for Black's remaining P, as soon as the latter runs into Queen,
after which the three passed pawns win easily against the
Generally speaking it is wise, in R endings Hke the
Rook.
present one, to advance pawns on the side where there is an
extra pawn, in order to get a passed pawn as soon as possible.
Then the hostile Rook has to look after that pawn lest it should
queen, and the greater mobility of one's own Rook often saves
the game even when opposed by a preponderance of pawns.
31.
253
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
4P=Kt
MB
6. Castles
?^,f ,3
3
PxQP
II.
The most natural move
to which tl^%^-fj^;i;^,!!l^'^;
P-B 4 _
^^f
attempt ii...PxQ P, 12
Q P, because of 13 BxB,
the
6. weakening
^5
PxP, ^Lr
K"/^p
^^^^^_ ^^
followed by
P xKt, Kt xP
U X^ ;
^
^4
16 Kt—B 4 and Kt— Q
;
b.
KPxP
jj
12.
Kt—R 4
P-Kt 3.
weakening move
Tn order to provoke Black's
d.agona.
JveWechances oi attach o" «,e long
:
;tt
Jl
n
R
T?
lu
moves. ^ '^
White gives up two clear
much to
in his development,
to'J Lsiderably'ahead
T
TC
8
Wliite's disadvantage.
12
13'.
P-^^ 3
'.
QR-Qsq
KKi-B3
of 14 P xP. P
Not Kt-K 5 yet, on account
xP ?
;
i5 B xKt.
PxB; i6KtxP.
14.
PxP
and a satisfactory conposition is uncomfortable,
White'ss posiuoii
White
might
p„<,siblv passive resistance
tinuation is hard to find. ^0^!^'^^^ P^l^!'
^^ Kt—B ii—
Q-K 2. K R-Q
m
sMe but allows Black
thus
the best plan,
have been tn
p
,^
Seen's
i.
:
Kt
^
operations on the
^ preliminary to
the centre.
too much scope
14
15.
PxP
B—Kt 5
White wishes to get rid of
ports the advance of
P—Q 5-
supthe Black Knight which
CHESS STRATEGY
254
Kt— K5
15
BxB
BxKt
16.
Q-B 2
17.
WTiite has no idea of the threatened disaster, or he would
have played P K Kt 3. Even then, however. Black has the
better game ^^•ith two Bishops, and the Q and Kt better placed.
—
KtxKt
17
The beginning of a brilliant mating combination.
18.
P— Q5
KtxKt
!
Black would have played the same move
if
\\Tiite
had
retaken with the Queen.
19.
PxP
—K
P
4 was comparatively the best move, although Black's
attack would have become overwhelming after P B 4, e.g.
20
—
P— B 3, B—B 5, etc.
m
mi
AM
9
fli^^^
I
'S:
^
^ ^
WM
§„.,.
^
1
Diag. 159.
19
20.
21.
KxB
K— Kt I
BxPch!!
Q-R 5 ch
BxP!
Emanuel Lasker won a celebrated game from Bauer (Amsterdam, 1889) with a similar sacrifice of two Bishops, and
very hkely this is the reason why Tarrasch's beautiful
ILLUSTR.\Tr/E GAMES
255
briUiancy prize at Petro-
game only earned him the second
grad (1914)-
P—B 3
22.
L R-Q 4 24 Q
K xB, then Q-Kt 5 ch 23 K-RK-Kt
ch
2, Q-Kt 4
R-R 4 ch 25 QxR, QxQ ch 26
xP,
^
;
If
;
;
and QxKt.
KR— Ki
22
Not Q
—Kt
6,
because of Kt
—K
4.
Kt-K 4
K-B2
ti O— B \
Q-g 8 ch
BxR
Q—Kt 7 ch
kJv^3
28:PxR
RxKtch!
P-B5ch
23.
24.
27
With Q— Kt 6 ch Black mates two
KxP
29.
moves earUer.
S~"?^'k
§-57ch
K-K5
31. K-K 6
30.
R-K I ch
Resigns.
If
K-Q 7, B-Kt 4 mate,
if
K-B 6, Q-R 5 mate.^
Game No. 42
Black
Capablanca.
White
:
Aljechin.
Queen's Gambit Dechned (see p. 57)
I,
p__Q 4
o.
p__K 3
P—Q 4
P-QB3
Rt—B 3
P-K 3^
2.P-QB4
4.
5.
1
Kt-K B 3
Q Kt-Q 2
T-K B 4.
B-Q 3, P-Q Kt 3 & ^^ y k 3
B-K 2 5^-'^^'!^%^-\^\''l'lJ({il
Kt-Q 2; 8 Castles, Castles; 9 Kt-K 2, Q-K 42,
, Kt-B 3
n
L' Kt-Ks KtxKt; 12 BxKt, Q-B 3 I3
Emanuel Lasker-Bauer:
P-O Kt
T.
Q Kt-Q 2
P-K 3
;
;
n ?^ ,
~^t Kt ,^
Q_R 3
;
21
R X Q, K X R
M
i
4 B-Kt 2.
,
;
;
22
Q-Q
7,
and White won.
,
—
CHESS STRATEGY
256
6.
B-Q 3
B—K2
7.
Castles
Castles
8.
Q— B 2
^^M Kww
Hi Ate
^i;
m^m^m^m^
wm^'^'fm » ill
2 ^^ ^
^ai
i
-
'mm
'
H
I fi Bl .,..B
W/
Diag. 160.
Black's difficulty is the development of his Q B, particuIf
4.
larly after White's last move, which prevents P
or
Queen
the
plays
either
and
now Q B 2 White
4
9 P
—K
—K
—
the Knight bear on
K 5, e.g. 9...P xK P
II Q Kt— Kt 5, B— Q 3
;
10 Kt xP,
P—K 4
;
P—
12
B 5, etc.
his Q B at
must
develop
therefore
Black
;
Kt 2 with P
Having
moved
the
Kt
2
and
P—
B
Kt
B—
4.
Q B P twice,
3,
Q
Black is a move behind the development usual in this opening.
However, it would have been the lesser evil.
In the present
game the Bishop does not get into play in time.
8
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
257
nevertheless, as the threat Q— B 3— R
3 provokes a weakening pawn move.
P— Kt3
12
13.
K—Kt 2
K Kt—B 3
preventing the entry of the B at R 6.
14.
15.
16.
B—K Kt 5
Q R—B I
Q Kt— Q 4
B—Q 2
Q—Q 2
Kt—Kt I
It should be noted how the weakness at K R
3 acts to the
detriment of Black's game. The text move covers the weak
square, but at the same time brings the Kt out of play. White
in consequence gets the upper-hand on the Queen's side, and
the Knight cannot return in time.
17.
BxB
QxB
would be no use taking with the K Kt, as the threat
Kt—Kt 4 and
R 6 must be guarded against. If the other
It
Q—
Kt captures there follows
and K
R—B
18
:
B—K
4,
R—Kt i
;
lo R
B3
i.
18.
B— K 4
B— Kt 4
This drives the Rook to a better square, but already now
there
is
no satisfactory move.
best to parry the threat of
It
would perhaps have been
BxKt and R—B 7 by playing
Q— Q 3. although the pawn would have to recapture after
19 B X Kt, because of 20 R—B 5 and K R— B i. The chanca
of bearing on the Q P through the open file, which was probably Black's intention all along, would then be lost. After
the text move, however. White takes possession of the seventh
rank, and Black's game collapses quickly.
19.
20.
K R—K I
BxKt
Q—Q 3
PxB
P—Q R 3
QxQ
P—R3
Q-R 5
Q-B7
23. RxQ
Kt—Kt 5 and Kt—K 6 ch was threatened.
24. RxP
QR—Bi
25. P—Q Kt 3
R— B 7
26. P— Q R 4
B—K 7
27. Kt— R 4
P— K R 4
21.
22.
!
Q
CHESS STRATEGY
258
Ilie Kt P cannot be saved.
White
:
R—Ki
KKtxP
28.
Resigns.
R X P ch
Game No. 43
29.
Black : Bernstein.
Capablanca.
Declined.
Gambit
Queen's
P-Q4
Kt— K B 3
P—B 4
P-Q4
Kt— K B 3
P—K 3
B— Kt 5
P—K 3
B—O3
B— K 2
Q Kt-Q 2
Kt-B 3
P— B 3
PxP
Before initiating this manoeuvre, which aims at the
development of the Queen's wing, Black should castle, as
otherwise the King is exposed to dangerous and immediate
attacks in the centre.
8.
9.
P— Kt4
BxB P
B-Q3
P-QR3
The system of opening chosen by Black has been tried
It seems to be somewhat artificial, as the
frequently of late.
Q B Pawn takes two moves to get to his fourth. On the other
hand the pawn formation at Q R 3, Q Kt 4, and Q B 4
is
attained, whilst
e.g. 6. ..Castles ;
can be prevented in other variations,
it
7 B— Q 3, P x P 8 B x P, P— Q R 3 9 P—
;
R4.
10.
P— K 4
:
P— K4
m.^m.jt§My^^
1^
Mi i. mm
i*
m
m w
WiM
ii
m.
mm
wrm>
T-'^'y
Diag. 161.
Black's only plausible move here seems to
be P- -B 4, and
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
259
many critics have remarked that after 11 P— K 5, PxP
13 B x Kt,
12 Kt— K4 (if PxKt, PxKt) Kt X Kt;
the
Q-B
P.
X
B
4
15 Q
R-Q Kt I 14 B X B, Q X
the
not
is
this
However,
even.
been
game would have
the
capture
not
does
White
move
15th
case, for on the
no
has
Black
and
Kt
the
with
but
pawn with the Q
!
;
;
;
he had castled he could play
I5,..B— Kt 2 which now is not available because of 16 Kt-B 6, B X Kt 17 B X B, with an overwhelming advantage in
If
satisfactory continuation.
:
;
White's refutation of the text move is
position for White.
above criticism.
II.
PxP
If
Q—
Kt— Kt 5
B— K B 4 B— B 4
R—B after which Black
12.
B 2, White would play
i,
prise.
could not recapture the K P yet, as the Q B P is en
Kt— Q 5.
Kt
Kt
x
15
Kt,
Kt
X
14
13...K Kt X P
etc.
P,
R
x
B
Kt,
X
19
Q
Q_Q 3 16 B X
;
;
;
;
Q— B 2
P— B 3
13. Castles
B I
14.
R—
Again Kt X P is not feasible on account of the loss of
Q B P, as can be easily seen.
15.
PxP
B— Kt 3
Black's game cannot be saved. If 15... Kt (Kt 5)
17
Q 5.
there follows 16 Kt X Kt, Kt X Kt
..PxKt;
16.
or
19R
xB,
B;
18B X Kt,P X
x KP
Kt—
Q— Q 3
17Q— R5 ch,
;
P— Kt 3, 18 Q— R 6.
16. P— Kt 4
the
)
!
Now White initiates a brilliant attack, driving it home
takes the
without giving Black a moment's rest. If Black
e.g.
threats,
many
with
B4
pawn, White plays Kt— Q 4,
5)-B
(Kt
i7...Kt
or
3
Kt-K
6,
19
Kt-Q
P—
18
18 Kt—
5.
Q-Q 3
;
;
K 6, etc.
B—R 2
16
17-
BxKt P
The sacrifice is fairly obvious, as White obtains three pawns
and moreover drives the King into the field of
However, this does not detract from the beauty of
battle.
the game, which is full of brilliant phases.
for the piece,
RP X B
17
18.
kt X Kt P
Q— Q I
CHESS STRATEGY
19 Kt— Q 6 ch, K— K 2
Or Q— Kt 3
by
foUowed
Q— Q 6.
26o
;
20
Kt— B 5 ch.
K—Bi
Kt—Kt3
Kt— Q6ch
19.
20.
;
RxP
Kt—R 3 22 Kt x B, R X Kt
21 Q— Q
of no avail because
2)—
B 3
Kt
20...
etc.
Q
R—
(Q
23
Kt—R 3; 22 KtxP, or 21...Q— Q 2; 22
of 21 Q— Kt
K R—B etc.
21. B-R 4
Q-Q 2
QxR
22. KtxB!
The threat was
5,
:
;
is
6,
3,
I,
Not
RxKt because of 23 QxQ.
Now Black is a
whole
Rook ahead. But it is as much out of play as his Queen's
The King is driven into a mating net by the
side pieces.
concentration of superior White forces, and only escapes by
giving up the extra piece.
Q-K I
Q-Q 8 ch
23-
24.
B—K 7 ch
25.
26.
Kt—Q 6 ch
Kt—R 4 ch
K—B 2
K— Kt 3
K—R 4
K—R 3 there follows mate in three by 27 Kt (Q 6)—B 5 ch
28 Kt— Kt 3 ch
29 B— Kt 5 mate.
RxQ
27. KtxQ
K— R3
28. KtxPch
29. Kt (Kt 7)—B 5 ch K—R 4
30. P—K R 3
This threatens 31 P x Kt ch, K x P 32 P— B 3 ch, followed
by P—Kt 3 or Kt 4 mate. If Black plays 30 Q R— K Kt i,
White wins as follows 31 P x Ktch, RxP; 32 P—B 3, Kt— B i
ch; 33 K—R 2, KtxB; 34 PxR ch, KxP; 35 KtxKt,
K X Kt 36 R—B 7. If 30. .Kt—R 3 31 Kt—Kt 7 mate.
If
;
;
!
;
:
.
;
30.
;
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Kt—K 3 ch
P—R5
K—R4
P—Kt5
K—B3
P—R6
R—Bi
43- P— Kt 4 ch
44. R— B7
45. KxR
B-Q5
R—R7
B—R2
36.
3738.
Kt (R 4)-B 5
3940.
41.
42.
46.
K—B3
261
Kt-Q2
Kt—B3
R— Kt7
K—Kt4
RxPch
KtxKt P ch
Resigns.
Game No. 44
White
:
Dus Chotimirski.
Black
Queen's Pawn Game.
I.
P-Q 4
:
Vidmar.
;
CHESS STRATEGY
262
Wliethcr he supports the pawn with
Black forces matters with P B 3.
—
1
d
S
«r^
Kt
—B 3 or P— K B
4,
f w^ «ju 'WS
II <^
mm ^^ mmy x
i
I
.
,
iIi..*..M
mi
.
a 11
V///ZV//J
V///////A
m
m!.
W/^Z/A
o
?^
Diag. 162.
Now that the idea underlying White's opening strategy
has proved impracticable, he has difficulty in formulating a
P
Making the best of a bad job, he abandons his
plan.
powerful
obtains
a
Black
But
P.
in exchange for Black's
K
KR
pawn centre, a teUing advantage.
10.
KKtxP
B-Q3
BxKt
12. BxPch
13- Q—R 5 ch
14. QxKt
II.
15-
Q-R5
KtxB
KxB
K— Kt I
P—B3
Q-Kt3
Black wishes to provoke the advance of the Q Kt P and
Q B P in order to obtain a passed pawn (16 P—Q Kt 3, P— K 4
18 P—Q B 4, P— Q 5). In order to
17 Castles K R, Q—R 4
;
avoid this continuation. White takes his chance of castling on
the Queen's side. This turns out to Black's advantage. Indeed
In the ensuing double assault
it is a foregone conclusion.
by pawns. Black is several moves ahead, as the White
pawns concerned
squares.
in the
attack
are
still
on their
original
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
16. Castles
QR
P— K Kt 4
P—Q B 4
P_Kt5
20 QxP
17.
18.
263
P—K 4
P—Q 5
B—Q 2
PxKtP
^>^P„.
BPxPl
Black gives up his K P in order to get his
PxP
21
Finely played.
Q R into play with the gain of a move.
22.
QxP
23.
Q-Kt 3
K R—K I
24.
^—^^^r
R-K
Q
7
3,
K R—Kt I would also be of no avail because of Q—KinRthe
The move
B—
B
4.
threatening
K
B
Q—
3
25 Q_Q 3,
text puts an end to the agony.
RxKt!!
24
Resigns.
For after 25RxR,RxR; 26KxR,QxPch;
B—B 4 ch
;
28 R— K 4, Q—B 6 ch
;
29
27K—Q3.
K—K
2,
QxQ;
Black remains with an extra piece.
Game No. 45
White: Rubinstein.
Black: Spielmann.
Irregular Opening.
1.
P-Q 4
P-Q B 4
paths of
With this move Black tries to avoid well-trodden
peaceful
tournament practice. White can, at will, lead into a
Defence by
Queen's Gambit by 2 P— K 3 or into a Sicilian
P_K 4. It is more usual, however, to play P—Q 5, which
blocks up the Black centre to some extent.
after P— K 3 without
If 2 PxP, Black regains his pawn
any disadvantage.
2.
3-
P-Q 5
P-Q B 4
P-Q 3
CHESS STILMEGY
264
—
Coupled with 4 P K 4, this move is of doubtful value, as
Black gains command of White's Q 4. It is advisable to keep
the Q B P back, thus retaining the option of driving off a
Q B 3. Moreover, the White
hostile piece from Q 4 by
P—
KB
is
hemmed in by the pawn at Q B 4.
P— KKt3
B— Kt 2
P-K 3
3
P— K 4
5. B-Q 3
4.
The development of the K Kt is not desirable at B 3, where
would block the long diagonal. From K 2, however, it
commands K B 4, where it can take up a strong position after
the exchange of pawns in the centre, or else it can support the
advance of the K B P.
it
Kt—Q B 3
K Kt— K 2
6.
7.
Kt—K 2
—
Kt B 3 would have been slightly better, because the
Black Q Kt might play to his K 4.
7
P-B 4
9.
This
PxP
Kt—Q2
KPxP
8.
move weakens the King's
justified only
if
and would be
position,
there was a possibility of opening the file for
—
the Rook by P B 5. But Black has too strong a hold on his
B 4. The text move aims at preventing the exchange of
K
\Vhite's
K B through Black's Kt — K 4.
It would have
been
better to withdraw the B to B 2.
9
ID.
Kt— KB3
Kt— Kt 3
P— K R 4
!
Now White cannot enforce P—B 5, as Black can attack
the Knight by
—K R
P
4,
position at
P
—R
5.
Wliite cannot
prevent this with
as the Black Knight would take up a commanding
Kt 5.
Black's game is superior.
He can concen-
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
trate all his
265
minor pieces on the King's wing, while White's
Q B is ineffective on account of the ill-considered advance of
the K B P.
ii i
wAm
^
M Hi
A ^^
^P
^
,
^#
mm
^^
wm
i
^^
'^^ ^
^^^
W^A
Diag. 163.
II.
'^p
'v
CHESS STRATEGY
266
Black forfeits his chance of castUng, not a great loss under
on the
the circumstances. In any case his K R is needed
Queen's
the
on
castled
Rook's file, and Black would only have
side if at all.
17.
Q-B 3
—
Here P K R 3 was essential in order to prevent the further
advance of the K R P. The weakness at Kt 3 would not have
been so serious in the absence of a Black Knight. Now Black
become
forces the advance of White's K Kt P, and the Bishops
immediately effective.
17
18.
not P
—K Kt 4 on account
18
19.
20.
If
P—R6
P— K Kt 3
of
Q — R 5.
Q-Q2
B—Kt 5
B— Q 2
Q—B I
Q_Q 3, Black plays Q—B 4 and White cannot exchange
Queens because of B
—B 6 mate.
Q—B4
20
threatening Q
—B
7.
21.
Q R— B I
22.
K—Kt 2
B—B 3
B—K 3
Black must not exchange his valuable Bishop.
23.
24.
K R—K I
p_Kt 3
B—B 2
There is no answer to Black's threat of doubhng the Rooks
on the K file. If White plays Q B 2, Black's Queen effects
an entry at Q 6, after which he would double his Rooks, and
White's Bishop cannot be defended. After the text move,
Black forces the exchange of his two Rooks for the Queen.
—
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
267
conseGenerally speaking, this is no disadvantage, but in
it means a
King,
White
the
of
position
quence of the exposed
speedy loss for White.
24
RxR
RxR
27.
If
B—B6ch
B— Kt 7
BxQ
Q— Q6
K—Kt I
25.
26.
1
now R xB Black plays Q— B 6.
R— K 8
In order to play R— K 3
28.
if
Black plays B xKt.
Q-B6!
28
29
30
31
Q—R8ch
Q— Kt 7 ch
KxB
B— Kt I
K—Ki
QxBch
gxPch
32. K— Q2
Resigns
for the pawn queens.
Game No. 46
White
Black
G. A. Thomas.
:
:
Ed. Lasker.
Irregular Opening (compare Game No. 45).
P-Q4
P— Q 5
3. p_Q B 4
S-8^4
P— Q 3
P— K Kt 3
B— Kt 2
1.
2.
4.
5-
Kt—Q B 3
B-Q 2
B
This is not necessary. Black could hardly exchange
B 3 and
3 would bethe weakness at his
for the Kt
disadvantage.
come too serious a
his
KR
K
;
5
P-K3
6.
P_K4
7.
KtxPl
PxP
CHESS STRATEGY
268
In view of the fact that Black's position after
B P or
K P X P would be very promising, as all his pieces would be
easy to bring into play, White decides upon the sacrifice of a
pawn, in order to further his own development.
7-
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
269
Kt—K 2 should have been played here in order to play
answer to 16 Q—
xB
B
17 Q xB, B— Kt 5 with Kt—B 4, in
;
open to attack in consequence of his
broken King's side, but there is no demonstrable advantage
The text move is a mistake, and gives White
for White.
Kt
2.
Black
is
still
chances of a decisive attack.
16.
17.
18.
BxKt
KtxKt
PxB
BxB
Q—Kt4
BxPl
PxB, on account of 19 QxP ch, K—R i;
21 R— Kt 3, etc. 18...P—B 4 fails
20 QxP ch, K— Kt I
Of course not
;
because of 19
R—Kt 3.
19.
20.
B—K 4
P—B 4
P—B 4
!
!
This elegant continuation decides the game. If PxP,
WTiite simply plays 21
Q 3, and Black can hardly hope to
If the Queen
save the end-game, as his pawns are broken up.
21 PxP, and White obtains
retreats, however, there follows
B—
:
two passed pawns for the B and has the superior position.
20
PxP
22. RxRch
23. R—K B I
24. QxP
21.
25.
26.
R—B 4
K—B 2
QxQ
P—K 6
29. RxP
If K—B I, 30 P— Q 6.
2728.
Q—Kt2
QxR
Q—Kt 2
Q—Kt5
Q—Q 8 ch
Q—Q 5 ch
PxQ
B—R 3
R—Bich
PxB
R—B 3
R—B 7
R—K 7 ch
32. p_Q 6
He might play K— Q after which B— Kt 2 ch has points.
Resigns.
33. K— Q 3
30.
31.
K—K 3
K— K 4
5,
CHESS STRATEGY
270
Game No. 47
White
:
Black
Tartakower.
:
Asztalos.
Dutch Opening.
I.
It
P—Q 4
P—K B 4
has been tried to refute White's non-developing
mobilisation of
BxP.
first
— K 4 which leads to a rapid
the Black forces after 2 P x P, P— Q 3
3 P X P,
attack—called the From Gambit —does not
move by a pawn sacrifice
i. . .P
:
;
;
But this
seem to prevail against the best defence. In a match game,
Tartakower-Spielmann (Vienna, 1913), White won as follows
:
P— Q 4, P—Kt 5 6 Kt— K 5,
Kt—Q B 3 7 Kt xKt, PxKt 8 P— K Kt 3, P— K R 4
P—R 5 10 Q— 3, B— Q 2 11 Kt—B 3, R— Kt i;
9 B— Kt
12 Castles, PxP
14 B— B 4, BxB
13 PxP, P— Q B 4
16
Kt—
K
Q—
R
17 Kt x P, Kt— B 3
15 R X B, Q— Kt 4
3
4,
ch,
K—
KtxKt
Q—
K
Q i 20 RxB P,
18 KtxB,
4
19
R— K I 21 QxP, Q—K 6 ch 22 K—B Resigns.
When Black plays P—K B 4 in answer to i P — Q 4 we
have the Dutch Defence. After i P— Q 4, P— K B 4, WTiite
4 Kt— K B 3.
P— K Kt 4
;
5
;
;
;
;
2,
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
i,
;
;
—K
can also sacrifice a pawn by 2 P
4, and thereby obtain
a far more favourable position than Black does in From's
gambit, as he is a move to the good, having already advanced
2 P— K 4. PxP
3 Kt— Q B 3, Kt— K B 3
Q P,
P—B 3 or 4 B—Kt 5 and then P—B 3. If Black cap-
his
4
e.g.
;
;
K B P, White obtains a powerful attack. A drastic
example is found in the following little game, played by two
students in an academic tournament at Petrograd 4 P B 3,
tures the
—
:
PxP; 5 Kt xP, P— K 3 6 B— K Kt 5, B— K 2 7 B— Q 3,
Castles
8 Castles, P— Q Kt 3
10 B x
9 Kt— K 5, B— Kt 2
;
;
;
;
;
BxB; II BxP ch, KxB; 12 Q—R 5 ch, K—Kt i;
15 Kt— K 5
13 Kt—Kt 6, R—K I
14 Q— R 8 ch, K— B 2
ch, K— K 2
16 Q xP ch
B X Q 17 R—B 7 ch, K—Q 3
18 Kt—Kt 5 ch, K— Q 4
20 R— K i
19 P— B 4 ch, K—K 5
Kt.
;
;
;
!
;
!,
;
;
;
mate.
Black's best answer is to play P
(5 E.^Kt 5, B—B 4).
play P
—
Q 4 because of
— Q 4 after White's P—K B 3
not yet possible to
the threat
and
B x Kt, Q—R 5
If
4 B— Kt 5,
:
it is
ch,
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
271
In that case Black must first play P—Q B 3, after
again obtains a strong attack by P K B 3.
White
which
avoid the attacks which follow after i P Q 4,
can
Black
P—K 4, by playing P— K 3 on his first move,
2
K
B
P—
4
and then lead into the Datch defence with P— K B 4 on his
Q X Q P.
—
—
;
second move. He must, however, reckon with having to play
4.
the French defence which White can bring about with 2
P—K
P—K 3
P—K 3
3. Kt-K B 3
4. P-Q Kt 3
5. B—Kt 5
2.
P-Q B 4
Kt-Q B 3
Kt—B 3
B—
Q 2 here, as WTiite can exBlack should have played
change at B 6, leaving Black with a doubled pawn. This in
itself is not a drawback, but in the present position it is serious,
For
as Black will have difficulty in finding a place for his Q B.
there is no prospect of enforcing P
—K
4,
as White commands
that square in sufficient force.
B—K 2
6.
B— Kt 2
7.
Castles
Castles
BxQKt
9. Kt— K 5
10. P-Q 3
PxB
8.
Q—B 2
P-Q R 4
Black's attempt of capturing his K 4 by playing Kt — Q 2
—B
—
White would cross at once with Q Kt 4. With
the text move Black begins operations on the Q side, which is
quite correct, as White has the upper hand on the other wing.
and P
3,
11.
Q—K 2
White should have prevented the further advance of the
Black R P by II P Q R 4. This would have been sound
policy in any case, as the R file could not have been forced open
for the Black Rooks.
—
II
12.
Kt—Q2
P—R5
PxP
The capture is only of value if the file can be
Kt 2 and to
occupy the R file with Rooks and Queen. After the exchange
Premature.
held.
—
To that end it is first necessary to play B
CHESS STRATEGY
272
end-game because
of Rooks, Black is at a disadvantage for the
of the inefficiency of the
Q B.
m^^m'
^M * §M *
m0 IMI M'iWH
i
W Ml ^
i
W WM^iM
irt
Diag. 165.
If instead of the text move Black had driven off the Bishop
to B I with
P—R 6 (13 B—B 3 P— Q 5
?,
—
!
;
14 P xP, Kt— Q 4)
he could have enforced his P K 4, but in the long run White
would have captured the Q R P, and remained with a passed
pawn on the R file, a powerful weapon for the end-game, e.g.
B I, Kt— Q 2; 14 KtxKt, BxKt;
12...P— R 6; 13
B 4, foUowed by Kt— Kt i.
K B 3 16
K 4,
15
B—
P—
P—
;
P—
RPxP
RxR
15. P— K Kt 4
13.
14.
RxR
B— Kt2
The Black pieces being cut off from the K side. White is
free to attack.
15.
16.
1718.
19.
20.
R—Ri
RxRch
BxR
Q Kt-B 3
KtxKt
P— Kt 5
BxKt
P—B4
in order to prevent
Kt—Q2
Q-R4
the release of the
B by the pawn sacrifice
P—B 5 and P—B 4.
20
21.
K— B 2
B—Kt2
K—Bi
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
273
S—^ 3
P—R 4
p_R 5
24. P-R6
22.
B-Kt 2
P-Kt3
23.
By advancing his R P White has weakened
Black's
KB3
his Kt there and of
constant threat of estaUishing
with the
capturing the R P.
25.
K—B I
by time
move is superfluous and probably dictated
of
threat
the
with
The proper plan is Q-Q Kt 2
pressure.
B—B 7 or Kt 8 and Q—R 8 ch.
This
:
Q-R6
25
26.
Q—Q Kt 2
He plays his Kt
The end-game is a clear win for White.
B 6 or K 5. The effect is twofold.
to K Kt 4, threatening to reach
m
wm
mm
^wj
ill
wm #
d
P
W'«
I
t
ill i fi
1
WA
Diag. 166.
K
must remain near the
2 and his
Black must keep his B at
Kt
6 and captures the
to
marches
Q
B P White's King
cannot prevent the
Black
P.
Kt
his
Q
Q B pawns, queening
by attacking
White,
as
l,
by
this
White King from doing
B back to
the
force
time
any
at
could
his
B,
Black's Q B 4 with
The remainder of the game needs no comment.
2.
K
K
B-Q
his
K
QxQ
26
27.
28.
BxQ
Kt—R 2
B— Q3
K— K I
s
CHESS STRATEGY
274
29.
Kt— Kt 4
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
c
6.
«.
Kt-B 3
P_Q 3
B-K 3
Q-Q 2
10. B—K 2
i.
9-
11. Castles
12.
KR
Kt-Q I
275
B—K3
P-K B 3
Kt— K 2
P-Q B 4
Q Kt-B 3
Kt— Q 5
Castles
K Kt-B 3
13. P—B 3
Now Black has gained an advantage from the command
The advance of White's Q B P, which was necessiof his Q 5.
Knight, has
by the dominating position of the Black
" backward " pawn at Q 3.
left White with a
tated
13
....
14. Qxkt
If
KtxBch
R—Ki
now a general exchange takes place after P—Q 4, the
K P is lost through B— Q 4.
15.
Kt-R 4
White's counter attack on the King's side becomes
operations on the Queen's
ening, and Black must continue his
be called upon at any
may
as
he
care,
wing with the greatest
of the Kmg's
defence
the
for
pieces
time to concentrate his
threat-
"'"^-
„
16.
17.
18.
Kt—B 5
P—K Kt 4
Kt—B 2
B-KBi
K—R I
Q—Q 2
P—Q R 4
Black wishes to open up files on the Queen's side.
19.
P—Q R 3
Freeing the Q R.
19
20.
Q R— Q I
R-Q 2
RPxP
23. p_B 4
24. Q—B 3
21.
22.
P-QKt4
Q R— Kt I
P-Kt 5
KPxP
R—R 1
R—^ 7
on the Queen's
Before trying to push home his advantage
White's Q P,
of
weakness
the
by
side which is made possible
3:2
CHESS STRATEGY
276
White has colBlack should look after his King's side, where
After the text move the
lected an alarming array of forces.
Rook is quite out of play.
25.
P-Kt 3 ?
p_Kt 5
Diag. 167.
Black should simply play P x P with the following continua28
26 BxP, Kt— Q 5
27 KtxKt, QxKt
3,
Q Q 3. After the move in the text, White's attack is overwhelming.
tion
;
;
:
B—K
—
26.
Kt— Kt 4
!
White obtains a Rook and two pawns for his two Knights
an equivalent of material. In the present instance the exchange is of decisive advantage for White, as
Black must lose several moves to bring up his Rook for the
defence of his unguarded King.
;
this is in itself
26
-Kt6,
ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES
Not
277
BxP because of 34 R—K B 2, followed by K R—
K B sq.
34.
35.
B—B 3
R—K B 2
Q-Kt 4
The threat is to open the Rook's file by P—Kt 6 with an
attack on the King by the Rooks.
35
36.
R—Ki
QxR
RxR
BxR m order to play Q—R 4 might be better.
With
Black has winning chances on
But then White might evade the
exchange and proceed to seize the King's file with the Rook
the board,
account of his two Bishops.
the Queens
after 37
off
Q—B 4.
R—K 2
R— K 6
in order to play Q—Q Kt 2 or R
Q-Q 2
37.
38.
3g.
If
p_Kt6!
Q-Q Kt 2, 40 R—K 8
!,
ii
B—R I
2.
PxP
Q—R 2, 40 Q—R 4.
wins in either case.
40.
41.
Threatens
RxP
Q—KR2
Q-Kt 3
Q—K 5 oh.
41
42.
R—Kt 4!
0-^4
Resigns.
White
(
278
)
O t^ N fO
VO
^
.
'
o
•
CO
ro^*^
ro <0
....3?
CN
;fc
»r>
C/^
*
u%io VO
N N N N
o
O vri ^ N
O N M N
N CS C)
ir>
Tf Wl "^
279
(
)
N O O
f^ N N
•«*•
NMtS
f^NC^NNN
N
N N N
\j~i
vri Tj- i/^
.M
I
a<
CU
«
a
w
ii
I
l-l
•WW
w
o
o
I
•4 44
o
w
Pi
W
c»
w
|C«
•i
•X |i
I
I
I
pq
tr, CO
MP?
I
I
cu
CO ro fO to
'5
m
en
I
I
I
I
I
i ti
'J
pq
T^pq
:
:«
i
i
:
:W
CQcQ
I
:
I
I
(^
I
I
I
I
I
M M M
.
fo
INDEX
Alapin, S., 2oS, 215
Aljechin, A., 164, 174. 196. 255
Amateurs, 154
Asztalos, Dr., 270
Atkins, H. E., 204
French Defence, 44,
198,
From's Gambit, 270
Gaining a move, 67
Giuoco Piano, 134. I35. ^38. 141
Backward pawns, 35, 11*
Barasz, 227
Barry, 204
Bauer, 25 5
Berger, J., 180
Berlin, 180
Bernstein, Dr., 39, 258
Bird, H. E., 105
Blackbume, J. H., 98, 102, 147, 274
Blanco, 209
Breslau Variation, 175
Bum, A., 117. 126
Gregory, 136
Griffith, R. C.,x, 138
Gunsberg, J., 141. "^11
Gunston, W. H., 1 38
Capablanca, T. R, 42, 134, 164, 182,
Janowski, D., 105,
184, 209, 236, 241, 249, 255, 258
Caro-Kann, 43, 5°. 229, 232
Centre, 27
Centre Counter, 43. 225, 227
Centre Gambit, 34
Charousek, R., 108
Cohn, E., 120, 234
Cole, 194
Danish Gambit, 33
Distant Opposition, 80, 85, 100
Distant passed pawn, 77, 99
Doubled pawns, 32, 115
Dus Chotimirski, 261
Dutch Defence, 61
Dutch Opening, 270
Elementary, i
Elementary combinations, 9
Elementary end-games, 64
End-game, 63
End-games from master-play, 97
England. F., 19
Esser, Dr., 200
Falkbeer Counter Gambit, 35. 129
Fixing an objective, 1 1
Forced move, 45. 87. 245
Forgacz, 106, 198, 234
Four Knights' Game, i»8, 193
200, 204.
206, 209, 21
Hart, J., x, 3
Heinrichsen, 108
HoweU, C. S., 135
Irregular Openings, 62,
263, 267,
270, 274
Isolated pawns, 82
159.
175.
188,
223
John, 223
King's Bishop's Opening, 34
King's Gambit, 30, 126
King's Pawn Games, 29, 126-233
Knight's move. 3
Lasker, -Ed,, 84, 100,120,123, 164,182,
188, 193, 194. 196, 225, 241, 250, 267
Lasker, Dr. Em., 39- 42, i47. 171. ^75.
184, 206, 224, 229, 236, 254
Lazard, Fred., 123
Leonhardt, S. P., 87. 129
Losing a move, 2
MacCutcheon, 207
Manceuvring of pieces, 119
Maroczy, G., 180
Marshall, F.
J.,
"7.
129, 144, 150,
236
Mason, J., 141
Max Lange Attack, 144, 1 55
Middle Game, 109
Mieses, J., 225, 227
Mitchell. 135
Mobility, 18
MoU, K., 84, 88
Moller Attack, 135
Morphy, P., 23
381
1
INDEX
282
NiEMZOWITSCH, A., Si, 174, 211, 229,
252
Salwe, 150
V.
Scheve, 116
Schlechter, C, 102, 159, 167, 171, 224
Notation, $
Objective, hi
Opening, the, 20
Open files and diagonals, 121
Opposition, 70
Opposition (Distant), 80, 85, 100
Paulsen, L., 218
Pawn endings, 70
Pawn play, 26
Pawn skeleton, 26, 1 11
Pillsbury, H. N.,
Pin, 12, 16, 113
Post, 87, 88
1
56
Prokes, 132
Queen's Counter Gambit, 60
Queen's Gambit, 54, 234
Queen's Pawn Games, 52, 234-267
Scotch Gambit, 34
Scotch Game, 34, 147
Shattered pawn position, 115
Sicilian Defence, 52, 215,218, 220, 223
Simple calculation, 10, 13
Spielmann, R., 132, 170, 218, 220,
263, 270
Steiner, 106
Steinitz, W., 156
Stonewall, 58
Tarrasch, Dr. S., 42, 134, 144, 170,
182, 206, 211, 220, 252
Tartakower, Dr., 126, 198, 232, 270
Teichmann, R., 98, 116, 154, 163,
164, 167, 218, 241, 242
Thomas, G. A., 267
Two Knights' Defence, i 50, 1 54
Three Knights' Defence, 196
Value of pieces, 1
Reti, 232
Riga, 180
Riga Variation, 159, 180
Rio de Janeiro Variation, 40
Rotlewi, 100, 241, 246
Rubinstein. A. K., 50, 163, 215, 242,
246, 249, 263
Ruy Lopez, 36, 159-188
Vidmar, Dr., 261
Vienna Game, 35, 132
Weaknesses in a pawn position, 83,
103, 109, 114, 117
White, J. H., X
Yates, F. D., 177, 200
Printed by Spottiswoode, Ballantyne 6* Co.
Colchester, London (J- Eton, England
Lxa